en_ complete sinumerik operate milling_v26

82

8D

/8

40

Dsl

Sin

um

erik

o

pe

rate

This document was produced for training purposes. Siemens assumes no responsibility for its contents.

Operating and Programming

Documentation

Milling

Training Manual

Edition 2011.1

SINUMERIK 828D

840D sl SINUMERIK Operate

Operating and Programming Manual for Milling machines

Valid for:

Sinumerik 828D Software 4.3

840D sl Sinumerik Operate Software 2.6

Start

End

B551 General

Technology basics

B552 Geometry

Basics

B553 Simple Contour

Elements

B554 Mathematical

Principles B555

Zero offset and Reference

Points

B556 Program Structure

B557 Cutting Edge

Radius Correction

B558 Program of Subroutines

B559 Loops, Jumps, and Repetitions

B560 Mirror - offset - rotate - scale when milling

B565 Basics

B566 Operating Elements

B567 Switching on the Machine

B568 Basic

Operations

B569 Operating Area

MACHINE

B570 Operating Mode

JOG B571

Operating Mode MDA

B572 Operating Mode

AUTO

B573 Operating Area PARAMETER

B574 Operating Area

Program

B575 Operating Area

Program Manager

B576 Operating Area

Diagnostics

B577 Operating Area

Start-Up

B604 Basics of

Programming with

programGUIDE B609

Drilling programGUIDE

B616 Milling

programGUIDE

B624 Contour Milling programGUIDE

B656 Measure Milling programGUIDE

B600 Basics of

Programming with Shopmill

B608 Drilling

Shopmill

B615 Milling

Shopmill

B623 Contour Milling

Shopmill

Contents

B639 Straight Circle

Shopmill

B655 Measure Milling

Shopmill

B500 Cycles

B700 Drawings of

programming Examples

This document was produced for training purposes. Siemens assumes no responsibility for its contents. 828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate Page 1 B551B551

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

General technology basics

1 Brief description

Objective of the module:

Working through this module you become familiar with the most important technological aspects and machine functions.

Description of the module:

This module explains the general layout of a program, with respect to the technological commands as per DIN 66025 for turning and milling.

B551

Content:

Layout of a CNC-program Programming of the technology data Switching commands Programmable presettings Summary

B551B551 Page 2 828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

B551

B551

Notes :

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate Page 3 B551B551

General technological

aspect: START

Layout of a CNC-program

Programming of the techno-

logy data

Switching commands

Programmable presettings

Summary

General technological

aspect: END

General technology basics: Description

This module explains the general layout of a pro-gram, with respect to the technological commands as per DIN 66025 for turning and milling.


Notes:

The block number is a program-technical assignment, which is not evalu-ated by the control unit as a command. It is usually programmed to go up in steps of 10 and serves the user only for a better oversight. It has no effect on the program execution. The geometrical data include all instructions that clearly define mathemati-cally the motion of the tool or the axes. The technological data are used for instance to activate the required tool and to pre-select the necessary cutting parameters feed rate and spindle speed. Miscellaneous functions can control for example such things as di-rection of rotation and auxiliary appliances. Programming example: …. N80 T1; Roughing tool N90 M6 N100 G54 F0.2 S180 M4 N110 G00 X20 Y0 Z2 D1 N120 …. In order to improve the oversight within a program, comments can be op-tionally added at the end of a block. These must be preceded by a semi-colon; Any characters that follow thereafter will not be taken account of by the control unit.

A CNC-program, also known as part program, consists of a logical se-quence of commands, which are executed step-by-step by the control unit after the program has been started. The manufacturers of control units recognize and apply the guidelines as per DIN 66025. Each program is compiled and stored under a program name in the con-trol unit. The name can contain letters as well as numbers. A block starts with a block number followed by the commands. Each command consists of command words, which in turn consist of an address letter (A-Z) and an associated numerical value (both upper or lower case characters are permissible). Program layout:

Geometrical data

Block Nr..

Departure information Switching information

Auxil-iary

com-mand

Coordinate axes Interpolation para-meter

Feed Speed Tool Misc. func-tion

N G X Y Z I J K F S T M

Technological data

Layout of a CNC-program Section 2


Notes:

Section 3 Programming of the technology data

Before every technological working step in a CNC-Program the respective tool must be selected by means of the addresses “T” and “D”. The address “T” is followed by the name of the tool, which may be stated either with numbers or letters (here only the variant using numbers will be dealt with). All applicable tool data (e.g. tool type, length, radius, etc.) are activated in the program with the address “D”. Here a complete set of data “D“ is referred to as “Cutting edge”. Several cutting edge numbers (D1 … D9) may be generated for each tool. Programming example: Explanation:

N10 T17 ; Drill Block 10, call-up of tool 17, Commentary to the tool N20 M6 Tool change, N30 … D1 The cutting edge D... must be activated in the block with the first axis movement. After the call-up of the tool, follows the selection of the optimum cutting values with the addresses “F” and “S”. The feed rate vf with the address “F” can be entered either as feed per min (in mm/min) or as feed per revolution (in mm/rev). The Cutting speed vc with the address “S” can be entered either as spindle speed in revolutions per minute (rev/min) or direct as cutting speed in me-ters per minute (m/min). Default status of the machines when they are powered up are as follows:

Milling machines with feed rate “F” in mm/min Code G94

Turning machines with feed per revolution “F” in mm/rev Code G95

Selection of cutting speed:

Constant cutting speed “S” in m/min Code G96 (Relative to workpiece Ø)

Deactivate constant cutting speed “S” Code G97 spindle speed in rev/min (default)

Programming example 1: Explanation:

N10 T20 ; Endmill N20 M6 N30 G94 F200 S1000 M3 D1 vf = 200 mm/min, n = 1000 min-1

N40 …. Programming example 2: Explanation:

N10 T2; Turning tool, finishing N20 G96 F0.1 S200 M4 D1 vf = 0,1 mm/rev , vc = 200 m/min N30 ….


Notes:

Section 4 Switching commands

There are different commands to control the direction of rotation of the work spindle. Additional auxiliary functions can for example control cooling circuits, clamping devices, auxiliary functions and running of the program. But the presence of these additional functions depends entirely on the technology and the machine design. The following list should be only considered as an example of commands: Instruction Meaning

M00 Programmed Halt M03 Work spindle ON, clockwise M04 Work spindle ON, anti-clockwise M05 Work spindle Halt (however, the program continues) M06 Tool change M08 Coolant ON M09 Coolant OFF M30 End of program; jump back to the start of the program Programming example: Explanation:

N10 T1; Face mill N20 M6 Tool change N30 G94 G97 F600 S2500 D1 vf = 600 mm/min, n = 2500 min-1

N40 M3 M8 Spindle ON clockwise, coolant ON ….. N90 M30 End of program (Note: Further functions can be found in the annexure of this manual) Effect of the switching commands M3 and M4 Example Milling Example Turning

M3

M4

Viewing direction

M4

M3


Notes:

Programmable presettings Section 5

When starting a part program the basic settings as defined by the manu-facturer will be activated. These depend on the individual machine specifi-cation and apply thereafter for the whole of the program run (modal) unless they are changed by the operator in the program. This section describes just a few of the possible selections for turning- and milling machines that deserve highlighting.

Note: Codes that have already been dealt with are no longer included Continuous path behaviour: Exact stop Code G09 block-by-block Code G60 * modal In order to reach the final position precisely the path velocity is reduced at the end of the block towards zero. This is useful, for instance, to obtain relatively sharp edges when machining around contour corners. However, it must be borne in mind that, if there are too many positioning sequences, it will result in increased machining time and cannot be ne-glected. Continuous control operation Code G64 In this case the tool moves as much as possible with constant velocity without deceleration at the end of a block. Hence the machining time is less than under the continuous path status “Exact stop“. The corners of contours are machined without any relief and therefore the corners are not so sharply defined. With this function the control works with a speed control taking into ac-count several blocks ahead (Look Ahead). The even speed in this instance results in better cutting conditions and also a better surface quality. The following image compares the frequent braking and accelerating se-quences between the individual blocks in case of G60 and the constant speed in case of G64. * Usual preset starting status

G64 Continuous path mode with Look Ahead

G60 Exact stop

Programmed feed rate

Feed rate

Block path


Notes:

Section 5 Programmable presettings

The continuous path behaviour “Exact stop“ with the Codes G09 or G60 respectively does not entirely ensure dimension-wise as to how precisely a corner point between two positioning blocks is attained. If an exact stop has been activated in a program, the codes described be-low can be used to specify a very precise braking behaviour at the end of blocks. By this it is possible to determine as to how precisely the pro-grammed corner point will be attained. Change-over when the positioning window “fine” is reached Code G601 The tool motion changes to the next block when the tool has reached the fine positioning window. Sharp contour corners result at the programmed destination points. Change-over when the positioning window “coarse” is reached Code G602 This code can be used to obtain a defined rounding of the programmed contour corners. The block change-over occurs already at the coarse posi-tioning window.

A dimensional definition of the positioning windows “coarse” and “fine” is preset by means of machine datum. Please find out the values preset on your machine by the machine manu-facturer from his operation manual if you are going to use the described codes.

Tool

Destination point of the pro-grammed path

Block change-over

Actual tool paths depending on the positioning window

G60

G601


Notes:

Section 5 Programmable presettings

There is yet another means of influencing the continuous path behaviour by changing over to the next positioning block depending on the pro-grammed path velocity of the tool. Change-over when the setpoint position is reached: Code G603 The block change-over is initiated as soon as the control has calculated the setpoint speed for all axes to be equal to zero. Since the physical tool position lags behind the calculated value by a cer-tain amount, the effect in this case is that the axis changes direction before the end of the interpolation is reached. The greater the feed rate, the greater is also the lag of the tool behind the evaluated value and therefore the rounding radius. This permits the contour corners to be formed in dependence on the path velocity.

Hint: The rounding radius depends on the programmed path velocity as swell as the drive dynamics of the machine. The codes G601, G602 and G603 are modal. They only have an effect in conjunction with active exact stop with G09 or G60.

Destination point of the pro-grammed path (Interpolation ends)

Actual tool path with smaller feed rates Actual tool path with greater feed rates Workpiece


Notes:

Section 6 Summary

Address Meaning

T D F S

Tool number Cutting edge (tool data) Feed/Feed rate Speed/Cutting speed

Path information/departure commands

Instruction Meaning

G09 G60 G64 G601 G602 G603

Exact stop, operative block-by-block Exact stop, modal function Continuous path control Change-over when positioning window “fine” is reached Change-over when positioning window “coarse” is reached Change-over when the interpolation end is reached

G70 G71

Input system in inches Input system metrical

G94 G95

Linear feed in mm/min * Feed per revolution in mm **

G96 G97

Constant cutting speed in m/min ** Spindle speed in min-1 *

* Switching-ON status for milling machines ** Switching-ON status for turning machines

Switching information

Instruction Meaning

M00 Programmed halt

M03 M04 M05

Work spindle ON, clockwise Work spindle ON, anti-clockwise Work spindle Stop

M06 Tool change

M08 M09

Coolant ON Coolant OFF

M17 M18

End of subprogram End of program, jump back to the beginning of program

All instructions (except G09) mentioned above are modal, until they are pro-grammed to deactivate with different set of instructions. Furthermore there are instructions that are operative only block-by-block, e.g. G09. These are automatically reset by the control unit with the succeed-ing block.

D:/Sinumerik Operate/Milling v2.6 - English/In Work/EN_Frontcover Operating and Programming.pub



General geometry basics

1 Brief description


Working through this module you learn to understand the programming planes and also how to specify points in a DIN conforming coordinate system.


This module explains the assignment of the axis and plane descriptions to the coordinate system of the machine and also teaches the definition of points in relation to the work space.

B552

Content: Right hand rule Explanation of the axis assignments Points and distances in the work space Programming planes


B552

B552

Notes :


General geometry basics: Description

This module explains the assignment of the axis and plane descriptions to the coordinate system of the machine and also teaches the definition of points in relation to the work space.

General geometry basics: START

Right hand rule

Explanation of the axis as-signments

Points and distances in

the work space

Programming planes

General geometry basics:

END


Notes:

Section 2 Right hand rule

Definition of axis according to DIN-standard:

Z-Axis: Is aligned parallel to the working spindle or coincides with it. The positive direction points away from the work piece. In case of more than one spindle, one of them will be declared as the main spindle.

X-Axis: Is aligned parallel to the set-up plane or coincides with it. If the Z-axis is vertical, the positive X-axis is directed towards the right. If the Z-axis is horizontal, the positive X-axis is directed towards the left.

Y-Axis: Is perpendicular to the X- and Z-axis, in such a way that a spa-tial cartesian coordinate system results.

The direction “FROM” the work piece “TO” the tool is “PLUS” The tool movement is “ALWAYS” to be programmed!

Explanation:

According to DIN standard the various axes of motion within work space of CNC machines are addressed by alphabets. The rules for the assignment of the axes are determined in this DIN-standard.

The machine coordinate system that is derived from the DIN-standard is the base for the geometrical description of work pieces which allows us to clearly determine the points in a plane or in space.

The cartesian (rectangular) spatial coordinate system can be best de-scribed with the “Right hand rule”. Here the fingers of the right hand rep-resent the axes: “X” (thumb), “Y” (first finger) and “Z” (middle finger). The finger tips point in the positive direction.

The position of the machine coordinate system is specified by the machine manufacturer keeping the following in mind:

Vertical turning machine Horizontal milling machine


Notes:

Section 3 Defining of axis within a workspace

Explanation as per DIN 66217 or ISO 841:

However defining only three axes is not enough on modern machine tools. For instance if the milling head of a milling machine is to be swivelled by a certain angle or the quill of a tailstock is to be moved, a further definition of these axes is required. The DIN standard provides the following variants for such cases.

Here the rotational axes A/B/C are associated with the X/Y/Z axes. Looking in the positive direc-tion of the linear axis, a clock-wise rotation equals a positive rotation of the associated ro-tary axis.

The axes U/V/W are parallel to the axes X/Y/Z. The positive direction is that of the associated main axis.

V

W

U

X

W

B Y

Z


Notes:

Section 4 Points and distances within the work space

Explanation: For the determination of all points within the work space, the control unit requires a zero point of the coordinate system. This has been determined by the machine manufacturer. All other points have either fixed distances from the machine zero point or else the distance must be defined.

The machine zero point (M) is determined by the machine manufacturer and cannot be altered. On milling machines point is usually set on the work table, and on turning machines on the spindle flange.

The work piece zero point (W) is the origin of the work piece coordinate system. This can be specified by the programmer and should always be chosen in a way that the least calculation work is required to determine points on the contour given the dimen-sioning of the drawing. For turning work it lies mostly on the turning axis and the right hand planar face.

The reference point (R) is approached for initializ-ing the path measuring system, which means that at this point all axes are set to zero. This is necessary since generally speaking the machine zero point cannot be approached.

The tool carrier reference point (F) is of prime im-portance for the adjustment of preset tools. The lengths “L” (XPF) and offset “O” (ZPF) shown in the image below are used as tool calculation values for instance for the tool radius correction and must be entered into the tool memory of the control unit.

ZMW

ZMR

ZMF

XM

R

ZPF

XM

F

XP

F

Example: 2-axis turning machine


Notes:

Section 4 Points and distances within the work space

XMR = YMR = ZMR =

Distances from the reference point to the machine zero point. These are set by the machine manufac-turer during commissioning and are transferred to the control unit when the reference point is reached.

XMW = YMW = ZMW =

These represent distances from the machine zero point to the work piece zero point. The work piece zero point must be determined by the operator by scratching or probing and entered into the tool cor-rection memory.

XPF = ZPF =

Distances from the tool carrier reference point to the tool point on the cutting edge or the front face of the milling cutter.

XMF = ZMF =

Distances from the machine zero point to the tool carrier reference point. The distance is determined by the machine manufacturer and entered into the control unit (only relevant on turning machines).

Example: 3-axis milling machine

XMW

ZM

W

YM

R

ZP

F

ZM

R

YM

W

XMR


Notes:

Section 5 Programming planes

Continuous path control units can control slides and tool carriers simulta-neously along 2 or more axes at a programmed feed rate. For this the speed of the individual drives must be matched to one another. This job is taken over by the interpolator of the CNC-control unit. This is a software program for the evaluation of intermediate positions and speed conditions of the individual axes such that the slides can follow the programmed path. Starting with a 2 ½-D Continuous path control unit the interpolation can be switched between the three different planes.

G19

G17

G18

-Y +X

+Z

A selection of the plane is made with the associated programming instruction:

XY-Plane - programming command G17

XZ-Plane - programming command G18

YZ-Plane - programming command G19 Note: The standard plane being used for working with CNC-Turning machines is G18. With CNC-Milling machines the programming plane G17 is being used. The working plane should either be programmed at the beginning of the NC-program, or before programming an operation in the relevant working plane. The active programming plane is modal and remains active until changed by another programming instruction.

D:/Sinumerik Operate/Milling v2.6 - English/In Work/EN_Frontcover Operating and Programming.pub



Simple contour elements

1 Brief description


Working through this module you learn to program linear and circular interpolation commands both with absolute and incremental dimensions.


This module explains the use of absolute, incremental and mixed coordinate points. It also explains the programming of simple geometrical path conditions.

B553

Content:

Absolute and incremental dimensioning, mixed programming Rapid traverse motion Straight line interpolation Circular interpolation Summary


B553

B553

Notes :


Simple contour elements:

START

Absolute and in-cremental dimen-

sioning, mixed programming

Rapid traver-se

motion

Straight line interpolation

Circular interpolation

Summary

Simple contour elements:

END

Simple contour elements: Description

This module explains the use of absolute, incre-mental and mixed coordinate points. It also ex-plains the programming of simple geometrical path conditions.


Notes:

Absolute and incremental dimensioning, mixed programming

When writing CNC-programs a fundamental differentiation must be made between absolute and incremental coordinates. Which of the two options the programmer chooses depends on the usage of the program and the dimensioning on the drawing.

Absolute dimensioning, Code G90

All dimensions always refer to the active work piece zero point. About workpiece zero point refer to Module B555 - “reference point, work-piece offset”, Section 3. The absolute coordinates in a departure command describe the position, to which the tool is to traverse.

G90 X Y

P1 20 35

P2 50 60

P3 70 20

G90 X Z

P1 25 -7.5

P2 40 -15

P3 40 -25

P4 60 -35

Example: Coordinates for milling:

Coordinates An example for turning: (All X values are diameter values, DIAMON)

Code G90 is usually activated as machine status when switching ON. It is modally active for all axes simultaneously and can be reset to incre-mental dimensioning with G91.

Workpiece zero point

2. 1 Absolute dimensioning

Section 2


Notes:


Code G91 (also known as chain dimensioning). All position statements refer to the current starting position of the tool. The programmed value states the coordinate distance, by which the tool is being traversed.

G91 X Y

P1 20 35

P2 30 20

P3 20 -35

G91 X Z

P1 12.5 -7.5

P2 7.5 -7.5

P3 0 -10

P4 10 -10

Code G91 is modally active for all axes simultaneously and can be reset to absolute dimensioning with G90.

2.2 Incremental dimensioning

Example: Coordinates for milling:

Example: Coordinates for turning: (All X values are radius values, DIAMOF)

Section 2


Notes:


G90 X Y

P1 20 35

P2 IC(30) IC(25)

P3 70 IC(-40)

G91 X Y

P1 AC(20) AC(35)

P2 30 AC(60)

P3 20 -40

As already mentioned, the destination point coordinates can be stated in the program for all types of interpolation as absolute or incremental values respectively. Depending on the presently activated status (G90 or G91), all further coor-dinate values will refer then also this type of dimensioning. In practice, however, it is often sensible to mix the two possibilities within a program block. The control unit provides a comfortable means of instruc-tion to utilize this additional possibility.

Mixed programming: Codes AC(…) and IC(…)

A dimension value will also be taken as an absolute dimension under G91 if the following syntax is used: AC(numerical value) If a dimension value is to be taken to be an incremental value under G90, it must be written as follows: IC(numerical value) Clarification of mixed programming with an example for milling:

A great number of various possibilities are available to the operator in deal-ing with a mixture of the two types of dimensioning: Note: The above example describes only a small selection of mixed coordinate inputs. A further selection of examples can be found in the description of interpolation types in this manual.

2.3 Mixed Programming

Section 2


Notes:

Rapid traverse motion

Code G00

Rapid traverse is used for the quickest possible repositioning of the tool to the contour element or, for instance, for moving the tool to the tool chang-ing position. The highest possible speed along a straight line that the machine is capa-ble of attaining is used, however, no machining is possible here. Hence the control unit does not require a value input under the address “F”. Repositioning with rapid traverse can be programmed to take place in sev-eral axes simultaneously. Programming example: Explanation:

N10 T1 ; End mill N20 M6 N30 G00 X200 Y80 Z2 D1 Motion at rapid traverse to the destination point X200, Y80, Z2 (taking into account the tool length)

N90 M30 End of program The above programming example repositions the tool from point P1 to the point P2.

straight line

Section 3


Notes:


Code G01

The straight line interpolation is used to move the tool with an exactly de-fined speed along a straight line from the current position to the pro-grammed destination point. All axes can be traversed simultaneously, in which case the resulting line of motion can lie anywhere at an angle within the working space. For this the control unit requires a specified feed rate which at the latest must be defined under the address “F” in the block containing the Code G1. The following example describes the milling of a slot with absolute dimen-sioning as per the drawing shown below. Note: The setup feed rate G94 defines the feed rate in millimetre per minute (mm/min), in comparison to setup feed rate G95 that defines the feed rate in millimetre per revolution (mm/rev). Programming example: Explanation:

N10 T1 ; End mill Tool call-up T1 N20 M6 N30 G94 F300 S2000 M3 D1 Technology block for the tool T1 with the cutting edge D1, N40 G90 G00 X40 Y48 Z2 M8 With rapid traverse to the starting position P1 on the safety plane (absolute dimensions), N50 G01 Z-12 Plunging with feed rate, N60 X20 Y18 Z-10 Milling the slot in 3 axes (G1 is modally active), N70 Z2 F1000 Retraction with increased feed rate N80 G00 Z200

N90 M30 The following program section shows the milling of the same slot using in-cremental dimensioning (up to N40 see above): N50 G91 G1 Z-14 Infeed along Z by –14 mm, N60 G01 X-20 Y-30 Z2 Incremental traversing of the axes N70 G90 Z2 F1000 Retraction with absolute dimensions N80 G00 Z200

N90 M30

4.1 Straight line interpolation

Section 4


Notes:


4.2 Straight line interpolation with mixed programming

The example shown below describes the milling of the slot with mixed cordinates input. Program blocks such as the call-up of the tool etc., which have already been dealt with, will not be repeated. Important: If any address letter “X”, “Y”, “Z” is not followed immediately by a numerical value, an equal-sign must be written instead. Syntax: X=IC(…), Y=AC(…), Z... Programming example under G90: Explanation:

…. N40 G90 G00 X40 Y48 Z2 M8 To starting position absolute N50 G01 Z=IC(-14) Incremental coordinate Z N60 X20 Y=IC(-30) Z-10 Incremental coordinate Y N70 Z2 F1000 ….

Programming example under G91: Explanation: N10 G91 Incremental dimensioning, …. N40 G00 X=AC(40) Y=AC(48) Z=AC(2) To starting position P1 absolute N50 G01 Z-14 Incremental coordinate Z N60 X=AC(20) Y-30 Z2 Absolute coordinate X N70 Z=AC(2) F1000 Absolute coordinate Z ….

Section 4


Notes:


Code G02 (clockwise) Code G03 (anti-clockwise) A circular interpolation permits the traversing of the tool with a defined speed along a circular path from the present start point to the programmed destination point. Apart from the destination point coordinates, the control unit also needs statements about the sense of rotation and the centre of the circle. The centre is entered with “I”, “J” and “K” with incremental dimensions with the centre point as origin. The following assignment applies:

I for the X-axis

J for the Y-axis

K for the Z-axis Programming example with G02: Explanation: ….. N40 G00 X30 Y40 Z2 With rapid traverse to the start point N50 G01 Z-5 Grooving with Z N60 G02 X50 Y40 I10 J-7 Circular interpolation clockwise N70 G01 Z2 F1000 …..

The following example describes an anti-clockwise circular interpolation as shown in the sketch above. Note: The endpoint in the sketch is now the starting point for the circular interpo-lation. Programming example with G03: Explanation: ….. N40 G00 X50 Y40 Z2 With rapid traverse to the start point N50 G01 Z-5 N60 G03 X40 Y40 I-10 J-7 Circular interpolation anti-clockwise N70 G01 Z2 F1000 …..

5.1 Circular interpolation

End point

Centre point

Start point

Section 5


Notes:


5.2 Circular interpolation with mixed programming

Particularly the incremental statement of the centre of the circle usually represents some difficulties to the operator in practice, since it must often be evaluated using triangle calculations. This is a prime example of where the mixed coordinate programming of the circle centre point in absolute dimensions comes in useful. Programming example: Explanation: ….. N40 G00 X30 Y40 Z2 N50 G01 Z-5 N60 G02 X50 Y40 I=AC(40) J=AC(33) Circle centre absolute N70 G01 Z2 F1000 …..

End point

Centre point

Start point

Section 5


Notes:


5.3 Circular interpolations before and behind the turning axis

The sketch below shows once again the principle of direction programming of circular interpolations. Code G02: Circular arc clockwise Code G03: Circular arc anti-clockwise The following sketch shows the circular arc orientation on turning ma-chines with different tool arrangements due to the machine layout.

Note: No matter which tool arrangement is applicable to the particular machine, the program as per DIN ISO always describes the contour of the workpiece behind the turning axis.

G3

G2

G3

G2

Tool arrangement in front of the turning axis

Tool arrangement behind the turning axis

Section 5


Notes:

Summary

Path information

Instruction Meaning

G90 Coordinate input with absolute dimensions

G91 Coordinate input with incremental dimensions

G00 Linear motion with rapid traverse

G01 Straight line interpolation with defined speed

G02 Circular interpolation clockwise

G03 Circular interpolation anti-clockwise

All the above departure commands are modal.

Interpolation parameter

Meaning

I Circle centre coordinate in X, incremental from starting point

J Circle centre coordinate in Y, incremental from starting point

K Circle centre coordinate in Z, incremental from starting point

The interpolation parameters are operative block-by-block

Mixed programming for coordinate input

IC(…) AC(…)

Incremental dimension input Absolute dimension input

The statements IC(…) and AC(…) are valid only for the address preceed-ing them.

Example:

Instruction Meaning

X=IC(10) Y=AC(20)

Traverse by 10 mm in X Traverse to 20 mm in Y

Section 6


Notes:

Section End



Basic mathematical principles B554

1 Brief description


Working through this module you learn the mathematical approach necessary for the programming and for the calculation of missing contour points.


In this module contour points will be calculated using the Pythagorean theorem and trigonometrical functions (sine, cosine and tangent).

Content: Types of angles The Pythagorean theorem Trigonometrical functions Example calculations


B554

B554

Notes :


Basic mathematical principles:

START

Types of angles

The Pythago-rean theorem

Trigonometri-cal functions

Example calculations

Basic mathematical principles:

END

Basic mathematical principles: Description

In this module contour points will be calculated using the Pythagorean theorem and trigonometri-cal functions (sine, cosine and tangent).


Notes:

Types of angles

2.1 Basic principles of coordinate evaluation

Almost all of the contours encountered during machining can be traced back to a interface of straight lines and circular arcs.

For part programming the respective endpoint of the contour element must be known.

In most cases these contour points can be taken directly from the drawing provided dimensioning is NC-suitable. In some cases, however, the an evaluation of coordinates may be necessary. For these calculations a ba-sic knowledge of the types of angles, trigonometrical functions and the Py-thagorean theorem is required.

2.2 Types of angles

In the case of oblique work piece contours angles with a definite relation-ship to one another result between the contour sections. Depending on their relative position a differentiation is made between complementary an-gles, step angles and side angles.

If a transition is at right angles to the radius centre point it is always a tan-gential transition, and there is no corner shown on the technical drawing. If a corner line is shown, it is not a tangential transition.

Step angles have always the same value

Complementary angles add up to 180°

Section 2


Notes:

The Pythagorean theorem

The right angled triangle has a special meaning in geometry, since the sides of such a triangle exhibit a definite relationship to one another.

The various sides of the right angled triangle are named specifically:

The longest line opposite the right angle is called the hypotenuse.

The two other lines, which form the right angle, are called cathetus.

The side opposite an angle is called the opposite side.

The bounding side of the angle is called the adjacent side.

c²= a² + b²

By suitable rearrangement of the equations the respective sides can be calculated.

3x3=9

4x4=16

5x5=25

16+9=25

a = 2b2c

c = 2b2a

b = 2a2c

a

b

c

In case of a right angled triangle the missing length of a side can be calcu-lated if the length of the other two sides is known. For this the Pythagorean theorem is used.

Pythagorean theorem:

In a right-angled triangle the square of the hypotenuse (the side opposite the right angle), c, is equal to the sum of the squares of the other two sides, b and a - that is: a² + b² = c².

Section 3

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pythagorean_theorem


Notes:

Trigonometrical functions

The trigonometrical ratios describe the relationships between the angles and the sides in a right angled triangle. With the aid of these trigonometri-cal functions it is possible to calculate both angles and sides in a right an-gled triangle. For this one side and an angle or two sides must be known. The selection of the suitable trigonometrical function, i. e. the sine, cosine or tangent, depends on which sides and angles are known and which side or angle is to be found.

By the use of the various trigonometrical functions all sides and angles can be calculated.

3

2

1

α

1. Adjacent side (AS) 2. Hypotenuse (H) 3. Opposite side (OS) α Angle β Angle

β

Sine function

Cosine function

Tangent function

H

OSαsin

sin

OSH H*αsinOS

H

AScos HAS *cos

AS

OStan

tan

OSAS ASOS *tan

cos

ASH

Section 4


Notes:

Example calculations

P1 M1 P2 P3 P4 M2

X 25 35 40 30

Z -20 -20

Evaluate the missing coordinates of the points “P1” to “P4”, as well as “M1” and “M2”

Enter the coordinate values in the table.

The values for the spaces shown with a dark background are dimen-sions that can be taken directly from the drawing.

Note: All X values are diameter values See the next page for the solution of this example.

5.1 Task

Section 5


Notes:

P1 M1 P2 P3 P4 M2

X 25 35 27,929 37,071 40 30

Z -20 -20 -23,536 -28,107 -31,642 -31,642

For the solution method see the following page

5.2 Solution for the example calculation

Example calculations Section 5


Notes:

Since the two sides are equal, all values can be found using the Pythago-rean theorem.

5355,235355,3202/²5202zp202zpz1Pz2P

929,27))5355,35(*2(25))2xp5(*2(25x2P

642,315355,31065,282zpz3Pz4P

071,37)5355,35(*240x3P

a (P3x p2x) / 2 (37,071 27,929) / 2 4,571

571,4a3zp

1065,28571,4535,3203zp2zpz1Pz3P

5355,3)1(*2zp4zp

xp3 zp4 3,5355

5355,32/²552xp

5355,32xp2zp

5.3 Solution method

Example calculations Section 5


Notes:

Section End



Zero points, work offset and reference point

B555

1 Brief description


In this module you learn to use the various zero points within the working space of a milling machine.


This module describes the call-up of individual work piece zero points on the work piece with reference to various starting conditions.

Content:

Position of the machine zero point Zero point offset G54 Further zero point offsets Further zero point offsets Summary


B555

B555

Notes :


Zero offsets and reference points:

START

Position of the machine zero

point

Zero point offset G54

Further zero point offsets


Summary

Zero offsets and reference points:

END

Zero offsets and reference points: Description

This module describes the call-up of individual work piece zero points on the work piece with ref-erence to various starting conditions.


Notes:

Z

X

M Y

Section 2 Position of the machine zero point

All axis motions on a CNC-machine tool refer to the right-hand Cartesian coordinate system. Note: See also Module B552 - “Geometry basics”. The entire path measuring system is initialized by approaching the refer-ence point with all axes. At the same time the control unit activates the coordinate system at the machine zero point.

This fixed coordinate point (origin) is determined by the manufacturer and cannot be altered by the operator. It serves as a reference point for the machine coordinate system (MCS) of the machine tool.

M Machine zero point


Notes:

Zero point offset G54

For machining the workpiece the workpiece coordinate system (WCS) is available on the machine. This can be freely chosen by the operator depending on the manufacturing conditions or according to the usual workshop practice. By this you define a zero point on the workpiece which is offset from the machine zero point by a defined distance, obtaining a work piece zero point that is directly referred to the workpiece to be machined.

Zero point offset: Code G54 (modally operative) With this command the workpiece zero point can be defined on the ma-chine. The following image shows how the position of the workpiece zero has been shifted with G54 by the operator to the marked corner point, alterna-tively any other corner can be defined as workpiece zero The determined zero point on the machine can be set in JOG mode and can be activated in the program with the same comand (G54). By this the coordinate origin for the program and the machine zero point coordinate are now identical. Programming example: Explanation:

N10 G17 G54 ... Plane selection, call-up of the zero point offset G54 N20 G00 X200 Z300 Approach tool changing point N30 T1; Surface cutter Call-up tool T1 ...

W Workpiece zero point

Section 3


Notes:


Nevertheless, for the efficient production of parts the availability of several workpiece zero points often makes sense. The control unit manufacturer provides for up to 99 selectable zero point offsets. Note: Depending on the machine parameters this number can be set differently. Please refer to the machine manual regarding the exact number of avail-able zero points.

Further zero point offsets: Codes G55, G56 and G57

Codes G505 to G599 (all stated codes are modally operative) The application example shows a requirement for a second workpiece zero offset. In the picture below the work piece zero point has been transferred with G55 exactly to the setting plane of the chuck jaws. In the program this must be activated by means of the code G55. The use of several zero point offsets can substantially reduce the setup times particularly in cases of one-off or small series machining. For example: You could define just once a specific setting point for each one of your clamping fixtures or else a specific work piece zero point for various work pieces. In the program the respective zero point offset depending on the clamping fixture or the work piece can then be selected. If an identical work piece is to be machined at a later time, the respective zero point is immediately available under the same code. Important: Zero point offset instructions or commands are MODAL COMMANDS .i.e. once executed they remain active until they are newly defined with the same command or a different set of commands is activated.

G54

G55

Section 4


Notes:

Milling machines usually have a fixed tool change position (TCP). This point is typically chosen in a way, that tools can be changed in a collision-proof area in the work space of the machine. For this the tool carrier is generally retracted well back into the positive range of the work space. Note: Take into account the real traverse ranges of your machine; the values used in the example are only exemplary! Programming example 1: Explanation:

N10 G17 G54 ... N20 G00 X300 Z150 Approach of the tool changing point N30 T1; Milling cutter Indexing the turret to position T1 ... On this basis the tool carrier will traverse to various positions depending on the active tool length (Z) and the position of the work piece zero point. Note: It is always the tool tip that is being positioned. On the next page a suggestion for the programming of an independent tool changing point can be found.

Pos. X

Pos. Y

Pos. Z

Tool changing point Section 5


Notes:

In order to approach a tool changing point that is independent of the length of the tool and the presently active zero point offset, the following condi-tions must be programmed: Switching OFF of all the active offsets or manipulations of the coordinate system Deactivation of the tool lengths in X and Z Programming example 2: Explanation:

N10 G17 G54... N20 G00 X400 Z500 SUPA D0 Approach of tool changing point in the MCS, without tool data, N30 T1; milling cutter Indexing the turret to position T1, N40 D1 Call-up of the tool data for T1 … Since with the use of the SUPA command any manipulations of the coordi-nate system have been deactivated for the programmed block only, they do not need to be reactivated. Keep in mind, to call up the required cutting edge again, after each tool change. Note: The extent of programming for the approach of the tool changing point can be reduced if for this purpose a subprogram is written (see page 8 in this module).

Pos. X

Pos. Y

Pos. Z

Tool changing point

Code SUPA (operative block-by-block)

Code D0 (modally operative)

Section 5


Notes:

Summary

Suggestion of a subprogram for tool changing:

Subprogram name: SUBR100.SPF N10 G17 G00 X300 Z500 SUPA G40 D0; N20 RET;

Explanation of the symbols

MCS Machine coordinate system WCS Workpiece coordinate system Instruction Meaning G54 to G57 Call-up of a selectable zero point offset * G505 to G599 Call-up of further zero point offsets * (conditionally available) D0 Deactivation of the tool offsets * D1 - D9 Reactivation of the tool offsets after the tool change * SUPA Switching-OFF of programmable, selectable and external offsets ** RET End of subprogram, return jump * Modally operative instruction ** Instruction operative block-by-block

M Machine zero point

W Workpiece zero point

Approach of tool changing point, zero point offsets OFF, all tool corrections OFF Return to the main program, without interruption of the feed motion.

Section 6


Notes:

Section End



Program structure B556

1 Brief description

Aim of the module:

In this module you learn how to structure a part program clearly and functionally.


This module describes the programming structure of NC-programs.

Content:

Basic principles of programming Program structure of a part program Program structure of a machining sequence Settings at the start of a program


B556

B556

Notes :


Program structure: START

Basic princi-ples of pro-gramming

Program structure of a part program

Program structure of a

machining sequence

Settings at the start of a pro-

gram

Program structure: END

Program structure: Description

This module describes the programming structure of NC-programs.


Notes:

Basic principles of programming

Certain principles should be followed during the creation of part pro-grams:

The program must ensure that an unlimited number of work pieces can be produced with the quality (tolerances, surface quality, form and posi-tion deviation, etc.) required on the drawing with a minimum of produc-tion time and the least possible material wastage.

It is always the motion of the tool along the drawn ideal contour of the work piece.

If tolerances are shown, the programming is always referred to the mid-dle of the tolerance.

Example: 20 + 0,1 - programmed value = 20,05.

Precise dimension corrections can be carried out on the machine by means of the wear correction feature for the tool.

The program should exhibit a clear and concise structure and should contain comments wherever possible to ensure that other users can un-derstand the layout easily at later stages.

Section 2


Notes:

Program structure of a part program

The following flow chart represents a possible suggestion for a suitable structure of the main program.

Tool call-up 1

Program header

Technology block

Approaching the safety level with the tool

Machining sequence 1

Retraction of the tool

Tool call-up 2 End of program

Technology block

Approaching the safety level with the tool

Machining sequence 2

Workpiece finished no yes

Section 3


Notes:

The programming of the machining sequence can be achieved by means of description of the individual steps using departure commands (e.g. G00, G01, G02, etc.) or by means of machining cycles. The following representation refers to the flow chart in section 2 of this manual and describes a possible machining sequence. Programming with G-Codes Programming using cycles

The following criteria should be kept in mind when selecting between the two described possibilities:

Availability of the cycles on the respective machine.

Machining time required with cycles or with G-codes.

The relation of the number of work pieces to the required programming extent.

Input of the individual pa-rameters using the input

mask and graphical support

Activation of radius correc-tion

Interpolation to the first destination point

Interpolation to the next destination point

Interpolation to the last destination point

Deactivation of the radius correction

Program structure of a part program Section 4


Notes:

For the user it may be advantageous to switch on certain settings, that are to be activated in the part program, already in the program heading. If necessary, these modally operative commands can always be reset by other commands at any stage during the program.

Suggestion of a program heading for a “milling” application:

Programming example: Explanation:

N10 G17 G54 G64 G71 G90 G94 X/Y-plane, 1st ZP-offset, continuous control, metrical system, absolute dimensions, linear feed rate F in mm/min,

N20…. ….

Suggestion of a program heading for a “turning” application:

Programming example: Explanation:

N10 G18 G54 G64 G71 G90 G96 Z/X-plane, 1st ZP-offset, continuous control, metrical system, absolute dimensions, constant cutting speed S in m/ min N20 DIAMON LIMS=3000 Diameter input*, speed limitation nmax= 3000 min-1 N30…. …. Note: As the tool progresses towards the centre during facing, the spindle speed evaluated internally in the control unit increases steadily until eventually the maximum possible spindle speed would be attained. Depending on the clamping conditions and the size of the work piece a speed limitation should always be selected for reasons of safety.

Settings at the start of a program Section 5


Notes:

Section End



Cutting edge radius correction B557

Objective of the module: In this module you learn to write a simple milling program, taking into account the radius correction.

Description of the module: This module describes the commands for radius correction, the rounding and the chamfering of edges. These commands can be used for writing a simple CNC-program. A explanations of the com-mands is provided.

1 Brief description

Content:

Cutter radius compensation Rounding and chamfering of edges Mixed incremental and absolute programming Summary Solutions of the tasks


B557

B557

Notes :


Cutting edge radius correction:

START

Cutter radius compensation

Rounding and chamfering of

edges

Mixed incre-mental and

absolute pro-gramming

Summary

Solutions of the tasks

Cutting edge radius correction:

END

Cutting edge radius correction: Description

This module describes the commands for radius correction, the rounding and the chamfering of edges. These commands can be used for writing a simple CNC-program. A explanations of the com-mands is provided.


Notes:


Exercise 1 Open the program editor by pressing the following keys successively:

Write the following program header into the editor. Explain the blocks in the table. While doing this make yourself familiar with the editor. Mark the zero point on the drawing

The path programmed with G01, G02 and G03 represents the path taken by the centre of the milling cutter. In this case the radius of the milling cut-ter must be taken into account.

N50 N70

N90 N110

Motion at feed rate Motion with rapid traverse

Solution see page 13

N10 G54 G64 G17 SOFT

N20 T1 Select tool Nr. 1 (PF60 with tool tips)

N30 M6

N40 S1000 F200.M3 M8 D1

N50 G00 X115 Y65 Z2

Approach of starting point and safety level (P1)

N60 G01 Z0

N70 X-35

N80 G00 Z2

N90 X115 Y15

N100 G01 Z0

N110 X-35

N120 G00 Z150

N130 X150 Y150 M9

Section 2


Notes:


The instructions G41 or G42 are necessary for the programming of con-tours. With this the contour shown on the drawing can be described di-rectly. The radius value for the milling cutter entered in the tool manage-ment is taken into account. The equidistant path for the cutter centre evalu-ated by the control unit is such that the required contour results on the cut-ter circumference. To enable the control unit to evaluate the correct equidistant path it must know whether the milling cutter is on the right or the left of the contour. This is determined by relative to the machining direction. Dimensional deviations can then be compensated for by changing the cutter radius.

Before activating the radius compensation a starting point should be cho-sen that is sufficiently far from the contour. If possible this distance should be greater than the cutter radius. The starting and end point must be cho-sen such that no damage to the contour occurs.

Solution 1: Approach and exit of the contour

Solution 2: Approach and exit from/into open area. The points „P0“ and „P9“ do not lie on the contour

S=starting point E=end point Px=programmed contour points

Equidistant path with feed direction

Section 2


Notes:

The work piece shown on the left is to be machined in the course of this module. First the edge of the contour is to be roughed out. For this the instruction G00, G01, G02, G41 and G40 will be used.

N140 T=„SF14“ ;Endmill 14 mm HSS N150 M6 N160 F280 S1400 M3 M8 D1 N170 G00 X-10 Y3 Z2 S N180 G01 Z-5 N190 G... N200 1 N210 2 N220 3 N230 4 N240 5 N250 6 N260 7 N270 8 N280 9 N290 10 N300 11 N310 12 N320 13 N330 14 N340 G... N350 G01 X-10 Y12 E N360 G00 Z150 N370 X150 Y150 M8

Supplement the program commenced on page 2 in the editor, by the fol-lowing blocks. Specify the contour in the missing blocks.


Cutter radius compensation Section 2


Notes:

The activation of the cutting edge radius correction can be supported by means of the commands G247/G248 and G347/G348. By their use the contour can be approached along a circular arc. This is called a “soft ap-proach” that prevents any contour damage at the point of contact.

The function “soft approach and exit” is a tangential approach at the point of contact independently of the starting point.

The function is used predominantly in conjunction with the tool radius cor-rection, however, this is not compulsory.

G247/G248(Tangential appro-ach/departure move with a quarter circ-le)

G347/G348 (Tangential ap-proach/departure move with a semi circ-le)

DISR (Approach/departure radius)

is the radius of the tool centre path. If the tool radius correction is acti-vated, an arc is generated with a ra-dius such that also in this case the tool centre path results with the pro-grammed radius.

N40 G00 X=P0 Y=P0 Positioning for activation of the radius compensation N50 G41 G247 DISR=2 X=P1 Y=P1 Radius compensation activation. Approach with a quarter circle with radius 2 to position P1. The values for DISCL, FAD F have not been programmed. N60 G01 X=P2 Machining the contour. … N110 G01 X=Pn-1 Y=Pn-1 Approach of the last contour point N120 G40 G248 DISR=2 X=Pn Y=Pn Radius compensation deactivation by leaving with a quarter circle of radius 2 to position P0/Pn

N40 G00 X=P0 Y=P0 Positioning for activation of the radius compensation N50 G41 G347 DISR=2 X=P1 Y=P1 Radius compensation activation. Approach with a half circle with radius 2 to position P1. The values for DISCL, FAD F have not been programmed. N60 G01 X=P2 Machining the contour.. … N110 G01 X=Pn-1 Y=Pn-1 Approach of the last contour point N120 G40 G348 DISR=2 X=Pn Y=Pn Radius compensation deactivation by leaving with a quarter circle of radius 2 to position P0/Pn

progr. con-tour



Notes:

Possible approach movements:

G140 Approach and departure direction depending on the current correction side (basic position value)

G141 Approach from the left and departure to the left

G142 Approach from the right and departure to the right

G143 Approach and departure direction depends on the position of the starting and end point relative to the tangential direction

G147 Approach with a straight motion

G148 Departure with a straight motion

G247 Approach with a quarter circle

G248 Departure with a quarter circle

G347 Approach with a half circle

G348 Departure with a half circle

G340 Approach and leaving in space

G341 Approach and departure in a plane

Associated parameter values:

DISR Approach and departure with straights (G147/G148). Distance of the cutter edge from the starting point on the contour. Approach and departure with arcs (G247, G347/G248, G348) Radius of the cutter centre path. Caution: In case of “REPOS” with a semi circle “DISR” states the circle diameter.

DISCL DISCL=... Distance of the end point of the rapid approach motion from the machining plane. DISCL=AC (...) Statement of the absolute position of the end point of the rapid approach motion. FAD Speed of the slow feed motion. FAD=... the programmed value works according to the G-Code of group 15 (feed; G93, G94, etc.).

FAD=PM (...) the programmed value is interpreted as a linear feed (like G 94) independent of the active G-Code of the group 15.

The soft approach and departure is very well explained in the module - B558 “Program of subroutines”.

contour

contour

contour

tool

tool centre path

P3 at approaching/leaving with quarter circle (G247)

tool

tool centre path

DISR

DISR

DISR tool centre path

tool

P3 at approaching/leaving with straight line (G147)

P3 at approaching/leaving with half circle (G347)

P0

P1

P0

P4

P4

P4

Approaching and leaving shown with interpoint „P4“ (with concurrent activation of the tool radius compensation



Notes:

Rounding and chamfering of edges

For the machining of the finished contour the instructions RND, CHR, CHF are to be used for the radii and the chamfers.

RND: At the programmed intersection between two straights a radius is added. The size of this is defined by RND=7.

CHF: At the programmed intersection between two straights a cham-fer is added. The length of the chamfer is defined by CHF=9.

CHR: At the programmed intersection between two straights a cham-fer is added. CHR=5 defines the length of the legs of this chamfer.

All not dimensioned radii and chamfers are 2 mm.

Section 3


Notes:

Rounding and chamfering of edges

Describe the contour using the instructions referred to so far. A milling cut-ter with a diameter of 8mm is to be used (Name SF8). Start describing the contour at the point X13; Y5.

N380 T=„SF8“ ;End mill 8 mm HSS N390 M6 N400 F280 S1400 M3 M8 D1 N410 G00 X6 Y-7 N420 G01 Z-5 N430 G... Activation of the radius compensation N440 G01 X13 y3 Traverse close to the contour N450 Y… 1st contour point N460 G03 X… Y… I … J... Milling the radius 8 mm N470 G… Y… ... Approach of top left contour point and rounding with 2 mm to the subsequent element N480 X… ... Milling the contour corner at the chamfer 4 mm N490 Y... Approach of the stating point for the radius 20 mm N500 G ... X… Y… I… J… Milling the radius 20 mm N510 G… X… Y… ... Approach of the starting point of the pocket and chamfer N520 X… Y… ... Approach of the top pocket corner and rounding 4 mm N530 X… Y… ... Approach of the bottom pocket corner and rounding 4 mm N540 X… Y… … Approach end point of the pocket and chamfer N550 Y… Approach of starting point with radius7 mm N560 G… X… Y… I… J… Milling the radius 7 mm N570 G… X10 Leaving the contour N580 G… Deactivation of the radius compensation N590 X… Y… Retraction of the cutter N600 G … Z… M... Retraction to the tool changing point, coolant OFF N610 X150 Y150 Traverse to the tool changing point



Section 3


Notes:

Mixed programming: Absolute and incremental dimensions (G90/G91) you know already for the programming of contours. These two types can be programmed together in one block. For this the instructions “IC” (incremental) and “AC” (absolute) can be used. In this way “IC” can be used to program incremental dimen-sions within G90. The instruction G90 is modal. X=IC(10) The cutter moves along the X-axis incrementally by 10 mm in the positive direction. Y=AC(12) The cutter will be positioned absolute along the Y-axis to the Coordinate of Y12 .

Angle ANG= If for a straight only one end point coordinate of the plane is known, or in the case of contours the final end point via several blocks, an angular statement can be used to completely define the straight path section. The angle is always referred to the abscissa of the current plane G17 to G19; e.g.: in case of G17 to the X-axis. Positive angles are taken to be anti-clockwise.

20

12

G90 G01 X12 Y25 G01 X=IC(4) Y22 G01 X20 Y=IC(-3)

25

4

22

3

G91 G01 X=AC(12) Y=AC(25) G01 X4 Y=AC(22) G01 X=AC(20) Y-3

20

15

G01 X15 G01 X20 ANG=-36 G01 X23 ANG=-72

23

Mixed incremental and absolute programming

Abscissa

Ord

inate

Section 4


Notes:

Describe the contour using the instructions referred to so far. A milling cut-ter with a diameter of 8 mm is to be used (Name SF8).

N620 G00 X17.5 Y60.5 Z2 Positioning above the centre of left upper pocket N630 G... Z… M... Plunging into the pocket and coolant ON N640 G... Activation of cutter radius compensation (climb milling) N650 G01 X12 Y60.5 Approach of contour N660 G01 Y... RND=... 1st corner point with rounding to the next element N670 G01 X=IC(...) Approach of starting point for 55° chamfer N680 G01 X.. ANG=… Oblique 55° N690 G01 X... RND=... 2nd corner point with rounding to the next element N700 G01 X=...(10) RND=... 3rd corner point with rounding to the next element N710 G... Switching to incremental dimensions N720 G01 Y... RND=... 4th corner point with rounding to the next element N730 G01 X=AC(...) CHR=... 5th corner point with chamfering to the next element N740 G01 Y=...(...) RND=... 6th corner point with rounding to the next element N750 G01 X... RND=... 7th corner point with rounding to the next element N760 G... Switching to absolute dimensions N770 G01 X... Y... Closing of contour N780 G... Deactivation of cutter radius compensation N790 G01 X17.5 Y60.5 Retraction of the cutter N800 G00 Z150 M9 Leaving the contour and coolant OFF N810 G00 X... Y... Traverse to tool changing position N820 M... End of program


Mixed incremental and absolute programming

All radii R4

Section 4


Notes:

Path information/path commands Instruction Meaning

G40 Cutter radius compensation deactivated * ** G41 Cutter radius compensation to left of contour G42 Cutter radius compensation to right of contour CHR Chamfering the contour corner by statement of leg length CHF Chamfering the contour corner by statement of the length of chamfer

RND Rounding the contour corner (radius statement) ANG Straight with an angle X=IC(…) Statement of the coordinates with incremental dimensions Y=AC(…) Statement of the coordinates with absolute dimensions * Power-ON status of milling machines ** Power-ON status of turning machines

Summary Section 5


Notes:

The path programmed with G01,G02 and G03 represents the path of the cutter centre. In this case the cutter radius must be taken into account by yourself.

N10 G54 G64 G17 SOFT

Zero point offset, continuous control ON, plane selec-tion XY, soft control

N20 T1 Select tool Nr. 1 (PF60 with tool tips)

N30 M6 Load the selected tool

N40 S1000 F200 M3 M8 D1

Speed (rpm), feed (mm/min), rotation clockwise, cool-ant ON, activation of first cutting edge

N50 G00 X115 Y65 Z2

Approach of starting point and safety level (P1)

N60 G01 Z0 Infeed to command dimension

N70 X-35 Milling (P2)

N80 G00 Z2 Lift-off to safety level

N90 X115 Y15 Approach of starting point for 2nd pass (P3)

N100 G01 Z0 Infeed to command dimension

N110 X-35 Milling (P4)

N120 G00 Z150 Lift-off to tool changing level

N130 X150 Y150 M9 Approach tool changing position, coolant OFF

Exercise 1 Open the editor by pressing the following keys successively:

Write the following program header into the editor. Explain the blocks in the table. While doing this make yourself familiar with the editor. Mark the zero point on the drawing.

N50 N70

N90 N110

Motion at feed rate Motion with rapid traverse

6.1 Cutter radius compensation

Solution of the tasks Section 6


Notes:

The work piece shown on the left is to be machined in the course of this mod-ule. First of all the edge of the contour is to be roughed out. For this the instruction G00, G01, G02, G41 and G40 will be used.

N140 T=„SF14“ ;End mill 14 mm HSS N150 M6 N160 F280 S1400 M3 M8 D1 N170 G00 -10 Y3 Z2 S N180 G01 Z-4 N190 G41 N200 G01 X4 Y10 1 N210 Y74 2 N220 G02 X6 Y76 I2 Y0 3 N230 G01 X68 4 N240 Y63.5 5 N250 X76 Y50 6 N260 Y42 7 N270 X64 8 N280 Y26 9 N290 X76 10 N300 Y12 11 N310 X68 Y4 12 N320 X12 13 N330 X0 Y16 14 N340 G40 N350 G01 X-10 Y12 E N360 G00 Z150 N370 X150 Y150 M8

In the editor supplement the program commenced on page 2 by the follow-ing blocks. Specify the contour In the missing blocks.



Notes:

Describe the contour using the instructions referred to so far. A milling cut-ter with a diameter of 8 mm is to be used (Name SF8). Start describing the contour at the point X13; Y5.

N380 T=„SF8“ ;End mill 8 mm HSS N390 M6 N400 F280 S1400 M3 M8 D1 N410 G00 X6 Y-7 Z2 Start point N420 G01 Z-5 Infeed to depth N430 G41 Activation of radius compensation N440 G01 X13 Y3 Approach the contour N450 Y5 1st contour point N460 G03 X5 Y13 I–8 J0 Milling of radius 8 N470 G01 Y75 RND=2 Approach upper left contour point and rounding 2 mm to the next element N480 X67 CHF=4 Milling of corner of contour at chamfer 4 mm N490 Y65 Approach starting point for the radius 20 mm N500 G03 X75 Y49 I20 J0 Milling of radius 20 mm N510 G01 X75 Y43 CHR=1.5 Approach of starting point of pocket and chamfering N520 X61 Y43 RND=4 Approach upper corner of pocket and rounding 4 mm N530 X61 Y25 RND=4 Approach lower corner of pocket and rounding 4 mm N540 X75 Y25 CHR=1.5 Approach end point of pocket and chamfering N550 Y12 Approach starting point of radius 7mm N560 G03 X68 Y5 I0 J-7 Milling of radius 7 mm N570 G01 X10 Leaving the contour N580 G40 Deactivation of radius compensation N590 X6 Y-7 Retraction of cutter N600 G00 Z150 M9 Retraction to tool changing level, coolant OFF N610 X150 Y150 Traverse to tool changing position N620 M30


6.2 Rounding and chamfering of edges



Notes:

Describe the contour using the instructions referred to so far. A milling cut-ter with a diameter of 8mm is to be used (Name SF8). Start describing the contour at the point X13; Y5.

N620 G00 X17.5 Y60.5 Z2 Positioning above the centre of left upper pocket N630 G01 Z-3 M8 Plunging into the pocket and coolant ON N640 G41 Activation of Cutter radius compensation (climb milling) N650 G01 X12 Y60.5 Approach of the contour N660 G01 Y52 RND=4 1st corner point with rounding to the next element N670 G01 X=IC(7.8) Approach of starting point for 55° chamfer N680 G01 X23.8 ang=-55 Oblique 55° N690 G01 Y41 RND=4 2nd corner point with rounding to the next element N700 G01 X=IC(10) RND=4 3rd corner point with rounding to the next element N710 G91 Switching to incremental dimensions N720 G01 Y18 RND=4 4th corner point with rounding to the next element N730 G01 X=AC(23) CHR=1.5 5th corner point with chamfering to the next element N740 G01 Y=AC(69) RND=4 6th corner point with rounding to the next element N750 G01 X-11 RND=4 7th corner point with rounding to the next element N760 G90 Switching to absolute dimensions N770 G01 X12 Y60.5 Closing the contour N780 G40 Deactivation of Cutter radius compensation N790 G01 X17.5 Y60.5 Retraction of the cutter N800 G00 Z150 M9 Leaving the contour N810 G00 X150 Y150 Traverse to tool changing position N820 M30 End of program

All radii R4

6.3 Mixed incremental and absolute programming



Notes:

Section End



Program of subroutines B558

1 Brief description

Objective of the module: In this module you will get to know the use of subroutines. You will learn to write subroutines for con-tours with soft contour approach and departure with cutter radius compensation and how to call them up in a simple milling program.

Description of the module: This module explains the programming with subroutines. The soft approach and departure of the contour will be used for contour machining.

Content:

The use and necessity of sub-routines Call-up of subroutines Programming of subroutines Summary Solution for the programming of subroutines


B558

B558

Notes :


Program of subroutines:

START

The use and necessity of sub-routines

Call-up of subroutines

Programming of subroutines

Summary

Solution for the programming of subroutines

Program of subroutines:

END

Program of subroutines: Description

This module explains the programming with sub-routines. The soft approach and departure of the contour will be used for contour machining.


Notes:

The use and necessity of subroutines

2.2 Local subroutines

Local subroutines are often used where contours are repeated on the same work piece. If, for instance, a pocket is to be milled several times on one workpiece, it can be programmed just once and then repeated several times. Since the absolute dimension vary, the pocket must be programmed from a defined starting point, which is then approached in the main pro-gram. From there the pocket is then described with incremental dimen-sions. Example: The contour of a pocket must be milled at 2 different locations. Fill in the following program header into the editor. Explain the sentences in the table. By the way make yourself familiar with the editor. Mark the zero point in the drawing.

If contours are programmed that are used repeatedly, it is possible to do this using subroutines. There is a differentiation between local subroutines, which belong to a work piece and global sub-routines, which are generally usable. Subroutines have the file extension *.SPF (Subprogram File).

2.1 Global subroutines

These subroutines can be used for all kinds of workpiece programs; they must be written keeping in mind the danger of possible collisions. Both pro-grams using incremental or absolute dimensions can be used. Example: The machine table is to be positioned at a certain location for tool changing after the machining has been completed. The coordinates can therefore be stated with absolute values. In order to avoid collisions, Z must be positioned first followed by X/Y.

Section 2


Notes:

Call-up of subroutines

The choice of the type of dimensions depends largely on the usage of the subroutine. When programming the following principle must be kept in mind: When exit the subroutine, the status that existed before the call-up must be re-established.

The subroutine is called up by its name and the number of times it is to be used. The number of repeats is programmed with the address “P”. At the end there must follow the instruction “M17” (end of subroutine). After this the control jumps back to the calling-up place in the main program and continues with the next block.

Main program Subroutine (contour)

Explanation

N40 G90 G00 X20 Y20 Z2

Approach of the starting point

N50 Contour P1 Call-up of the subroutine Contour for 1 pass

N10 G91 Switching to incremental dimen-sions

N20 G01 Z-5 Plunging into the contour to Z–3

N30 X10 Motion by 10 mm along X-axis in +direction

N40 Y-10 Motion by 10 mm along Y-axis in -direction

N50 X-10 Motion by 10 mm along x-axis in -direction

N60 Y10 Motion by 10 mm along Y-axis in +direction

N70 G90 Re-establish status of main pro-gram

N80 M17 End of subroutine

N60 G01 Z2 Retraction to safety level

N70 G00 X50 Y20 Z2 Approach of next starting point

N80 Contour P2 Call-up of the local subroutine contour for 2 passes

Milling of the pocket to –8

N90 G01 Z2 Retraction to safety level

N100 Workpiece change P1

Call-up of the global subroutine Workpiece change

G53 G00 z200

Zero point offset block-by-block OFF and retraction in Z-direction

G53 x200 y200

Zero point offset block-by-block OFF and retraction in X/Y direc-tion

M17 End of subroutine

N110 M30 End of main program

Section 3


Notes:

Below, you are asked to program the pocket as a subroutine (Name:UP_MODUL31). The subroutine is to be called up from the main program (Name: MODUL31).

Task 1: The workpiece has already been programmed in the program “MODUL30.MPF”. This is now to be copied, renamed in “MODUL31.MPF” and then modified. Change to the “Program Manager”. Open the program directory and select the program MODUL30.MPF.

By pressing the “PROGRAM MANAGER” button on the keyboard change to the “Program Manager” screen.

In the workpiece direc-tory select the program MODUL30.MPF with the blue cursor keys.

Copy the file by pressing the VSK 5 “COPY”.

The program ac-knowledges the selection and copy-ing in the status line.

With the now active VSK 6 “PASTE” insert the file into the directory-tree.

The “Paste” window opens. Rename the file in MODUL31.MPF and accept with the VSK 8 “OK”.

Programming of subroutines Section 4


Notes:


Task 2: Commence a new subroutine by the name of “UP_MODUL31.SPF” and programme the following program lines with the respective supplements. The program starts at the centre cross.

N10 G… Switching to incremental dimensions N20 G… G… DISR=… X5 Activate cutter radius compensation for climb milling with soft approach in a quarter circle r = 0.5 N30 N40 N50 N60 N70 N80 N90 N100 N110 N120 N130 G… G… DISR=… X-5 Deactivate cutter radius compensation with soft departure the contour in a quarter circle r = 0.5 N140 G… Switching to absolute dimension programming N150 M… End of subroutine

Contour description using climb milling

Task 3:

In the main program “MODUL31.MPF” delete all lines starting with block N620.

Open program MODUL31.MPF and set the cursor on N620.

For solution see page 10

Mark and delete the selected fields.

Section 4


Notes:


…. N610 X150 Y150 N620 G… X… Y… Z… M… With rapid traverse to the start-point of the upper left contour and coolant ON N630 …………….. P… Call-up of subroutine for one pass N640 G01 Z1 Retraction from the pocket at feed rate N650 G... X… Y… Z… With rapid traverse to the start-point of the upper right contour N660 …………….. P... Call-up of subroutine for two passes N670 G… Z… Retraction from the pocket at feed rate N680 G… Z… M... Departure in Z to the tool changing point and coolant OFF N690 G… X… Y… Departure in X and Y to the tool changing point N700 M… End of main program

Task 4: Alter the main program “MODUL31.MPF” such that the internal contours are machined using the subroutine. When positioning in the Z-axis care must be taken to consider the infeed amount (Z-4) per subroutine pass.

For solution see page 11

Section 4


Notes:

Summary

Path information/Approach and Departure commands

Instruction Meaning

UP_... P1 Subroutine call-up with number of repeats M17 End of subroutine

G147 Approach with a straight

G148 Departure with a straight

G247 Approach with a quarter circle

G248 Departure with a quarter circle

G347 Approach with a semi-circle

G348 Departure with semi-circle

G340 Approach and departure in space

G341 Approach and departure in a plane

Parameter Explanation

DISR Radius of the tool centre path for approach and departure DISCL DISCL=... Distance of the end point for the rapid infeed motion FAD Speed of the slow infeed motion

Section 5


Notes:

Solution for the programming of subroutines

Solution for Task 2:

N10 G91 Switching to incremental dimensions N20 G41 G247 DISR=0.5 x5 Activate cutter radius compensation for climb milling with soft approach in a quarter circle r=0.5 N30 G01 Y9 RND=4 N40 X-10.8 CHF=2.12 N50 Y10 RND=4 N60 X-11 RND=4 N70 Y-17 RND=4 N80 x7.8 N90 Y-5.71 ANG=-55 N100 Y-5.287 RND=4 N110 X10 RND=4 N120 Y9 N130 G40 G248 DISR=0.5 X-5 Deactivate cutter radius compensation and soft departure of the contour in a quarter circle r = 0.5 N140 G90 Switching to absolute dimension programming N150 M17 End of subroutine

Contour description using climb milling


Open the program MODUL31.MPF and set cursor on N620 by navigat-ing with the blue cursor keys on the keyboard.

Press the VSK 4 “Mark” to select the desired lines. Move the cursor with the “cursor-down” key until all lines are marked. Then press the VSK 7 “Cut” to delete all marked entries.

Section 6


Notes:

Solution for programming of subroutines

…. N610 X150 Y150 N620 G00 X28.8 Y50 Z1 M8 With rapid traverse to the start-point of the upper left contour and coolant ON N630 UP_Modul31 P1 Call-up of subroutine for one pass N640 G01 Z1 Retraction from the pocket at feed rate N650 G00 X53.6 Y50 Z3 With rapid traverse to the start-point of the upper right contour N660 UP_MODUL31 P2 Call-up of subroutine for two passes N670 G01 Z2 Retraction from the pocket at feed rate N680 G00 Z150 M9 Departure in Z to the tool changing point and coolant OFF N690 G00 X150 Y150 Departure in X and Y to the tool changing point N700 M30 End of main program


Section 6


Notes:

Section End



Loops, jumps, repetitions B559

1 Brief description

Objective of the module: Working through this module you become familiar with the usage of loops, jumps and repetitions in a milling program.

Description of the module: In the module you will learn about the commands for looping parts of the program, for jumping to cer-tain blocks in the program and how to repeat certain sections of the program.

Content:

Label name, Parameter usage Jump instructions, Program section repetitions

Example and tasks Summary Solution of the tasks


B559

B559

Notes :


Loops, jumps, repetitions:

START

Label name, Parameter

usage

Jump instruc-tions, Pro-

gram section repetitions

Example and tasks

Summary

Solution of the tasks

Loops, jumps, repetitions:

END

Loops, jumps, repetitions: Description

In the module you will learn about the commands for looping parts of the program, for jumping to certain blocks in the program and how to repeat certain sections of the program.


Notes:

Label name, Parameter usage

2.1 Label name

In order to repeat certain sections of a program or the jump to a certain section of the program, we make use of “LABELS” to mark the beginning/end of certain sections of the program. In most cases a “LABEL” is used to mark the beginning, but when you want to perform repetions of sections of a program, then you require both beginning and end “LABELS” (refer to section 3.2 in this module). The “LABEL” must consist of at least two or a maximum of 8 characters. The first two characters must always be letters or underlines. The “LABEL” must always be followed by a colon.

N100... N110 BL123: N120 G00 X10..

Assigning the name BL123 to a label

2.2 Parameter usage

In some cases the use of parameters is highly advisable. For instance, the cutting values for the tools to be used can be assigned to parameters in the program header, which can then be used for programming instead of the cutting values themselves. The parameters are programmed with the address letter “R” and a number “R1”. Values can be assigned to these in the section “Parameter” or also in the program itself.

;T1-WSF Dr60 R1=200 ; n for WSF Dr60 R2=30 ; vf for WSF Dr60 ... N100 T1 ; WSF Dr60 N110 M6 N120 S=R1 F=R2 M3 M8 D1 N130 ...

Program header Assignment of speed and feed by means of R1 and R2

Parameters can be used within the program for calculation of individual values or for themselves. For reason of the advance calculation by the control unit it is possible that undesirable effects on the active parameters might occur. This can be prevented by using the instruction STOPRE. The next block will only be executed after the previous block has been finished. For this “STOPRE” must be written in a block by itself.

N10 R1=0 ... N110 BL123: N120 G00 x10.. … N140 STOPRE N150 R1=R1+1 N160 EL123:STOPRE

The control unit waits until block N130 has been completed. Each time the block is run for machining R1 is increased by 1.

Section 2


Notes:

Jump instructions, Program section repetitions

;T1—WSF Dr60 R1=200 ; n for WSF Dr60 R2=30 ; vf for WSF Dr60 N10 GOTOF N100 N20 LB001: … N90 GOTOF N170 N100 T1 ; WSF Dr60 N110 m6 N120 S=R1 F=R2 M3 M8 D1 N130 … ... N160 GOTOB LB001 N170 T4

Jump to block N100

The jump instruction caused a change in the machining sequence.

Jump back to label LB001

Jump to block N100

;T1-WSF Dr60 R1=200 ; n for WSF Dr60 R2=30 ; vf for WSF Dr60 N10 T1 ; WSF Dr60 N20 M6 N30 S=R1 F=R2 M3 M8 D1 N40 G00 z2 N50 LB001: N50 G1 Z=IC(-10) … N90 LE001: ... N160 Repeat LB001 LE001 P2 N170 T4

Jump back to Label LB001 and two repetitions between LB001and LE001

1

2

3.1 Jump instructions

Jump instructions can also be used within a program. They permit the omission of certain sections of the program or to jump back for repetitions. The instruction GOTOF is used to jump forward, while the GOTOB is used to jump backward. For this a search is carried out for the included label name or the block number before the jump to this location is carried out.

3.2 Program section repetitions

Program sections between two labels can be repeated any number of times as specified under the address P. For this the program jumps to the first stated label and executes all blocks of the program until the second label is reached. If the number of repetitions is greater than one, this pro-cedure will be repeated as often as stated under address “P”.

Section 3


Notes:

Example and tasks

2 Holes are to be drilled into the milled work piece. These holes are to be programmed using jumps and parameters.

Task 1:

Copy the program file “MODUL31.MPF” in “Program Manager”. Rename this program to “MODUL32.MPF”. For explanations see Module “B558 - Subprogram techniques”.

Task 2:

Open the program “MODUL32.MPF” and supplement the program by the following lines for the drilling.

…. N690 G00 X150 Y150 Traverse to the tool changing point in x and y N700 R1=... R2=... Set the parameter R1 (drilling and counter depth) and R2 (feed rate) to zero N710 T=„NC-centre drill“ Request NC-centre drill Ø larger 12 mm (for simulation SF10) N720 M6 Load NC-centre drill N730 R1=… R2=... Specify depth for centring and feed rate N740 S1000 F=... M3 M8 D1 Specify technology data for centring N750 Repeat ... ... P1 Execute program between the Labels LB001 and LE001 once N760 T=„SPB8“ Request drill diameter 8 mm (for simulation SF8) N770 … Load drill N775 … Advance evaluation Stop N780 ...=8+(8*1/3) ...=50 Specify depth for centring and countering in R1 and feed rate in R2 N790 S800 F=R2 M3 M8 D1 Specify technology data for the drill N800 R...=8+(8*1/3) Specify depth for drilling (1/3 drill point) N810 ... LB001 LE001 p1 Execute the program between the Labels once N820 G00 Z150 Retraction in Z-direction N830 X150 Y150 Retraction in X- and Y-direction N840 M30 End of program N850 … Give the label the name “LB001“ N860 G... X... Y... Z... Traverse to 1st drilling position N870 GOTOF ... Jump to block N920 N880 LB002: Give the label the name “LB002” N890 G... X... Y... Z... Traverse to 2nd drilling position N900 Repeat N... N… Execute blocks N920 to N940 N910 … Give the label the name “LE001” N920 G01 Z=... F=... Drill at feed rate N930 G04 S2 Dwell after reaching the drilling depth for smoothing N940 G01 Z... F=... With double the feed rate move to z2 N950 ... … Jump back to Label LB002

Section 4


Notes:

Loops/ jumps/repetitions Instruction Meaning

GOTOF Forward jump to destination mark GOTOF LB001 or GOTOF N110 GOTOB Backward jump to destination mark GOTOB LB002 or GOTOB N10 Note: When using “GOTOB” and “GOTOF” care must be taken against endless loops. They call up each

other repeatedly. Hence the program cannot leave this range.

The use of block numbers as destination mark is

not advisable. If the block number changes, there will be no automatic correction.

REPEAT Repeats the section between the labels for the pro-grammed number of times.

Repeat LB002 LE002 P2 Note: The use of block numbers as destination mark is

not advisable. if the block number changes, there will be no automatic correction.

R... Parameter 1-99 R1 STOPRE The next block will not be decoded until the previ-

ous block has been completed.

….: Label name LB001: Note: Label names must have at least 2 and a

maximum of 8 characters. The first 2 of which must be either letters or underlines.

G04 Dwell G04 S2 Dwell for 2 revolutions G04 F2 Dwell for 2 seconds

Summary Section 5


Notes:

Solution for task 2:

…. N690 G00 X150 Y150 Traverse to the tool changing point in X and Y N700 R1=0 R2=0 Set the parameter R1 (drilling and counter depth) and R2 (feed rate) to zero N710 T=„NC-centre drill“ Request NC-centre drill Ø larger 12 mm (for simulation SF10) N720 M6 Load NC-centre drill N730 R1=-5 R2=100 Specify depth for centring and feed rate N740 S1000 F=R2 M3 M8 D1 Specify technology data for centring N750 Repeat LB001 LE001 P1 Execute program between the Labels LB001 and LE001 once N760 T=„SPB8“ Request drill diameter 8 mm (for simulation SF8) N770 M6 Load drill N775 STOPRE Advance evaluation Stop N780 R1=8+(8*1/3) R2=50 Specify depth for centring and countering in R1 and feed rate in R2 N790 S800 F=R2 M3 M8 D1 Specify technology data for the drill N800 R1=8+(8*1/3) Specify depth for drilling (1/3 drill point) N810 Repeat LB001 LE001 P1 Execute the program between the labels once N820 G00 Z150 Retraction in Z-direction N830 X150 Y150 Retraction in X- and Y-direction N840 M30 End of program N850 LB001: Label name “LB001” N860 G00 X25 Y25 Z2 Traverse to 1st drilling position N870 GOTOF N920 Jump to block N920 N880 LB002: Label name “LB002” N890 G00 X50 Y25 Z2 Traverse to 2nd drilling position N900 Repeat N920 N940 Execute blocks N920 to N940 N910 LE001: Label name LE001 N920 G01 Z=R1 F=R2 Drill at feed rate N930 G04 S2 Dwell after reaching the drilling depth for smoothing N940 G01 Z2 F=R2*2 With double the feed rate move to Z2 N950 GOTOB LB002 Jump back to Label LB002




Mirror, offset, rotate, scale B560

1 Brief description

Objective of the module: With help of this module you will get to know commands for mirroring, shifting, rotating and scaling of contours.

Description of the module: This module explains the use of the commands for the machining of identical contour elements in various positions.

Content:

Shifting Rotating Mirroring Scaling Summary Solutions


B560

B560

Notes :


Mirror, offset, rotate, scale: Description

This module explains the use of the commands for the machining of identical contour elements in various positions.

Mirror, offset, rotate, scale: START

Shifting

Rotating

Mirroring

Scaling

Summary

Solutions

Mirror, offset, rotate, scale: END


Notes:

Shifting

“TRANS”, “ATRANS”

The commands in this module are known as frames (calculation instruc-tions). They can influence, cancel or condition each other. In our example a known contour, which is described in a subprogram, is to be milled in various positions and sizes. For this the zero point at the starting point of the contour of the sub-program must be rotated. In order to be able to rotate the program about the starting point of the sub-program, this point must be the zero point. Our work piece zero point (G54) lies in the middle of the work piece.

General introduction

The zero point can be shifted in the programmed axes by means of these commands. The command “TRANS” clears all active frames. “ATRANS” (additive shift) works incremental from the active frames.

For instance in case of multiple settings of work pieces the zero point can be shifted and the main program repeatedly executed .

Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2 Workpiece 3

ATRANS x30 ATRANS x30

TRANS x60

0

Workpiece 4

ATRANS x30

Section 2


Notes:

Shifting

Task 3:

Load a milling cutter “CUTTER_8”, shift the zero point to the starting point of the contour and position the tool at this location.

In the following example the zero point is to be transformed to the starting point of the left hand contour.

Task 1:

Create a new file with the name MODUL34.MPF!

Task 2:

Programme the tool path for face milling the surface. Take into account that the zero point lies in the middle. The Face mill (FACE_MILL_D60) has a diameter of 60 mm, the work piece measures 80 x 80 mm.

N10 G54 G64 G17 SOFT N20 T=…. N30 M…. N40 S1000 F200 M3 M8 D1 N50 G00 X.... Y…. Z…. N60 G01 Z0 N70 X-80 N80 G00 Z2 N90 X80 Y-20 N100 G01 Z0 N110 X-80 N120 G00 Z150 N130 X150 Y150 M9

N140 T=.... Call up the tool N150 ... Tool change N160 S2000 F100 M3 M8 D1 Technology data for the tool N170 …. X…. Y…. Shift the zero point additively N180 G00 X... Y... Z... Position the tool


Section 2


Notes:

Rotating

“ROT”, “AROT” The coordinate system can be rotated by means of the command “ROT” or “AROT”. The counter-clockwise rotation is taken to be positive. The posi-tive X-axis represents the zero-degree position. There are two ways of programming. Variant 1 Rotation about an axis AROT X.. Y.. Z..

The zero point has been rotated by 90° about the Z-axis.

Variant 2 Rotation of the active plane AROT RPL...

The active plane has been rotated by 90° about the Z-axis.

The command “ROT” resets the coordinate system and all other active frames back to the original status.

Task 4: Rotate the coordinate system by the required amount about the now valid zero point. Now plunge into the work piece with the milling cutter at a feed rate of 3 mm. Thereafter start the subprogram. Deactivate all frames. N190… … Rotate the coordinate system N200 G… Z... Plunge into the contour N210……. Call up subprogram UP_MODUL31 N220 G00 Z2 Retract to 2 mm above the work piece N230…. Deactivate all frames

X+

Y+

+

X+

Y+

+

X+

Y+

+

X+

Y+

+


AROT Z=90

AROT RPL=90

Section 3


Notes:

Mirroring

“MIRROR”, “AMIRROR” With the command “MIRROR” or “AMIRROR” the coordinate system can be mirrored about the programmed axis or axes. In such a case the pro-grammed coordinates are mirrored about the axis or axes by their sign. Variant 1 Mirroring an axis

AMIRROR X0

Variant 2 Mirroring several axes

MIRROR X0 Y0

The command “MIRROR” resets the coordinate system and all other active frames back to the original status.

X+

Y+

X+

Y+

X+

Y+

X+

Y+

Task 5: Mirror the work piece about the X-axis. Shift the zero point to the starting point of the contour and there rotate the coordinate system. Take into ac-count the position of the positive X-axis. N240 ….. X… Mirroring the X-axis N250 A…. X... Y... Shifting to the starting point of the contour N260 G00 X... Y... Z2 Position the tool N270 … ... Rotate coordinate system additively


Section 4


Notes:

Scaling

“SCALE”, “ASCALE” In some cases the scaling of contour elements is quite sensible. The exist-ing contours can be scaled up or down by a given factor. The factor is defined following the command Scale for each individual axis.

SCALE y2 SCALE x2 SCALE x2 y2

When programming with “ASCALE” the calculations are always referred to the presently valid coordinate system. With the command “SCALE” the val-ues of the active zero point offset are taken as a basis. All presently active transformations (frames) like offset, mirror, scale are cancelled.

If no value follows the command “SCALE” all frames are cancelled. The same applies to the command “M30”.

ASCALE y2 ASCALE x2 SCALE

The value programmed under “SCALE” represents a factor. If this is >1 an enlargement takes place, in case of values <1 diminished. Care must be taken that radii are also affected. This can possibly lead to errors. Variant 1

........Scaling of an axis

ASCALE X1.5

All X-values are multiplied by 1.5 Variant 2 .......Scaling of several axes

ASCALE X=1x1.5 Y=1x1.5

The scaling factor can also be calculated in the program by entering the formula.

Section 5


Notes:

Scaling

Task 6: Scale the X- and Y-axis. Let the control unit calculate the respective factor. Plunge into the work piece by 3 mm and cal up the subprogram UP_MODUL31. Traverse to the tool changing point. Terminate the main program. The scaling factor (Sf) is calculated from the formula: N280 ... X=…/21.8 Y=32.55/.. Scale additively the X- and Y-axis N290 G... Z-3 Plunge into the contour. N300 ….. Call the subprogram N310 G... Z200 Retraction in Z N320 X150 Y150 M9 Traverse to tool changing position N330 M... End of program

Task 7: Fill in the missing values for the blank piece and start a simulation.

1,162528

32.55

geometry actual of Dimension

geometry command of Dimension Sf


……...

……...

……...

……...


Section 5


Notes:

Summary of the instructions

Frame - Concept (Calculation instructions)

TRANS X... Y... Z... Absolute programmable zero point offset as referred to the presently valid, with G54 to G57 and G505 to G599 selected work piece zero point

ATRANS X... Y... Z...

Additive programmable zero point offset as referred to the presently valid, selected or programmed zero point

X..... Y..... Z..... Shift value in direction of the stated axis

TRANS Deactivation of programmable zero point offsets, previously pro-grammed frames are cleared

ROT X.. Y.. Z.. RPL=..

Absolute programmable rotation as referred to the presently valid, with G54 to G57 and G505 to G599 selected work piece zero point

AROT X.. Y.. Z.. RPL=..

Additive programmable rotation as referred to the presently valid, se-lected or programmed zero point

X..... Y..... Z..... Rotation angle in space: - Geometry axis that is being rotated

RPL= ..... Rotation angle in a plane: - angle by which the coordinate system Is rotated - (plane previously selected with G17 to G19)

ROT Deactivation of programmable rotation, previously programmed frames are cleared

SCALE X... Y... Z... Absolute programmable enlarging or diminishing (scaling), as referred to the presently valid, with G54 to G57 and G505 to G599 selected work piece zero point

ASCALE X... Y... Z...

Additive programmable enlarging or diminishing (scaling) as referred to the presently valid, selected or programmed zero point

X..... Y..... Z..... Scaling factor (smaller / greater 1) in direction of stated axis

SCALE Deactivation of programmable enlarging or diminishing, previously pro-grammed frames are cleared

MIRROR X... Y... Z...

Absolute programmable mirroring as referred to the presently valid, with G54 to G57 and G505 to G599 selected work piece zero point

AMIRROR X...Y...Z...

Additive programmable mirroring as referred to the presently valid, selected or programmed zero point

X..... Y..... Z..... Coordinate axis, in which the signs are changed, (the value for X/Y or Z can be freely selected - e. g. X0/Y0/Z0)

MIRROR Deactivation of programmable mirroring, previously programmed frames are cleared

Section 6


Notes:

Solutions

Solution for task 2: N10 G54 G64 G17 Soft N20 T="FACING_TOOL_D60" N30 M6 N40 S1000 F200 M3 M8 D1 N50 G00 X80 Y20 Z2 N60 G01 Z0 N70 X-80 N80 G00 Z2 N90 X80 Y-20 N100 G01 Z0 N110 X-80 N120 G00 Z150 N130 X150 Y150 M9

Solution for task 3: N140 T="CUTTER_8" Call up the tool N150 M6 Tool change N160 S2000 F100 M3 M8 D1 Technology data for the tool N170 ATRANS X-16.02 Y-10.02 Shift the zero point additively N180 G00 X0 Y0 Z2 Position the tool

7.1 Solution for “Shifting”

Section 7


Notes:

Solutions


N190 AROT Z-20 or (AROT RPL-20) Rotate the coordinate system N200 G01 Z-3 Plunge into the contour N210 UP_MODUL31 Call up subprogram UP_MODUL31 N220 G00 Z2 Retraction to 2 mm above the work piece N230 TRANS or (ROT) Deactivate all frames

7.2 Solution for “Rotating”

7.3 Solution for “Mirroring”

Solution for task 5: N240 AMIRROR X0 Mirroring the X-axis N250 ATRANS X-16.02 Y-10.02 Shifting to starting point of the contour N260 G00 X0 Y0 Z2 Position the tool N270 AROT Z-20 or RPL=-20 Rotate coordinate system additively

Section 7


Notes:


The scaling factor (Sf) is calculated from the formula:

N280 ASCALE X=26.35/21.8 Y=32.55/28 Scale additively the X/Y axis N290 G01 Z-3 Plunge into the contour. N300 UP_MODUL31 Call-up of subprogram N310 G00 Z200 Retraction in Z N320 X150 Y150 M9 Traverse to tool change pos. N330 M30 End of program

1,162528

32.55

geometry actual of Dimension

geometry command of Dimension Sf

7.4 Solution “Scaling”

Solution for task 7: “Fill in the missing values and start a simulation”.

In the program editor press the HSK 7 „Simulation“.

The simulation window opens.

Press the VSK 1.8 to extend the vertical softkey bar and press the VSK 2.5 “Blank“.

The “Blank input” window with the following input mask opens. Insert the values like shown below.

Accept the values by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

Jump back to the VSK 1 by pressing the VSK 2.8.

Press the VSK 1.1 and start the simulation run.

Solutions Section 7


Notes:

The simulation run starts and ends (see picture below).

Solutions Section 7



Basics B565

1 Brief description

Objective of the module In this module you learn about the functions of the different components of a machine tool and how they work together.

Description of the module: In this module you get to know the basic concepts and basic logic functions of the control unit, the possibility of extending the peripherals and common abbreviations.

Content:

Types of machine tools Advantages of the CNC controlled machine tool Basic concepts - basic logic functions Sample configurations of the Sinumerik Operate Drive system - example Machining centre Shortcuts and abbreviations


B565

B565

Notes :


Basics: Description

In this module you get to know the basic concepts and basic logic functions of the control unit, the possibility of extending the peripherals and com-mon abbreviations.

Basics: START

Types of machine tools

Advantages of the CNC controlled

machine tool

Basic con-cepts - basic

logic functions

Sample con-figurations of the Sinumerik

Operate

Drive system - example Ma-chining centre

Shortcuts and abbreviations

Basics: END


Notes:

Types of machine tools

2.1 The conventional machine tool

2.2 The CNC controlled machine tool

Section 2


Notes:

Advantages of the CNC controlled machine tool

The CNC technology should not replace the worker or put more load on him, rather it shall:

efficiently use the machine and the cutting tools

shorten the ancillary time and waiting period

produce better quality much faster.

cover the constantly rising demand

make detailed changes faster

insure the competitiveness of the company on the market

Low waste costs

Low control costs

Smaller optimal batch sizes

Shorter cycle times

Multi-shift work

Multi-machine operation

Higher efficiency

Increase of the manufacturing capacity

Rationalisation of the organisation

Shortening of the delivery time

Reduction of the set-up time

Repetition accuracy does not depend on the operator

Section 3


Notes:

Basic concepts - basic logic functions

NC – Numerical Control control in numerical form CNC – Computerized Numerical Control, numerical control with one or several microcomputer DNC – Direct Numerical Control, one or several CNC‘ s receive their part programs from a central computer over a cable or network. PLC – Programmable Logic Controller, a programmable logic circuit. is used in the machine tools for adjusting the control.

4.1 Definition of main components:

A big colour monitor for the display, programming, simulation, opera-tion and diagnosis.

Operation with interactive dialogue with at least two switchable for-eign language options.

A bus-linked-, or integrated PLC to control the switching functions.

Software end switches as a substitution of mechanical end-switches.

Operational-/machine data logging, e.g. temperature error compen-sation, variable space encoding of the tools, tool failure– and service life monitoring

Additional functions:

Axis block

Powered tools

Data interface

Manual input

Correction values

Position set

Program test

Block masking/block search

Re-approaching the contour

4.2 CNC basic functions:

Section 4


Notes:

Sample configurations of the Sinumerik Operate

The following two graphics show sample configurations of the Sinumerik Operate, their optional components an their communication paths. Sample configuration of the SINUMERIK 840D sl:

Sample configuration of the SINUMERIK 828D:

Factory network (Industrial Ethernet)

2 x Handwheels

PLC E/A-Interface based upon PROFINET

Asynchronos motor

Synchronos motor 1

Synchronos motor 2

Synchronos motor 3

Section 5


Notes:

According to the drive tasks planed, controlled electrical drives for NC-machines are divided into the following:

Feed drives for all axis, e.g. X, Y, Z.

Main spindle drive, e.g. for the milling spindle of a machining centre, the spindle drive of turning machines or a grinding wheel drive.

Auxiliary drive, e.g. for the tool changer, the circular table or the pallet switcher.

A typical machining center with feed drives, main spindle drive and auxil-iary drive is shown below.

Operation diagram of the position-regulated axis:

Main spindle drive

Feed drives Auxiliary drive

Driving mechanisms/positioning actions Section 6


Notes:

ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange AS Automation System AT Advanced Technology BA Mode of Operation BCD Binary Code Decimals BCS Basic Coordinate System CAD Computer Aided Design COM Communication Module COR Coordinate Rotation CNC Computerized Numerical Control CPU Central Processing Unit CRC Cutter Radius Compensation CUTOM Cutter Radius Compensation (Tool Radius Comp) DAC Digital Analogue Converter DB Data Block in the PLC DBB Data Block-Byte in the PLC DBW Data Block-Word in the PLC DBX Data Block Bit in the PLC DDE Dynamic Data Exchange DIR Directory DOS Disk Operating System DTE Data Terminal Equipment DRV Driver Module EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility ENC Encoder EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory ESD Electro Static Discharge FC Function Call FDD Feed Drive FPU Floating Point Unit FST Feed Stop GIA Gear Interpolation Data GUD Global User Data HD Hard Disk HHU Handheld Unit HMI Human Machine Interface IM Interface Module IM-Adress Interface Module-Address INC Increment INI Initializing Data I/O Input- / Output ISA Industry Standard Architecture JOG Jogging K-Bus Communication Bus LED Light Emitting Diode LF Line Feed MB Mega Byte (Million Bytes) MD Machine Data MCP Machine Control Panel MCS Machine coordinate system MCU Machine Control Unit MDA Manual Data Automatic

Shortcuts and abbreviations Section 7


Notes:

MM Millimetre MMC Man machine communication = HMI MPI Multi Point Interface MPF Main Program File MSD Main Spindle Drive MSTT Machine Panel NC Numerical Control NCK Numerical Control Kernel NCU Numeric Control Unit NMI Non Mask able Interrupt OI Operator Interface OP Operator Panel OPI Operator Panel Interface P-Bus Peripheral-Bus PC Personal Computer PCU Personal Computer Unit. Component of the NC-control,

which allows communication between operator and ma-chine.

PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Associa-tion

PG Programming Device PLC Programmable Logic Control PRAL Process Alarm PS Power Supply (SIMATIC S7-300) PTP Point to Point P2P Point to Point RAM Random Access Memory (read write memory) REF Reference Point Approach Function ROV Rapid Override SBL Single Block SK Softkey SKP Skip Block SW Software SPF Sub Programm File SYF System Files T Tool TC Tool Change TLC Tool Length Compensation TO Tool Offset TRC Tool Radius Compensation UFR User Frame VGA Video Graphics Adapter WCS Workpiece Coordinate System WPD Work Piece Directory ZO Zero Offset

Shortcuts and abbreviations Section 7



Operating elements B566

1 Brief description


With help of this module you learn to recognise general operating elements of the Sinumerik Operate, and how to differentiate them from one another.


The general operation of a Sinumerik Operate will be described. Depending on the machine manufacturer the following operating elements can be used:

Operator panels (OP)

CNC-full keyboard

Machine control panel (MCP)

Content:

Operator panel layouts of the Sinumerik Operate

CNC-full keyboard (QWERTY - type)



B566

B566

Notes :


Operating elements: START

Operator panel layouts of the Sinu-

merik Operate

CNC-full key-board

Machine control panel

Operating elements: END

Operating elements: Description

The general operation of a Sinumerik Operate will be described. Depending on the machine manufacturer the fol-lowing operating elements can be used:

Operator panels (OP)

CNC-full keyboard



Notes:

Operator Panel layouts of the Sinumerik Operate

The operator panel (OP) consists of the following operating elements:

Membrane keyboard with 8 + 4 horizontal and 8 vertical softkeys

Colour display (10.4” Display on 828D, 15” Display on 840D sl)

Front-USB-plug on operator panel front (840D sl),

USB, CF-card, Ethernet on operator panel front (828D)

Fully integrated QWERTY CNC-keyboard (828D)

2.1 Operator panel layout of the Sinumerik 840D sl:

Horizontal softkey strip (HSK) with 4 screen keys (2 each located on the left and right side)

Vertical softkey strip (VSK)

15“ TFT-colour display

Front-USB-plug (Sinumerik 840D sl) , e.g. for connection of exter-nal memory media, mouse or keyboard

Status-LED: Power Status-LED: Temp

1

2

3

4

5

4

2

1

5

3

1

1

2

2

3

3 6

6

2.2 Operator panel layout of the Sinumerik 828D

4

4

5

5

Section 2


Notes:

Operator Panel layouts of the Sinumerik Operate

The horizontal softkey bar consists furthermore of:

4 screen keys (see pictures below)

“MACHINE”-key: Calls-up the operating area “MACHINE” (in operat-ing mode “JOG”, “MDA” or “AUTO”).

“Recall”-key: Jumps to the next highest menu level.

“Extend”-key: Extends the horizontal softkey bar.

“MENU SELECT”-key: Calls the main menu for operating area selection.

2.3. Horizontal and vertical Softkey bar (HSK/VSK)

Softkeys are buttons, which are dynamically linked with programmed func-tions. These functions are presented on the monitor above the softkey bar (HSK) or to the left of the softkey bar (VSK) as a strip of icons.

The 8 horizontal softkeys are used to access the individual operation sectors including further menu layers. There is an associated vertical menu strip/Softkey strip for each of the horizontal menu points.

The 8 vertical Softkeys are functions associated with the presently se-lected horizontal Softkey.

The function will be called up when the vertical softkey is pressed.

The content of the vertical softkey bar can therefore change once again if a sub-function to the selected function is chosen.

Horizontal softkey strip with 4 screen keys (2 each located on the left and right side) (HSK)

Vertical softkey strip (VSK)

10,4“ TFT-colour display

USB, CF-card and Ethernet on panel front behind removable cover

Ready-LED (Status red/green), NC-LED (Status LED of the NC) and CF-LED (write/read access on CF-card) behind lockable and removable cover

Integrated QWERTY CNC-keyboard (for reference see section 3)

1

2

3

4

5

6

Section 2


Notes:

2.4 Screen area

The screen is laid out as follows:

Operation sector

Program path and name

Status, program influence and program name

Alarm and message line

Channel operation messages

Position readout for the axes

Display of the active zero point and rotation

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Display of:

T = Active tool

F = Present feedrate

S = Actual spindle revolution

Spindle load factor in percent

Vertical softkey bar (VSK)

Working window

Horizontal softkey bar (HSK)

Date and Time

8

9

10

11

12

2

3

6

8

9

7

10

11

1

5

4 12

Operator Panel layouts of the Sinumerik Operate Section 2


Notes:

CNC-full keyboard

According to the model of operating panel that is used, a CNC-keyboard can be integrated for operation and programming.

The keys that are described here can also be located directly on the opera-tor panel.

The layout of the operating panel is described in the documentation of the machine manufacturer.

Below follows a description of the basic keys of the CNC-Full keyboard. CNC-Full keyboard “KB 483”:

Alpha-Block Hotkey-Block Cursor-Block Number-Block.

Keys in the Alpha-Block

BACKSPACE Clears a value in the input field. If in edit mode, the character in front of the cursor will be cleared.

TAB Indent the cursor by several characters.

SHIFT If the Shift-key is held depressed, the upper charac-ter on keys with double usage will be entered.

CTRL With the following key combinations navigation in the work plan and the G-Code-Editor is carried out:

Ctrl + NEXT WINDOW: Jump to the beginning.

Ctrl + END: Jump to the end.

ALT ALT-Key

Alpha-Block: The alpha-block features the letters A, ..., Z, the space key and the special character for the input of text.

Hotkey-Block: The hotkey-block serves the direct selection of op-eration areas.

Cursor-Block: The cursor-block is used for navigation around the screen display.

Number-Block: The number-block features the numbers 0 ... 9, the decimal point and special characters for the input of numerical characters and operators.

Section 3


Notes:

CNC-full keyboard

INPUT

Accepts an edited value

Opens / closes a directory

Opens a file

Keys in the Hotkey-Block

MACHINE Opens up the operating area "Machine" (JOG, MDA, Auto). Corresponds to the yellow HSK 1 “Machine”

PROGRAM Opens up the operating area "Program". The key corresponds to the yellow HSK 3 “Program”.

OFFSET Opens up the operating area "Parameter” (Tool list, Tool wear, Magazine, Work offset, User variable, Setting data). The key corresponds to the yellow HSK 3 "Parameter".

PROGRAM MANAGER Opens up the operating area "Program manager“. The key corresponds to the yellow HSK 4 "Program Manager".

ALARM Opens up the actual Alarmlist-window. The key corresponds to the VSK 1"Alarm list" in the operating area “Diagnostics”.

CUSTOM This key can be customized by the machine manu-facturer.

See the machine manufacturer’s documentation .

Keys in the Cursor-Block

ALARM CANCEL Clears an active alarm shown in the alarm and mes-sage line that is identified with this symbol.

CHANNEL Selects a channel from 1 - n.

HELP Opens the context-sensitive help window in a split-screen view. In case of the G-Code editor the help documentation with intelligent support for program-ming instructions is called up.

NEXT WINDOW Activates the next subwindow in the actual working window. By pressing “CTRL + NEXT WINDOW“ in the G-Code editor window you can jump to the first line of the program code.

PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN Paging up or down in a directory or the work plan.

Section 3


Notes:

CNC-full keyboard

Further keys in the Cursor-Block

END Locates the cursor in the last input field of a parame-ter mask. In the G-code editor the cursor will be set to the end of the active line and by pressing STRG + END the cursor jumps to the end of the last line of the program.

Cursor-Keys Navigates through the various fields or lines on the screen. While in a program listing, the “cursor-to-the-right”-key opens a directory or a program. To change to the next level above the present level press the “cursor-to-the-left”-key.

SELECT With this key you can select amongst several given alternatives.

Keys in the Number-Block

BACKSPACE Clears a value in the active input field. While in the edit mode, just the character in front of the cursor will be cleared.

DEL Deletes the value in the parameter field. While in the edit mode, just the character behind the cursor will be deleted.

INSERT Activation of the insertion mode or the pocket calcu-lator. Opens a parameter menu in an input field if available.

INPUT

Accepts an edited value

Opens/closes a directory

Opens a file

Section 3


Notes:


Depending on the type of operating panel the machine manufacturer may be using either a SIEMENS or his own machine control panel for the op-eration of the machine.

This section describes the standard-keys of the Siemens machine control panel.

Depending on the machine further keys may be used; such information should be taken from the documentation by the machine manufacturer. Machine control panel “MCP 483”:

EMERGENCY-STOP-key

Press this key in the case of an emergency, i.e. if human life is endangered or if the machine or work piece could be damaged.

All drives will be braked to a standstill with the great-est possible braking torque.

Note:

For further reactions that may be caused by pressing the EMERGENCY-OFF key please refer to the docu-mentation by the machine manufacturer.

RESET

Stops the machining from executing the presently running program. The NC-control unit remains synchronized with the machine. It is now in the basic condition ready to commence a new pro-gram run.

Clears an active alarm.

JOG Selection of the operating mode “JOG”.

TEACH IN Creation of programs in interactive mode with the machine.

MDA Selection of the operating mode “MDA” (Machine Data Automatic).

AUTO Selection of the operating mode “Machine Auto”.

Below follows a description of the keys of the machine control panel and their function:

Section 4


Notes:


SINGLE BLOCK Runs a program block-by-block (single block).

REPOS Repositions and re-approaches a contour.

REF. Point Approaches a reference point.

VAR (Variable JOG step) Traverse through an incremental dimension with variable step lengths.

Inc (Incremental JOG step) Traverse through an incremental dimension with a given step size of 1, ..., 10000 increments. The actual length of an incremental step depends on a machine datum.

Note: Read the machine manufacturer’s documentation.

CYCLE START Starts a program run.

CYCLE STOP Stops a program run.

to

Axis keys Axis (X, Y, Z, 4, 5, 6) selection.

Direction keys For traversing an axis either in the positive or nega-tive direction.

RAPID For traversing an axis at rapid traverse rate (fastest speed).

WCS MCS Toggling between the work piece coordinate system (WCS) and the machine coordinate system (MCS).

Section 4


Notes:

Feed / Rapid traverse override For increasing or reducing the programmed feedrate. The programmed feedrate is represented by 100% and can be varied within the range of 0% to 120%, in rapid traverse only up to 100%. The new adjusted value appears as an absolute and percent-age value in the feed status display on the screen.

FEED STOP Stops the machining of the currently running pro-gram, in order to stop the axes.

FEED START Continuation of the program as from the present block and to increase the feedrate to the pro-grammed value.

Spindle override For increasing or reducing the programmed speed. The programmed speed corresponds to 100% and can be varied within the range of 0% to 120%. The new value thus selected appears as an absolute value and as a percentage in the speed status dis-play on the screen.

SPINDLE STOP To stop the spindle.

SPINDLE START To start the spindle.

Key switch

Position 0 No key Access stage 7

Lowest access stage

Position 1 Key 1 black Access stage 6

Increasing access rights

Position 2 Key 1 green Access stage 5

Position 3 Key 1 red Access stage 4

Highest access right (Key switch)

Further access rights (Access stage 3 - 0) are possi-ble by means of passwords.

Machine control panel Section 4



Switching on the machine / control unit - reference point

B567

1 Brief description

Objectives of the module:

In this module you learn how to switch on the machine and / or the control unit and how to approach the reference point of the axes.


Both the machine and the control unit must be switched on before any work can be done on the ma-chine. Following this all axes with incremental measuring systems must be referenced in order to en-able the control unit to establish the position of the axes within the machine coordinate system. There is no need to reference any axes equipped with absolute measuring system. In this case the control unit recognizes the position of the axes automatically.

Content:

Switching on the machine and the control unit

Approaching the reference point of the axes


B567

B567

Notes :


Switching on the machine: START

Switching on the machine and the con-

trol unit

Approaching the reference point of the

axes

Switching on the machine:

END

Switching on the machine: Description

Both the machine and the control unit must be switched on before any work can be done on the machine. Following this all axes with incremental measuring systems must be referenced in order to enable the control unit to establish the position of the axes within the machine coordinate system. There is no need to reference any axes equipped with absolute measuring system. In this case the control unit recognizes the position of the axes automatically.


Notes:

Switching ON the machine and the control unit

Switching ON sequence

Please note the explicit switching ON rules as stated by the machine manufacturer.

1. Turn on the main switch of the machine. Note: Normally the main switch will be found on the switchgear cabinet.

2. All EMERGENCY-STOP keys of the machine must be released (operating panels, switchgear cabinet, etc.).

Note: The locations of the EMERGENCY-STOP keys are shown in the machine manufacturer’s documentation.

Section 2


Notes:

Switching on the machine and the control unit

3. Switch on the control unit. Depending on the individual machine this switch can be found on the operating desk or the switchgear cabinet of the machine or else the control unit is switched ON automatically when

turning the main switch. Note: For more information see the documentation of the machine manufacturer

The control unit boots.

While booting a welcome image is displayed, followed by the basic screen of the SINUMERIK HMI (displayed below):

4. Any fault messages that might be displayed can be cleared by means of the “RESET“-key on the machine control panel.

Section 2


Notes:


3.2 Approaching the reference point

Depending on the commissioning of the machine there are various ways of referencing.

Note: For further details see the machine manufacturer’s documentation.

3.2.1. Automatic referencing

Press the “CYCLE START”-button on the machines control panel.

The axes will be referenced one after the other.

3.1 Referencing sequence

!

Before referencing the axes a check must be car-ried out to ensure that there is no danger of colli-sions during the approach.

Machines with incremental measuring systems must be referenced after switching ON in order to synchronize the measuring system with the ma-chine coordinate system.

Press the “JOG”-button on the machine control panel.

Press the “REF.POINT”-button on the machine con-trol panel.

The respective LED’s above the keys are illuminated. The referencing screen opens up with all the axes that need referenc-ing (see image below).

1

1

Section 3


Notes:


3.2.2 Manual referencing

Press the “FEED START“-button on the machine control panel.

Select an axis for referencing.

Press or . Note: Refer to the machine manufacturer's documentation.

Select all other axes one after the other and start the reference point ap-proach by pressing either “+“ or “-“.

While referencing confirm the feed override setting, since the axes are traversed at the feed rate that has been preset by means of a machine datum.

Axes that have been referenced are shown on the display with a “Reference point symbol“ preceding the axis name. See the screen below.

The axis is referenced as soon as the reference point is reached. The ac-tual value display is set to the reference point value. From now on, path limits, such as software limit switches, are active. End the function via the machine control panel by selecting operating mode “AUTO” or “JOG”.

Section 3


Notes:

Section End



Basics of operation B568

Objective of the module: In this module you learn about the screen layout of the display panel of the Sinumerik Operate, as well as the the basic operation of the control using softkeys and buttons.

Description of the module: This module describes the relevant parts of the main screen with help of the basic screen layout. In addition to the topic above, this module covers the selection of parameters with respect to units (mm/inch) used and the usage of the calculator within the input masks.

1 Brief Description

Content:

Basics of operation

Considerations for the input masks


B568

B568

Notes :


Basic operations: START

Basics of operation

Considera-tions for the input masks

Basic operations: END

Basic operations: Description

This module describes the relevant parts of the main screen with help of the basic screen layout. In addition to the topic above, this module covers the selection of parameters with respect to units (mm/inch) used and the usage of the calculator within the input masks.


Notes:

Basics of operation

2.1 Main screen of the HMI in the operating mode “JOG”

In this section the parts of the main screen will be declared.

1

5

7

10

12

11

6

9

2

8

4

3

Active operating area and mode


Status, program influence and channel name


Channel operation messages

Date and time

Display of:

T = Active tool

F = Present feedrate

S = Spindle

Spindle load factor in percent

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Position readout for the axes

Display of the active zero point, rotation, mirroring and scaling

Working window

Horizontal softkey bar

Vertical softkey bar

8

9

10

11

12

Section 2


Notes:

Basics of operation


NC programs can be created, modified and selected in the three main di-rectories on the NC of the type DIR.

2

Folder “Part programs” Part programs have the file extension MPF and are stored in a sepa-rate part programs folder.

Display in editor Description

The shown program path to the left indicates that the selected program “TEST.MPF” can be found on the NC. The “MPF” in the program path refers to the directory “Part programs“.

Folder “Subprograms” Subprograms have the file extension SPF and are stored in a separate subprogram folder


The selected program “TEST.SPF“ is stored on the NC in the SPF subprogram folder as the folder path to the left points out.

Active operating area and operating mode

(The display mode depends on the selected operating mode on the ma-chine control panel (MCP)).

1

Display area Description

The operating mode “Machine Manual” (setup mode) can be selected by pressing the “JOG”-button on the machine control panel. Functions adjusted under “T,S,M“ like tool selection, work offset and spindle control affect all movements in the manual operating mode. Another function using the “JOG“-Mode is the ap-proaching of the reference point (REF.POINT).

Hint: If you use a mouse to operate the HMI Sinumerik Operate, a click in the upper left corner of the display area (here the upper case “M“ with over line and un-derline) opens the yellow horizontal- and vertical softkey bar, from which you can access comfortably all the main functions of the control unit.

Folder “Workpieces” Workpiece programs have the file extension WPD and are stored in a separate workpiece folder.


The selected program “TEST.MPF” is stored on the NC in the created workpiece directory “TEST.WPD“ The “WKS” in the program path refers to the direc-tory “Workpieces“.

Section 2


Notes:

Basics of operation


In case of a syntax error in the program code or a hardware malfunction (e.g. emergency stop) an alarm number with explaining text shows up.

4

MCP Display area

Description

After correcting the error (correction of the hard-ware malfunction) you can reset the error message with the “RESET“-button.

CNC-keyboard

By pressing the “ALARM“-key on the keyboard the

“Alarm list”-window shows up, with a list of all active alarm messages.

After correcting the error (correction of the syntax error) you can reset the error message with the “ALARM CANCEL“-key on the keyboard.

Status, program influence and channel name 3


Reset

Interrupted

Activated

Section 2


Notes:

Basics of operation

Chanel operation messages Display of operation messages with symbols.

5


Attention: In case of conditions with this sym-bol a manual operation is required.

Operation in case of the message “Stop“: After the fault remedy the machining program will be continued after pressing “NC-Start“.

Operation in case of the message “Wait“: After a successful acknowledgement of the fault the machining program will be continued automatically.

Stop: No NC-Ready

Stop: BAG-Ready (mode-of-operation group)

Stop: EMERGENCY-STOP activated

Stop: Alarm with Stop activated

Stop: M0/M1 activated

Stop: Block completed in single block mode

Stop: Cycle-Stop activated

Wait: Read-in release missing

(Part program is not further processed by NC)

Wait: Feed enable missing

Wait: Axis enable missing

Wait: for Feed override

Stop: NC-block erroneous

Wait: for external NC-blocks

Wait: Spindle enable missing

Wait: Axis feed rate is 0

Stop: No channel ready

Stop: SERUPRO has reached the search desti-nation and the NCK has stopped. SERUPRO is the abbreviation for „Search Run by Program test“ and represents a new kind of block search.

In case of conditions with this symbol, a manual operation is usually not necessary.

Wait: Remaining dwell time in seconds or in spindle revolutions

Wait: HiFu-acknowledgement missing

Wait: Exact stop not reached

Wait: for positioning axis

Section 2


Notes:

Basics of operation

Date/Time

Current date and time are shown in the upper right corner of the screen.

6

Display of T,F,S and spindle-value 7


T: (Tool) Name of the active tool. The op-tional display of “TC“ is only available if a swivel head table is present.

F: (Feed) Display of the active feed rate for the current machining (top: actual feed rate, large digits during machin-ing), as well as the display of the pro-grammed feed rate (bottom) and the feed override in %.

S: (Spindle) Display of the active spindle speed for the current machining (top: actual speed, large digits during ma-chining), as well as the display of the programmed spindle speed (bottom) and the speed override in %.

Display area Description (continuation)

Note: In case of conditions with this symbol a manual op-eration is usually not required.

Wait: for spindle

Wait: for another channel

Wait: due to a SYNACT-instruction

Wait: Block advance activated

Wait: for tool change acknowledgement

Wait: for gear change

Wait: for closed loop

Wait: for tapping start

Wait: for safe operation

Halt: oscillation activated

Wait: during access to a system variable

Section 2


Notes:

Basics of operation

Position display for the axes 8

Description MCP/Display area

With the key “WCS MCS” on the MCP or the VSK 7 “Act. vls. MCS” it is possible to switch between the machine coordinate system (MCS) and the workpiece coordi-nate system (WCS).

Display of the available axes with axis as-signment and position data in the machine coordinate system (Mach).

Display of the available axes with axis as-signment and position data in the work piece coordinate system (WCS). However, programmable zero offsets are not taken into consideration in the display.

Display of the active zero point offsets, rotation, mirroring and

scaling

The machine coordinate system (MCS) does not consider zero point off-sets in comparison to the workpiece coordinate system (WCS).


Name of the currently active work offset, rotation, mirroring, rotation and scaling for the present machining sequence.

Work window 10

Depending on the pressed horizontal softkey the associated parameter fields and help pictures are displayed. Here the “T,S,M”-mask is shown.

9

Section 2


Notes:

Basics of operation

2.2 Operating with softkeys and buttons

The Sinumerik Operate separates into 6 different operating areas (“Machine“, “Parameter“, “Program“, “Program Manager“, “Diagnostics“, “Start-up”), 3 operating modes (“JOG”, “MDA”, “AUTO”) and 2 functions (“REPOS”, “REFPOINT”).

By pressing the button “MENU SELECT“ on the operator panel the active screen will be overlaid with the display of a yellow horizontal softkey bar at the bottom and a yellow vertical softkey bar on the left side of the screen. They consist of 6 operating area softkeys in the HSK and 3 operating mode-, as well as 2 function softkeys in the vertical softkey bar.

Vertical softkey bar (VSK) The available functions and operating modes can be selected from the keys right beside the vertical softkey bar (VSK) on the right hand side of the screen. If the number of functions exceeds the representation possi-bility capacity of the maximum of 8 softkeys than a partitioning in two dif-ferent vertical softkey bars occurs.

12

The changeover takes place with the:

“Forward“-key or the “Backward“-key (VSK 8).

Horizontal softkey bar (HSK)

The user interface consists of different subsections. At the bottom of the screen is the horizontal softkey bar (HSK) containing 8 softkeys (see Sec-tion 2.2.1 in this module). The selection of a new window is made by pressing the buttons just under the softkeys. If the number of functions exceeds the representation capacities of the maximum of 8 softkeys than a partitioning in two different horizontal softkey bars occurs.

11

The change over forth and back takes place with the “Menu extend“-key on the operator panel.

Section 2


Notes:

2.2.1 Horizontal softkey bar (HSK)


By pressing HSK 1 “Machine“ the operating are “Machine“ will be called up.

See module B569 - “Operating area machine“.

By pressing the HSK 2 “Parameter“ the operating area “Parameter“ will be called up.

See module B573 - “Operating area Parameter“.

By pressing the HSK 3 “Program“ the operating area “Programm“ will be called up.

See module B574 - “Operating area Programm“.

By pressing the HSK 4 “Program-Manager“ the op-erating area “Program-Manager“ will be called up.

See module B575 - “Operating area Program-Manager“.

By pressing the HSK 5 “Diagnose“ the operating area “Diagnose“ will be called up.

See module B576 - “Operating area Diagnose“.

By pressing the HSK 6 “Start-up“ the operating area “Start-up“ will be called up.

See module B577 - “Operating area Start-up“.

2.2.2 Vertikale Softkey-Leiste (VSK)


By pressing the VSK 1 “AUTO“ the operating mode “AUTO“ will be called up

See module B572 - “Operating mode AUTO“.

By pressing the VSK 2 “MDA“ the operating mode “MDA“ will be called up.

See module B571 - “Operating mode MDA“.

By pressing the VSK 3 the operating mode “JOG“ will be called up.

See module B570 - “Operating mode JOG“.

Basics of operation Section 2


Notes:


By pressing the VSK 4 „REPOS“ the function „REPOS“ will be called up.

See module B569 - “Operating area Machine“.

By pressing the VSK 5 „REF POINT“ the function “REF POINT“ will be called up.

See module B569 - “Operating area Machine”.

Basics of operation Section 2


Notes:

Notes for the input masks

3.1 Measurement units [metric/imperial]

The measurement units of all parameters used in the entire documentation are defined in the metrical system (mm). The following table compares the equivalent imperial measuring units (inch and foot) with the metric system. Note: A description how to change between metric (mm) and imperial system (inch) can be found in the module B570 - “Operating mode JOG“.

Metric Inch/foot

mm in

mm/tooth in/tooth

mm/min in/min

mm/rev in/rev

m/min ft/min

3.2 Parameter selection The following described selection of parameters in an input mask can be called in every entry field where parameter selection is possible and nu-merical input is not possible.

A list of possible parameters is displayed by press-ing "INSERT"-key on the keyboard Navigation through the menu occurs with the blue cursor-keys. Hint:

Navigation in long lists can be short cutted by pressing the initial letter or number of the parameter directly on the keyboard. Each additional pressed letter continuous to restrict the selection.

If the selected entry is orange highlighted (actual cursor position) then with pressing on of the yellow “INPUT“-keys on the keyboard the chosen value is taken over into the input field. Alternatively you can switch through a list of possi-ble choices in the input field by pressing the blue “SELECT“-key repeatedly.

Section 3


Notes:

Notes for the input masks

3.3 Pocket calculator The calculator can be called-up from every part of the operating area.

If a numerical entry is necessary in an input field you can open the pocket calculator by pressing the equal sign (=) on the keyboard. If their is already a value existing in the input filed e.g. 100 , then the value will be captured into the calculator window.

Softkeys Description

By pressing the softkey “Delete“ every input or out-come value in the calculator will be deleted.

For calculating values the four basic arithmetical operators are available, as well as…..

square root (R) and….

Square (S).

If you enter the letter “R“ with a following number in the calculator and press the “Calculate“ button than the square root of the entry will be calculated. If you place first a “S“ instead of a “R“ in front of the num-ber, the square will be calculated.

A mathematical function with values in parenthesis allows the calculation of complex mathematical ex-pressions. The softkey “Accept“ transfers the result to the input field and closes the pocket calculator independ-ently.

The button “Cancel“ closes the pocket calculator.

Section 3



Operating area "Machine" B569

1 Brief Description


In this module you learn how to work with the different options of the operating area "Machine".


In this module the basic menu is explained, with respect to each operating options. The basic menu consists of a yellow horizontal softkey bar (with 6 operating areas) at the bottom and a yellow vertical softkey bar (with 3 operating modes and 2 functions) at the right hand side of the screen. Depending on the elective operation mode (“JOG”, “MDA”, “AUTO”) a different window option (HSK) and function option (VSK) is displayed in the operating area "Machine".

Content:

Operating area "Machine"


B569

B569

Notes :


Operating area machine: START

Operating area

"Machine"

Operating area machine:

END

Operating area machine: Description

In this module the basic menu is explained, with respect to each operating options. The basic menu consists of a yellow horizontal softkey bar (with 6 operating areas) at the bottom and a yel-low vertical softkey bar (with 3 operating modes and 2 functions) at the right hand side of the screen. Depending on the elective operation mode (“JOG”, “MDA”, “AUTO”) a different window option (HSK) and function option (VSK) is displayed in the operating area "Machine".


Notes:

Operating area "Machine".

2.1 Selecting the operating area "Machine"

The operating area "Machine" can be selected as follows:

Press the button "MENU SELECT" on the operator panel .

The actual operator interface will be overlaid with the display of a basic menu containing the yellow horizontal softkey bar (with the 6 operating ar-eas: “Machine”, “Parameter”, “Program”, “Program manager”, “Diagnostics” and “Start-up”) and the yellow vertical softkey bar (with 3 op-erating modes: “JOG“, “MDA“, “AUTO“ and 2 functions: “REPOS, “REFPOINT).

By pressing the HSK 1 "Machine" depending on the formerly chosen operation mode:

JOG (see module B520)

MDA (see module B521)

AUTO (see module B522) there will be different window options (HSK) and function options (VSK) available in the operating area "Machine",

After pressing the HSK 1 "Machine" (selecting the operating area "Machine") in the operating mode "JOG" the "Machine" operator interface opens up (see the following image).

Section 2


Notes:

Operating area "Machine"

You can switch to the operating modes "JOG", "MDA" or "AUTO" in the operating area "Machine" immediately by pressing the respective button on the machine control panel, or by pressing the button “MENU SELECT“ first and then the corresponding VSK.

2.2 Vertical softkey (VSK) bar of the main menu

Display section Description

By pressing the VSK 1 "AUTO" in the operating area "Machine", the operation mode "AUTO" will be called up.

See module B572 - Operating mode "AUTO".

By pressing the VSK 2 “MDA“ in the operating area "Machine" the operation mode “MDA“ will be called up.

See module B571 - "Operating mode MDA"

By pressing the VSK 3 “JOG“ in the operating area “Machine“ the operating mode "JOG" will be called up.

See module B570 - "Operating mode JOG".

After a program interruption (“CYCLE STOP“) and after traversing the axis you can reposition the axis to a saved position by pressing the VSK 4 “REPOS“.

By pressing the VSK 5 "REF POINT" in the operat-ing mode "JOG" or "MDA" you can approach the reference points.

Section 2


Notes:

Section End

This document was produced for training purposes. Siemens assumes no responsibility for its contents.



Operating mode “JOG“ B570

1 Brief description


In this module you learn the different options of the operating area "Machine" in the operating mode "JOG".


In this module the softkeys of the Sinumerik Operate, available in the manual mode (setup- and basic

functions), will be described.

Content:

Operating mode "JOG" Tool-, spindle- and machine commands (T,S,M) Set Work offset (“Set WO”) Measure workpiece Measuring a tool Position Face milling Handwheel Synchronized actions Settings


B570

B570

Notes :


Operating mode jog: Description

In this module the softkeys of the Sinumerik Oper-

ate, available in the manual mode (setup- and ba-

sic functions), will be described.

Operating mode jog:

START

Operating mode "JOG"

Tool-, spindle- and machine commands

(T,S,M)

Set Work offset

(“Set WO”)

Measure workpiece

Measuring a tool

Position

Face milling

Handwheel

Operating mode jog: END

Synchronized actions

Settings


Notes:

Operating mode “JOG“

2.1 Selecting the operating mode “JOG“

The operating mode "JOG" can be selected as follows:

Press the “JOG“ button on the machine control panel (MCP). The operating mode “JOG” opens directly.

- OR -

Press the button “MENU SELECT“ on the machine control panel.

Press the VSK 1 “JOG“ in the yellow vertical softtkey bar on the right hand side of the screen to switch directly to the operating mode “JOG“.

Then Switch to the operating area “Machine” by pressing the “MACHINE” key on the operator panel or on the keyboard or press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator panel and the yellow HSK 1 “Machine“. The following screen opens:

Operation mode “JOG” is used, for setting up the machine for program run-off or if you simply want to traverse the axes on the machine:

Reference point approach, i.e. calibration of the position measuring sys-tem

Preparing a machine for executing a program in automatic mode, i.e. measuring tools, measuring the workpiece and, if necessary, defining the work offsets used in the program

Traversing axes, e.g. during a program interruption

Positioning axes

Section 2


Notes:


2.2 Vertical softkey bars 1 and 2


The most important G-functions are displayed in a sub-window by pressing the VSK 1.1 "G functions".

Available auxiliary functions are displayed in a sub-window by pressing the VSK 1.2 "Auxiliary func-tions" at the time of the output.

By pressing the VSK 1.7 "Act. vls. MCS", the coor-dinate system will be toggled between the machine coordinate system (MCS) and the workpiece coor-dinate system (TCS). Note: Refer to the machine manufacturer„s documenta-tion.

By pressing the VSK 1.8 "Forward" on the operator panel (OP) the selection of additional softkeys on the vertical softkey bar is possible

By pressing the VSK 2.2 "All G functions" all G-functions will be shown.

By pressing the VSK 2.6 "Zoom act. val." all actual axes positions in the selected coordinate system as well as the currently active feed rate and feed over-ride of each individual axis are displayed full screen. In addition all active zero point offsets, transformations and the T,F,S data is being dis-played in the foot line. Note: If the machine is in the sub-mode “REPOS”, then the in manual mode traversed path difference is also being displayed.

By pressing the VSK 2.8 "Back" on the operator panel (OP) the vertical softkey bar switches back to the menu of the VSK 1.

The following functions are offered in the horizontal and vertical softkey bar of the operating area "Machine" ( see section 2.2 and 2.3).

Section 2


Notes:



By pressing the HSK 1 "T,S,M" the input screen "T,S,M" will be activated.

By pressing the HSK 2 "Set WO" the input screen for setting the work offset will be activated.

By pressing the HSK 3 "Meas. workp.“ the input mask for measuring a workpiece will be activated.

By pressing the HSK 4 "Meas. tool" the function "Measure tool" will be activated and the extended options "Length/Radius manual", "Length/Radius auto",and "Calibrate Probe" will be available in the vertical softkey bar.

By pressing the HSK 5 "Face mill." the input screen "Face milling" will be activated.

By pressing the HSK 7 "Position" the input screen "Position" will be activated.

By pressing the "Extend"-button on the operator panel (OP) more softkeys on the HSK are available. This symbol on the right of the dialogue line indi-cates that more options on the HSK are available. This symbol indicates that you are in the expanded softkey bar.

By pressing the HSK 2.6 "Handwheel" the input mask for traversing the axis in machine coordinate system (MCS) or workpiece coordinate system (WCS) will be available.

By pressing the HSK 2.7 "Synchr. Action." the screen which shows the current synchronized ac-tions is displayed.

By pressing the HSK 2.8 "Settings" a window opens up where you can adjust the settings for manual operation on the Sinumerik Operate.

2.3 Horizontal softkey bar 1 and 2

Section 2


Notes:

Tool-, spindle- and machine commands (T,S,M)

3.1 Selecting the function "T,S,M"

(Tool, spindle and machine commands)

By pressing the HSK 1 "T,S,M" in operation area “Machine” under operation mode “JOG” the follow-ing input mask will be displayed on the screen .

3.2 Vertical softkey bar (VSK)


By pressing the VSK 2 "Tool" the tool list opens on the screen.

See module B573 - "Operating area Parameter".

By pressing the VSK 3 "Work offset" a list with the zero point offsets will be displayed. Refer to Work offset section 4 in this module and module B573 - "Operating area Parameter".

By pressing the VSK 8 "Back" switch back to the main screen of the Sinumerik Operate.

Section 3


Notes:

Input mask for tool-, spindle- and machine commands: Values can be entered directly in the orange marked input fields or by se-lecting predefined parameters with the “SELECT”-key. Alternatively the “INSERT”-button in the marked cursor field opens a select menu of all possible parameters, in which you can navigate with the “Tab”- key as well as the blue “cursor-up”- and “cursor-down”-down buttons. The button “INPUT” takes over the selected values. In order to be independently of country specific measuring units [metric/ imperial] not all units are displayed in the input masks.

See module B568 - "Basic operations".

In this documentation the measuring units are always metric.

Parameter Unit Meaning

T

Tool name: e.g.: T12 or Cutter_7 (alphanumerical).

D Cutting edge number of the tool.

Spindle [rpm] Spindle speed (revolutions per minute, nu-merical).

Spindle M funct.:

Empty field

Right(M 3)

Left (M 4)

Off (M 5)

Positioning (SPOS)

Spindle machine functions: (Make a selec-tion using the "SELECT"-key on the key-board).

No selection is made.

Clockwise rotation of the spindle.

Counter clockwise rotation of the spindle.

Spindle is stopped.

Spindle positioning: Spindle is positioned to the desired position.

Other M funct..: Manufacturer defined M-functions. By inserting the number of the function, a corresponding M-function is selected. Refer to the machine manufacturer„s table for the correlation between the meaning and the number of the function.

3.3 Parameters of "T,S,M" (Tool, spindle and machine commands)

Tool-, spindle- and machine commands (T,S,M) Section 3


Notes:

Parameter Unit Meaning (continuation)

Work offset:

None

Basic reference

G54

G55

G56

G57

Alternative parameter options: The actual value of the work offset refers to the machine zero point, after approach-ing the reference point.

In contrast a machining program refers to the workpiece zero point. This offset is to be entered as zero point offset.

You can select work offsets from the tool list of settable work offsets via the "Work offset" softkey.

See module B573 - "Operating area Pa-rameter".

Unit of measure.:

none

mm

inch

[mm]

[inch]

Alternative parameter options:

Note: The setting made here has effect on the programming.

Machining plane:

G17

G18

G19

(XY)

(ZX)

(YZ)

Gear stage:

Specification of the gear stage

(none, auto, I - V).

Stop-Position: [Degree] Input of the spindle position in degrees.

Note: This parameter shows up by selecting the

spindle M-function .

Note: With “CYCLE START“ the inserted values will be executed. The entries in the option fields will be deleted, ready for new inputs.

Tool-, spindle- and machine commands (T,S,M) Section 3


Notes:

4.1 Selecting the function "Work offset"

By pressing the HSK 2 "Set WO" in operation area “Machine” under operation mode “JOG” the input field for the programming of a work offset will be opened, like displayed below.

Input value: By selecting an axis you can insert a value for the zero point offset in the orange marked field (see the picture above). The navigation through the axis-fields can be ac-complished by pressing the blue “cursor-up“ and “cursor down“ keys on the keyboard. The slider on the right side of the subwindow indi-cates that there are more axis values available, that can be reached by using the “cursor-down“ key.

Important: The horizontal softkey 2 "Set WO" is only select-able if the workpiece coordinate system is selected and a zero point offset (in this example G54) is ac-tive.

The entered values for a zero point offset of the axis will be accepted and displayed in the work-piece coordinate system (WCS).

The difference between the original position to the new entered value will be written to the active zero point offset.

Work offset Section 4


Notes:

4.2 Vertical softkey bar


By pressing the VSK 1 "X=0" the position of the X-axis will be reset to zero.

By pressing the VSK 2 "Y=0" the position of the Y-axis will be reset to zero.

By pressing the VSK 3 "Z=0" the position of the Z-axes will be reset to zero.

By pressing the VSK 4 „X=Y=Z=0“ the position of the X/Y/Z-axis will be reset to zero.

By pressing the VSK 5 "Delete active WO" the zero point offset of all axes is set back to zero.

By pressing the VSK 8 "Back" you switch back to the main screen of the Sinumerik Operate.

Note: After setting a position or deleting a zero point offset you switch back automatically to the main screen of the Sinumerik Operate.

4.3 Setting the "Work offset"

Press the HSK 1 "T,S,M" to activate the “T,S,M“ (Tool-, spindle- and machine) -mode.

In the input mask select the input field "Work off-set".

By pressing the "INSERT"-key on the keyboard, an option menu opens where you can make the de-sired selection of possible zero point offsets. You can navigate through this menu by means of the blue “cursor-up”- and “cursor-down”-keys on the keyboard. Hint: Navigation in long lists can be easier by pressing the initial letter or number of the parameter directly. Each additionally pressed letter continuous to re-strict the selection.

When the desired zero point offset is marked or-ange, you can accept this value by pressing the yel-low “INPUT”-key on the keyboard.

Alternatively you can toggle through all possible options by pressing the "SELECT"-key repeatedly.

By pressing the button "CYCLE START" on the ma-chine control panel the chosen zero point offset is activated.

Set work offset (“Set WO”) Section 4


Notes:

4.4 Deactivating the "Work offset"

Press the HSK 1 "T,S,M" to select the operation mode “T,S,M”. The “T,S,M” subwindow opens (see picture above).

In the "T,S,M" input mask select the input field "Work offset". By using one of the previous de-scribed selection methods select the empty input field.

Press the button "CYCLE START“ on the machine control panel (MCP) and the "Work offset" will be deactivated.

Set work offset (“Set WO”) Section 4


Notes:

5.1 Selecting the function “Measure workpiece“

In the operating area “Machine“ under the operating mode “JOG“ press the HSK 3 "Meas. workp." to open the “Measure workpiece“ window shown be-low.

The reference point for programming a workpiece is always the workpiece zero. You can determine the workpiece zero on the following workpiece elements:

Edges (Set edge, Align edge)

Corner (Rectangular corner)

Hole (1 Hole, 2 Holes, 3 Holes, 4 Holes))

Spigot (Circular spigot, rectangular spigot)

The workpiece zero can be measured either manually or automatically. Measuring manually: For manual measuring their are parameters that depend upon tool type, and therefore are only available for the particular case. The tool must be manually approached to the workpiece. You can use edge probes, sensing probes, or dial gauges with known radii and lengths. You can also use any other tool of which you know the radius and length. The tools used for measuring must not be electronic probes.

Measuring automatically: For automatic measurements always use electronic 3-D or mono work-piece probes. You must calibrate the electronic workpiece probes before-hand. First position the workpiece probe manually. As soon as you start the process with the "CYCLE START" key, the workpiece probe automati-cally approaches the workpiece at measuring feedrate and then returns to the starting position at rapid traverse. The machine manufacturer must first set the appropriate machine parame-ters (e.g. the measuring feedrate).

Note: During all measurements the override of the feedrate should be set to 100%.

Measure workpiece Section 5


Notes:


By pressing the VSK 1 “Calibrate probe“ the input mask for “Calibrate probe“ opens.

(See section 5.3).

By pressing the VSK 2 “Set edge“ the “Set edge“ window opens.

(See section 5.4).

By pressing the VSK 3 “Align edge” the “Align edge” window opens.

(See section 5.5).

By pressing the VSK 4 “Rectangular corner” the “Rectangular corner” window opens.

(See section 5.6).

By pressing the VSK 5 “1 Hole” the “1 Hole” window opens.

(See section 5.7).

By pressing the VSK 6 “1 Circular spigot” the “1 Cir-cular spigot” window opens.

(See section 5.8).



5.3 Selecting the function “Calibrate probe”

When the tool probes are attached to the spindle, clamping tolerance usu-ally occurs. This can lead to measurement errors. Furthermore, you need to determine the trigger points of the probe rela-tive to the spindle center. Therefore the tool probe has to be calibrated. The radius is calibrated in a hole, the length is calibrated on a surface. For the hole you can use a bore in the workpiece or a setting ring gauge. The radius of the workpiece probe ball and its length 1 must be stored in the tool list.

By pressing the HSK 3 “Meas. workp.” and the VSK 5 “Calibrate probe” (in operating area “Machine” and operating mode “JOG”) the following input screen will be displayed (see the next page).

Measuring workpiece Section 5


Notes:

5.3.2 Parameters of “Calibrate probe“.

Depending on the activated vertical softkey (“Length” or “Radius”) the available parameter input fields are different.

Parameter Unit Description

Probe number: Number of Probes

Z0: [mm] Height of reference piece Note: Only with activated vertical softkey „Length“.

Ø:

[mm] Diameter of the ref-erence piece Note: Only with activated vertical softkey “Radius”.

5.3.1 Vertical softkey bar


By pressing the VSK 2 “Length“ the following de-scribed parameter fields will be active. (See section 5.3.2)

By pressing the VSK 2 “Radius“ the following de-scribed parameter fields will be active. (See section 5.3.2).

By pressing the VSK 8 "Back" you switch back to the main screen for measuring the workpiece.

Measuring workpiece Section 5


Notes:

Measuring workpiece

5.3.3 Calibration of the probe length:

1. Change a tool of the type 3-D probe into the spindle.

2. Position the tool probe approximately over the centre of the measuring surface.

3. In the operating area “Machine” under the operating mode “JOG“ press the HSK 3 “Meas. workp.“.

4. Press Softkey "Calibrate probe” and then “Length”. The calibrate probe “Length” window opens.

5. Enter the reference point “Z0” of the surface, e.g. of the workpiece or the machine table.

6. Press “CYCLE START” on the machine control panel.

The calibration process starts. The length of the measuring tool will be cal-culated and entered in the tool list.

5.3.4 Calibration of the probe radius:

1. Change to a tool of the type 3-D probe.

2. Move the workpiece probe into the hole and position it into the approximated centre of the hole.


4. Press the VSK "Calibrate probe” and choose the VSK 3 “Radius”. The calibrate probe window for the “Radius” opens.

5. Enter the diameter of the hole.

6. Press “CYCLE START” on the machine control panel.

The calibration starts. First the exact hole centre is determined, then the four trigger points on the inside wall of the hole are being approached.

Section 5


Notes:

Measuring workpiece

5.4 Measure workpiece zero “Set edge”

The workpiece lies parallel to the coordinate system on the work table. One reference point will be measured in one of the axes (“X”, “Y”, “Z”).

The following requirements must be fulfilled:

Any tool can be inserted in the spindle for scratching when measuring the workpiece zero manually.

An electronic workpiece probe is inserted in the spindle and activated when measuring the workpiece zero automatically.

By pressing the HSK 3 “Meas. workp.” and the VSK 2 “Set edge“, in the operating area “Machine“ and operating mode “JOG“, the following screen will be displayed.

5.4.1 Vertical softkey bar (VSK)


By pressing the VSK 2 “Work offset“ a list of the work offsets opens.


By pressing the VSK 3 “X“ the measured values for the X-axis will be determined.

By pressing the VSK 4 “Y“ the measured values for the Y-axis will be determined.

By pressing the VSK 5 “Z“ the measured values for the Z-axis will be determined.

By pressing the VSK 7 “Set WO“ the values will be accepted for the work offset.

By pressing the VSK 8 “Back“ you switch back to the “Measure workpiece“ main screen .

Section 5


Notes:

Measuring workpiece

5.4.2 Parameters of "Set edge"

Parameter Description

Work offset:

Measure only

Work offset

Basic reference

Global base

Channel specific base

Alternative parameters

The measured values are computed and displayed without changing the coordi-nate system.

Measurement direction:

X

Y

Z

The selection of the axes di-rections “X”/”Y”/”Z” is made by the vertical softkey bar. With the measurement direc-tion (+ or -) it is determined whether the workpiece will be approached from a positive or negative “X”- or “Y”-direction. By selection of the axis direc-tion “Z it is only possible to approach the work piece from a negative Z-direction.

Reference point

X0, Y0, Z0

5.4.3 Procedure for “Setting edge” manually:

1. Insert any tool in the spindle for scratching when measuring the workpiece zero manually.


3. Press the VSK 2 “Set edge.” The "Set edge" window opens.

4. Select "Meas. only" if you only want to display the measured values.

- OR -

4. Select "Work offset" and the work offset (G54...G57) in which you want to store the zero point in the associated selection box. The selection of the work offsets can differ. Note: Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Section 5


Notes:

Measuring the workpiece zero

- OR -

4. Select "Basic ref." if the zero point is to be saved in the active sys-tem offset.

- OR -

4. Select "Chan. -spec. base" and the desired basic offset (No.1...No.9) in which the zero point is to be saved.

-OR-

4 Select "Global basic" and the desired basic offset (No.1...No.7) in which the zero point is to be saved.

-OR-

4. Press the VSK 2 "Work offset" and select the work offset in which the zero point is to be saved in the "Work offset - G54 … G57" window and press the VSK 1 "In manual". You return to the "Set Edge" window. If it does not, press the VSK 3 “Meas. workp. “.

Note: The selection of work offsets can differ. Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

5. Position the cursor to the desired Zero point offset (G54-G57), then press the VSK 1 „In manual“

6. Use the VSKs 3 - 5 (“X”/ “Y”/ “Z”) to select in which axis direc-tion you want to approach the workpiece first.

7. Select the measuring direction (+ or -) you want to approach the workpiece in. The measuring direction cannot be selected for “Z0”.

8. In “X0”, “Y0”, or “Z0”, specify the reference position of the work-piece edge you are approaching. The reference point position corresponds, e.g. to the dimension specifications of the workpiece edge from the workpiece drawing.

9. Traverse the tool up to the workpiece edge.

10. Press the VSK 7 "Set WO". The position of the workpiece edge is being calculated and dis-played. The reference position of the workpiece edge is being stored as new zero point with “Set WO”. The tool radius is hereby automati-cally compensated for.

Example: Reference point of workpiece edge X1 = -50, measuring direction +, tool radius = 3mm, zero point offset X = 53.

11. If needed repeat the measuring procedure (step 5 to 10) for the other two axes.

Section 5


Notes:

Measuring workpiece

5.4.4 Procedure for “setting edge” automatically

1.

Insert a tool of the kind 3-D probe in the spindle.

2. Prepare the measurement (as described before in section 5.4.3 “Set edge” manually steps 2 to 8, on previous pages).

3. Approach the tool near to the work piece edge that you want to measure.

4. Press the "CYCLE START" key. The automatic measuring process is starts. The position of the workpiece edge is being measured. The position of the workpiece edge is being calculated and dis-played. The setpoint position of the workpiece edge is being stored as new workpiece zero point if “Set WO” was selected. The tool radius is automatically compensated for.

5. If desired repeat the measuring process (step 3 to 4)for the other two axes.

Section 5


Notes:

Measuring workpiece

5.5 Measure workpiece zero “Align edge”

The workpiece lies in any direction, i.e. not parallel to the coordinate sys-tem on the worktable. By measuring two points on the workpiece refer-ence edge that you have selected, you determine the angle to the coordi-nate system.

The following prerequisites must be fulfilled:

You can insert any tool in the spindle for scratching when measuring the workpiece zero manually.


By pressing the VSK 3 “Align edge“ under the function “Meas. workp.” (in operating area “Machine“ and operat-ing mode “JOG“) the following screen will be displayed.



By pressing the VSK 2 “Work offset“ a list of the work offsets will be displayed.


By pressing the VSK 3 “Store P1“ the determined posi-tion of the measuring point “P1“ is stored.

By pressing the VSK 4 “Store P2“ the determined posi-tion of the measuring point “P2“ is stored.

By pressing the VSK 8 “Back“ you jump back to the previous main screen.

Section 5


Notes:

Measuring workpiece

Optionally two more softkey are available in the VSK, as later on de-scribed in this module (see section 5.7):

By pressing the VSK 5 “Store P3” the determined position of the measuring point “P3“ is stored.

By pressing the VSK 6 “Store P4“ the determined position of the measuring point “P4“ is stored.

5.5.2 Parameters measure workpiece “Align edge“


Work offset:

Measure only

Work offset

Basic reference

Global Base

Channel-specific base

Alternative parameters:

The measured values are com-puted and displayed without changing the coordinate system.

G54 ... G57

G500

Measurement direction/Measurement axis:

-X

+X

-Y

+Y

Alternative parameter selection: With the measuring direction (+ or -) it will be determined whether the workpiece will be approached from positive or negative X- or Y-direction.

After completion of measuring a workpiece automatically with the elec-tronic probe, the softkeys “P1 saved” to “P2 saved” are being highlighted and the softkey “Set WO” is being activated.

Section 5


Notes:

Measuring workpiece

5.5.3 Procedure for “Align edge” manually

1. Insert any tool in the spindle for scratching when measuring the workpiece zero manually.

2. In operating mode “JOG“ press the HSK 3 “Meas. workp.“.

3. Press the VSK 2 “Align edge“. The input screen opens.

4. Select “Measuring only” or "Work offset" , with the desired WO number (G54...G57) in which you want to store the zero point in the associated box (as described in section 5.4.3 “Set edge”, step 4).

5. In the input fields "Meas. axis", select the axis in which you want to approach the workpiece, and the measuring direction (+ or -).

6. Select in the input field “Angle. Offs” weather a correction as Coor-dinate rotation or rotary axis offset is being preformed. Select here “Coord. Rotation” or “C-Axis”. In the last case the rotary axis for which a correction is to be executed can be selected.

7. Enter the setpoint angle between the workpiece edge and the refer-ence axis.

8. Traverse the tool to the workpiece edge.

9. Press the VSK 3 "Store P1".

10. Reposition the tool and repeat the measuring procedure (steps 5 to 7) to measure the second point, and then press the "Store P2" soft-key.

11. Press the VSK 7 "Set WO" The angle between the workpiece edge and reference axis is calcu-lated and displayed.

With "Set WO", the workpiece edge now corresponds to the setpoint angle. The calculated rotation is stored in the work offset.

5.5.4 Procedure for “Aligning edge” automatically

1. Insert a tool of the type 3-D probe

2. Prepare the measurement (as described in section 5.5.3, “Align edge manually”, steps 2-7).

3. Traverse the workpiece probe close to the workpiece edge on which you wish to measure.

4. Press the "CYCLE START" key. The automatic measuring process is being started. The position of P1 is being measured and stored. The VSK 3 “P1 saved” becomes active.

4. Repeat the operation (step 3 to 4) to measure and store P2. The position of P2 is being measured and stored. The VSK 4 “P2 saved” becomes active

6. Press the VSK 7 "Set WO" or "Calculate".

The angle between the workpiece edge and reference axis is calculated and displayed. With "Set WO", the workpiece edge now corresponds to the set-point angle. The calculated coordinate rotation is stored in the correction tar-get that you have selected.

Section 5


Notes:

Measuring workpiece

5.6 Measure workpiece zero “Rectangular corner”

The workpiece has a 90° corner and is located anywhere on the work ta-ble. By measuring three points you can determine the corner point in the working plane (X/Y plane) and angle α between the reference edge on the workpiece (line through P1 and P2) and the reference axis (always the 1st axis in the working plane).




By pressing the VSK 4 “Rectangular corner“ under the function “Meas. workp.” (operating area “Machine“ and operating mode “JOG“) the following screen will be displayed:


See page 25/26 measure workpiece “Aligning edge“.

5.6.2 Parameters of measure workpiece “Rectangular corner“


Work offset:

Measuring only

Work offset

Basic reference

Global base

Alternative parameters

The measured values are computed and displayed without changing the coordi-nate system.

G54-G57

G500

Section 5


Notes:

Measuring workpiece

Parameter Description (continuation)

Channel-specific base

The zero point is stored into the active system frame. Channel -specific base is saved under No. 1 ... No. 7

Outside corner: Measures the outside corner of the workpiece:

Pos. 1

Pos. 2

Pos. 3

Pos. 4

Inside corner: Measures the inside corner of the workpiece:

Pos. 1

Pos. 2

Pos. 3

Pos. 4

X0 Reference point X

Y0 Reference point Y

Section 5


Notes:

Measuring workpiece

5.6.3 Procedure for Measuring a “Rectangular corner” manually

1. Insert any tool in the spindle to scratch on.

2. In the operating mode “JOG“ press the HSK 3 “Meas. workp.“.

3. Press the VSK 4 "Rectangular corner" if the workpiece has a right angled corner that is to be measured. The "Rectangular corner" window opens.


5. Select the “Corner“ (inside corner or outside corner) that you wish to measure and its position (e.g. Pos. 1... Pos. 4).

6. Specify the setpoint of the workpiece corner (“X0”, “Y0”) you want to measure.

7. Traverse the tool to the first measuring point “P1”, according to help screen.

8. Press the VSK 1 "Save P1". The coordinates of the first measuring point are measured and stored.

9. Reposition the spindle with the tool each time to approach measur-ing point “P2” and “P3” and press the VSK 4 "Save P2" and VSK 5 "Save P3".


The corner point and angle “α” are calculated and displayed. The corner point now corresponds to the setpoint position. The calculated offset is stored in the work offset.

5.6.4 Procedure for measuring a “Rectangular corner” automatically

1. Insert a 3-D probe in the spindle

2. Prepare the measurement (as described in section 5.6.3 Procedure for Measuring a “Rectangular corner” manually, step 2-6).

3. Approach measuring point “P1” with the workpiece probe.

4. Press the "CYCLE START" key. This starts the automatic measuring process. The position of “P1” is measured and stored. The VSK 3 "P1 stored" softkey becomes active.

5. Repeat the operation (step 3 and 4) to measure and store points “P2” and “P3”.

6. If a corner not equal to 90 degrees is to be measured, repeat the previous step to measure and store P4.

7. Press the "Set WO" or "Calculate" softkey.

The corner point and angle “α” are calculated and displayed. The corner point now corresponds to the setpoint position. The calculated offset is stored in the correction target that you have selected.

Section 5


Notes:

Measuring workpiece

5.7 Measuring workpiece zero “1 Hole”

The workpiece lies anywhere on the work table and has a hole. You can determine the diameter and centre point of the hole with four measuring points (“P1” - “P4”) . The following prerequisites must be fulfilled:



By pressing the VSK 5 “1 Hole“ under the function “Meas. workp.” (in operating area “Machine“ and operating mode “JOG“) the following screen will be displayed:

See page 25-26 measure workpiece “Aligning edge“.


5.7.2 Parameters of measure workpiece “1 Hole”

The following parameters of “Aligning the edge” are used also in “1 Hole” (see page 25-26):

[Work offset, G54, X0, Y0]

Some additional parameters are available if a 3-D probe is used:


Ø Hole [mm] Diameter of the hole

Contact ang. [Degree] Contact angle

Section 5


Notes:

Measuring workpiece

5.7.3 Procedure for measuring “1 Hole” manually

1. Insert any tool in the spindle for scratching on

2. In operating mode “JOG“ press the HSK 3 “Meas. workp.“.

3. Press the VSK 5 "1 Hole". The "1 Hole" input screen mask opens.


5. Specify the setpoint position (“X0”/”Y0”) of pocket centre point “P0”.

6. Traverse the tool to the first measuring point P1.

7. Press the VSK 3 "Save P1". The point is measured and stored.

8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 to measure and store measuring points P2, P3 and P4.


Diameter and centre point position of the hole are calculated and dis-played. The set position of the centre point is stored as a new zero point with "Set WO". The tool radius is automatically compensated for in the calculation.

5.7.4 Procedure for measuring “1 Hole” automatically

1. Insert a tool of the type 3-D probe in the spindle.

2. Prepare the measurement (as described in section 5.7.3 Procedure for measuring “1 Hole” manually, step 2-5).

3. Move the workpiece probe until it is positioned approximately at the centre of the hole.

4. Under "Ø hole" enter the approximate diameter to delimit the area in which the tool can be traversed. If no diameter is entered, travel starts from the starting point at measuring feedrate.

5. If needed, insert a value in the field “Contact angle“. With the contact angle the direction in which you approach the wall of the hole can be rotated at any angle.

6. Press "CYCLE START" on the MCP. This starts the automatic measuring process.

The workpiece probe automatically measures four points in succession around the inside wall of the hole. When measurement has been success-fully completed, the VSK "P0 stored" becomes active. The diameter and centre point of the hole are calculated and displayed. The set position of the centre point is stored as the new zero point in the correction target that you have selected, if you have selected "Work offset".

Section 5


Notes:

Measuring workpiece

5.8 Measuring workpiece zero “1 Circular spigot“

The workpiece is located anywhere on the work table and has a circular spigot. You can determine the diameter and centre point of the spigot with four measuring points.




By pressing the VSK 6 “1 Circular spigot” under the function “Meas. workp.” (in operating area “Machine“ and operating mode “JOG“) the following screen will be displayed:


Ø Spigot [mm] Diameter spigot

DZ

[mm] Infeed measurement depth

Contact ang. [Degree] Contact angle


See page 25-26 measure workpiece “Aligning edge“.

5.8.2 Parameters of measure workpiece “1 Circular spigot“

The following parameters of “Set edge” (Section 5.4.2) are used also in “1 Circular spigot”:

[Work offset, G54...G57, X0, Y0] The following parameters are only shown if a 3-D probe is in the spindle:

Section 5


Notes:

Measuring workpiece

5.8.3 Procedure for measuring “1 Circular spigot” manually

1. Insert any tool in the spindle for scratching on

2. In the operating mode “JOG” press the HSK 3 “Meas. workp.”

3. Select the VSK 6 “1 Circular spigot”. The “1 Circular spigot” window opens.


5. Specify the setpoint position (“X0”/”Y0”) of the spigot centre point “P0”

6. Traverse the tool to the first measuring point.

7. Press the "Save P1" softkey. The point is measured and stored.

8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 to measure and store measuring points P2, P3 and P4.


The diameter and centre point of the spigot are calculated and displayed. The set position of the centre point is stored as a new zero point with "Set WO". The tool radius is automatically compensated for in the calculation.

5.8.4 Procedure for measuring “1 Circular spigot” automatically

1. Insert a tool of the type 3-D probe in the spindle.

2. Prepare the measurement like described before (section 5.8.3 Proce-dure for measuring “1 Circular spigot” manually, steps 2 to 5).

3. Move the workpiece probe until it is approximately at the centre of the spigot.

4. In "Ø Spigot", enter the approximate diameter of the spigot. This limits the area for rapid traverse. If no diameter is entered, travel starts from the starting point at measurement feedrate.

5. Insert a value for “DZ” to set the infeed measurement depth.

6. Press "CYCLE START" on the machine control panel. This starts the automatic measuring process.

The tool automatically measures four points in succession around the spigot outside wall. When measurement has been successfully completed, the "P0 stored" softkey becomes active. The diameter and centre point of the spigot are calculated and displayed. The set position of the centre point is stored as the new zero point in the correction target that you have selected.

Section 5


Notes:

Measure tool

6.1 Selecting the function “Measure tool“

The geometries of the machining tool must be taken into consideration when executing a part program. These are stored as tool offset data in the tool list. Each time the tool is called, the control considers the tool off-set data. When programming the part program, you only need to enter the workpiece dimensions from the production drawing. After this, the control-ler independently calculates the individual tool path. You can determine the tool offset data, i.e. the length and radius or di-ameter, either manually or automatically with tool probes.

By pressing the HSK 4 “Meas. tool“ in the operating mode “JOG” under the operating area “Machine” the following window opens:

Measuring a tool manually For manual measurement, move the tool manually to a known reference point to determine the tool length and the radius or diameter. The control then calculates the tool offset data from the position of the tool carrier ref-erence point and the reference point. With the measuring of the tool length either the workpiece or a fixed point in the machines coordinate system, e.g. a load cell or a fixed point in con-junction with a distance meter, can be used as a reference point. The posi-tion of the workpiece is specified during the measurement. The position of the fixed point however must be announced before the measurement. With the determination of the radius or diameter the workpiece always serves as the reference point. Hint: Depending on the setting in a machine data either the radius or the diameter of the tool can be measured. Note: Refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Section 6


Notes:

Measure tool

Measuring a tool automatically (Length and radius or rather diameter) For automatic measurement, you determine the length and radius or di-ameter of the tool with the aid of a tool probe (table contact system). The Sinumerik Operate uses the known positions of the tool holder reference point and tool probe to calculate the tool offset data. Before a toll can be measured automatically, the approximate tool geome-try data (length and radius or diameter) must be entered in the tool list and the probe must be calibrated. Depending on the setting in a machine data, the radius or the diameter of the tool can be measured. You can consider a lateral or longitudinal offset “V” when measuring. If the maximum length of the tool is not at the outer edge of the tool or the maxi-mum width is not at the bottom edge of the tool, you can store this differ-ence in the offset. If measuring shows that the length of the tool diameter is greater than the probe diameter, measurement is automatically performed with a turning spindle rotating in the opposite direction. The tool is then not moved over the probe centre-to-centre, but with the outside edge of the tool above the centre of the probe.



By pressing the VSK 1 ”Length manual” the “Length manual” input mask opens.

(See section 6.3).

By pressing the VSK 2 “Radius manual“ or rather “Diameter manual“ the input mask “Radius manual“ or rather “Diameter manual“ opens.

(See section 6.4).

By pressing the VSK 1 ”Length auto” the “Length auto” input mask opens.

(See section 6.5).

By pressing the VSK 2 “Radius auto“ or rather “Diameter auto“ the input mask “Radius auto“ or rather “Diameter auto“ opens.

(See section 6.6).

By pressing the VSK 1 ”Calibrate probe” the “Calibrate probe” input mask opens.

(See section 6.7).

By pressing the VSK 8 “Back“ you jump back to the “Meas. tool” screen of the Sinumerik Operate.

Section 6


Notes:

Measure tool

6.3 Measure tool “Length manual”

By pressing the HSK 4 “Meas. tool” and the VSK 1 “Length manual“ (in the operating area “Machine“ under the operating mode “JOG”) the following in-put mask opens.



By pressing the VSK 2 “Tool“ the tool list opens.


By pressing the VSK 7 “Set length“ the entered val-ues will be accepted.

By pressing the VSK 8 “Back“ you jump back to the “Measure tool” screen of the Sinumerik Operate.

Section 6


Notes:

Measure tool

6.3.3 Procedure for Measuring tool “Length manual”

1. Load the tool in the spindle you want to measure.

2. In the operating mode “JOG“ press the HSK 4 “Meas. tool”.

3. Press the VSK 1 “Length manual”. The “Length manual” input screen opens.

4. Press the VSK 2 “Tool“. Select a tool from the “Tool list” that opens immediately after pressing the softkey.

5 Press the VSK 1 „In manual“ to switch back with the se-lected tool to the “Length manual” window.

4. Select the cutting edge number “D” and the number of the replacement tool “ST”.

5. Approach the workpiece in the Z direction, scratch it with a turning spindle

6. Enter the set position “Z0” of the workpiece edge.

7. Press the VSK "Set length" softkey.

The tool length is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list. Note: If the tool length should be determined not with the help of a work piece but rather with a load cell, no zero offset may be selected, or the basis ref-erence must be zero.

6.3.2 Parameters of measure tool “Length manual“


T

Tool name Alternatively you can select a tool via the VSK 2 “Tool”.

D Edge number (1 to 9)

ST Replacement tool (01- 99)

Z0 Workpiece edge

Section 6


Notes:

Measure tool

6.4.1 Vertical Softkey bar (VSK)


By pressing the VSK 2 “Tool” the tool list opens.

See module B573 - „Operating area Parameter“.

By pressing the VSK 7 “Set radius“ (or “Set diame-ter.”) all entered values will be accepted.

By pressing the VSK 8 “Back“ you jump back to the “Measure tool” screen of the Sinumerik Operate“.

6.4.2 Parameters measure tool “Radius manual“ or “Diameter

manual”

The following parameters of the function “Length manual” are used also with “Radius manual” and “Diameter manual”:

[T, D, ST]

Beside the before mentioned parameters you find the following additional parameters in the “Radius manual” or “Diameter manual” window:


X0

Workpiece edge

Y0 Workpiece edge

6.4 Measure tool „Radius manual“ or “Diameter manual”

By pressing the HSK 4 “Meas. tool” and the VSK 2 “Radius manual“ or “Diameter manual” (in the oper-ating area “Machine“ and operating mode “JOG”) the following input mask opens.

Section 6


Notes:

Measure tool

6.4.3 Procedure for measuring the tool “radius manual” (or “diameter manual” )

1. Insert the tool you want to measure in the spindle.

2. In the operating mode “JOG“ and operating area “Machine” press the HSK 4 “Meas. tool“.

3. Press the VSK 2 “Radius manual“ ( or “Diameter manual“).

4. Select the cutting edge number “D” and the number of the re-placement tool “ST” of the tool.

5. Approach the workpiece in the X- or Y-direction and perform scratching with the spindle rotating in the opposite direction.

6. Specify the setpoint position “X0” or “Y0” of the workpiece edge.

7. Press the "Set radius" or "Set diameter" softkey.

The tool radius or diameter is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list.

Section 6


Notes:

Measure tool

6.5 Measure tool “Length auto“

By pressing the HSK 4 “Meas. tool” and the VSK 3 “Length auto“ (in the operating area “Machine“ and operating mode “JOG”) the following input mask opens:



By pressing the VSK 2 „Tool“ the tool list opens.


By pressing the VSK 8 “Back“ you switch back to the “Measuring tool” main window.

6.5.2 Parameter for measuring the tool length automatically

The following parameters that are available for “Length manual” are avail-able for “Length auto” too: [T, D, ST] With “Length auto” the following additional parameter is available:


V

[mm] Lateral offset

Section 6


Notes:

Measuring a tool

6.5.3 Procedure for tool measure “length auto”


2. Position the tool near the tool probe, so that you can approach the probe collision free.


4. Press the HSK 3 “Length auto“.

5. Select the cutting edge number “D” and the number of the re-placement tool “ST”.

6. If necessary, enter the lateral offset “V”.

7. Press “CYCLE START“ on the machine control panel (MCP). This starts the automatic measuring process.

The tool length is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list. Note: How the measuring process works exactly depends on the settings of the machine manufacturer.

Section 6


Notes:

Measure tool

6.6 Measure tool “Radius auto” or “Diameter auto”

By pressing the HSK 4 “Meas. tool” and the VSK 2 “Radius auto“ or “Diameter auto” (in the operating area “Machine“ and operating mode “JOG”) the fol-lowing input mask opens:



By pressing the VSK 2 “Tool“ the tool list wil be opened.


By pressing the VSK 8 “Back“ you switch back to the “Meas. Tool” screen.

6.6.2 Parameters of measure tool “Radius auto” or “Diameter auto”

The following parameters that are available for “Length manual” are avail-able for “Radius auto” or “Diameter auto” too: [T, D, ST] With “Radius auto” or “Diameter auto” the following additional parameters are available: Parameter Unit Description

V

[mm] Lateral offset

Section 6


Notes:

6.6.3 Procedure for tool measure “radius auto” or “diameter auto”


2. Position the tool near the tool probe, so that you can approach the probe collision free.


4. Press the VSK 4 “Radius auto“ or “Diameter auto“.

5. Select the cutting edge number “D” and the number of the re-placement tool “ST”.

6. If necessary, enter the lateral offset “V”.

7. Press “CYCLE START“ on the machine control panel. This starts the automatic measuring process.

When you measure the tool radius or diameter, measurement is performed with a spindle rotating in the opposite direction. The tool radius and diameter are calculated automatically and entered in the tool list. Note: How the measuring process works exactly depends on the settings of the machine manufacturer.

Measure tool Section 6


Notes:

6.7 Selecting the function “Calibrate probe”

If you want to measure your tools automatically, you must first determine the position of the tool probe on the machine table with reference to the machine zero. Mechanical tool probes are typically shaped like a cube or a cylindrical disk. Install the tool probe in the working area of the machine (e.g on the machine table) and align it relative to the machining axes. You must use a mill-type calibration tool to calibrate the tool probe. You must enter the length and radius/diameter of the tool in the tool list beforehand. Note: Refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

By pressing the HSK 4 “Meas. tool” and the VSK 6 “Calibrate probe“ (in the operating area “Machine“ and operating mode “JOG”) the “Probe calibration” window opens.

Measure tool Section 6


Notes:



By pressing the VSK 8 “Back“ you switch back to the “Measure tool” window.

6.7.2 Parameters of measure tool “Calibrate probe”

By calibrating the probe the following parameters are displayed:


Length or Length and diame-ter

[mm] [mm]

Automatic determination of the tool length by moving the tool against the probe. Automatic determination of the tool length and diameter by moving the tool against the probe.

6.7.3 procedure for tool measure “Calibrating probe”

1. Move the calibration tool until it is approximately over the centre of the measuring surface of the tool probe.

2. In the operating mode “JOG“ press the HSK 4 “Meas. tool“.

3. Press the VSK 6 “Calibrate probe”.

4. Choose whether you want to calibrate the length or the length and the diameter.

5. Press the “CYCLE START“ key on the machine con-trol panel.

Calibration is automatically executed at the measuring feedrate. The dis-tance measurements between the machine zero and tool probe are calcu-lated and stored in an internal data area.

Measuring a tool Section 6


Notes:

7.1 Selecting the function “Position“

In order to implement simple machining sequences, you can traverse the axes to certain positions in manual mode. Note: The feedrate/rapid traverse override is active during traversing.

By pressing the HSK 6 “Position” in the Operating area “Machine” and operating mode “JOG” the fol-lowing input mask will be shown on the screen:



By pressing the VSK 5 “Rapid” the value of the set machine data for feed rate velocity in JOG is taken over in the parameter “F” (feed).

Hint: The VSK 5 “Rapid” can also be pressed if the input field parameter “F” is not the active input field (highlighted in orange)

By pressing the VSK 8 “Back” you switch back to the main screen of the Sinumerik Operate.

Position Section 7


Notes:

7.3 Parameters of “Position”


F [mm/min] [mm/tooth]

Feed

X Y Z

[mm] Target position of the selected axes [abs/inc]

Note: Several target positions can be entered. B-axis and C-axis are manufacturer specific. Follow the documentation of the machine manufacturer.

SP [Degree] Target angle [abs, inc]

7.4. Procedure for positioning the axes

1. Select the “JOG” operating mode.

2. Press the HSK 6 “Position”.

3. Specify the desired value for the feedrate “F”.

- OR -

3. Press VSK 5 "Rapid". *Rapid tr.* is displayed in the input field “F”.

4. Enter the target position or the target angle for the axis or axes to be traversed.

5. Press the "CYCLE START" button on the machine control panel. The axis is traversed to the specified target position.

Note: If target positions were specified for several axes, the axes are traversed simultaneously.

Position Section 7


Notes:

8.1 Selecting the function “Face milling”

You can use this cycle to face mill any workpiece. A rectangular surface is always machined. By pressing the HSK 7 “Face mill.” in the Operating

area “Machine” and operating mode “JOG” the fol-lowing input mask will be shown on the screen.



By pressing the VSK 1 „Select tool“ you can insert a tool. Select the desired tool in the tool list (e.g FACING_TOOL_D60) with the orange selection cursor and press VSK 1 “In program”

With VSK 2 ”Graphic view” you can switchover be-tween help screen and graphical view.

With VSK 3 "lateral limitation left" you can specify the lateral limitation in “X-” direction.

With VSK 4 "lateral limitation top" you can specify the lateral limitation in “Y+” direction.

With VSK 5 "lateral limitation right" you can specify the lateral limitation in “X+” direction.

With VSK 6 "lateral limitation bottom" you can spec-ify the lateral limitation in “Y-” direction.

Face milling Section 8


Notes:

8.3 Parameters of “Face milling”


T Tool name

D Cutting edge number of the tool.

F [mm/min] [mm/tooth]

Feed

S V

[rpm] [m/min]

Spindle speed or constant cutting speed

Machining The following machining operations can be selected:

Roughing

Finishing

Direction

Same direction of machining

Alternating direction of machining

X0 Y0 Z0

mm

Corner point 1 of surface in X direction (abs) Corner point 1 of surface in Y direction (abs) Height of blank (abs)

X1 Y1 Z1

mm

Corner point 2 of surface in X (abs or inc) Corner point 2 of surface in Y (abs or inc) Height of finished part (abs or inc)

DXY mm %

Max. infeed in the XY plane (dependent on milling cutter diameter) Alternatively you can specify the plane infeed as a %, as a ratio plane infeed (mm) to mill-ing cutter diameter (mm).

DZ mm Max. infeed in Z direction (only for roughing)

UZ mm Finishing allowance, depth

Face milling


By pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel” you can escape the screen “face milling”.

With pressing of VSK 8 ”Accept” the following pro-gram block is generated:

With “CYCLE START“ the cycle “Face milling” will be executed.

Section 8


Notes:

9.1 Selecting the function “Handwheel”

You can traverse the axes in the machine coordinate system (MCS) or in the workpiece coordinate system (WCS) via the handwheel. All axes are provided in the following order for handwheel assignment:

Geometry axes (X, Y, Z)

Channel machine axes (X1, Y1, Z1, C1)

Note: Refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

By pressing the HSK 2.6 “Handwheel” in the ex-tended horizontal softkey bar the following input mask will be shown on the screen.

An input field for the assignment of the axes is offered for every hand-wheel on the machine. The axis-assignment can be made like described in the module B568 - "Basic operations". Besides there is the possibility to assign an axis directly to a handwheel using the corresponding softkey on the VSK.


The number of softkeys for the axis assignment is limited. For the assign-ment of all other axes refer to the module B568 - "Basic operations", Sec-tion 3.2 "Parameter selection". Generally you can switch through all avail-able axes by repeatedly pressing the blue "SELECT"-key on the key-board.


Geometry axes:

By pressing the VSK 1 "X" the X-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel.

By pressing the VSK 2 "Y" the Y-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel.

By pressing the VSK 3 "Z" the Z-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel.

Handwheel Section 9


Notes:

Handwheel


Machine axes

By pressing the VSK 4 "X1" the X1-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel.

By pressing the VSK 5 "Y1" the Y1-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel.

By pressing the VSK 6 "Z1" the Z1-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel.

By pressing VSK 7 "C1" the C1-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel.

By pressing the VSK 8 "Back" the Handwheel win-dow is being closed.

9.3 Handwheel assignment

1. In the operating mode “JOG“ (or “MDA” or “AUTO”) select the operating area “Machine”, then press the HSK 2.6 “Handwheel” in the extended horizontal softkey bar.

2. The “Handwheel” window opens. A field for axis as-signment will be offered for every connected hand-wheel.

3. Place the cursor in the field next to the handwheel with which you wish to assign the axis (e.g. No. 1).

4. Press the corresponding VSK to select the desired axis (e.g. "X").

- OR -

To open the "Axis" selection box using the "INSERT" key on the keyboard, navigate to the desired axis, and press the "INPUT" key. Selecting an axis also activates the handwheel (e.g., "X" is assigned to handwheel no. 1 and is activated immediately).

5. Press the HSK 2.6 "Handwheel" again, or press the VSK 8 "Back", to close the "Handwheel" window.

9.4 Deactivating the handwheel

1. The cursor must be placed on the handwheel whose axis-assignment should be cancelled (e.g. No.1).

2. By pressing the corresponding axis-softkey again the assignment is cancelled.

- OR -

2. Open the input field “Axis” with the “INSERT”-key, navigate to the blank field, and press the yellow "INPUT"-key. The empty value will be accepted. De-activating on of the axes also deactivates the Hand-wheel (e.g. “X” deactivates Handwheel No. 1)

3. Press the HSK 2.6 "Handwheel" again, or press the VSK 8 "Back", to close the "Handwheel" window.

Section 9


Notes:


10.1 Selecting the function “Synchronized actions”

By pressing the HSK 2.7 “Synchronized actions” in the extended horizontal softkey bar in operation area “Machine” under operation mode “JOG” the following input mask will be shown on the screen.

You can display status information for diagnosing synchronized actions in the “Synchronized actions” window. You get a list with all currently active synchronized actions.

In this list the synchronized action programming is displayed in the same form as in the part program.

You can see the status of the synchronized action in the “Status” column.

Waiting

Active

Blocked

Note:

Refer to the machine manufacturer„s documentation for further in formation about the programmed synchronized actions.

Section 10


Notes:

Settings

11.1 Selecting the function “Settings”

You can predefine millimetre or inch as the measuring units for the control unit. The change-over of the measurement units is done for the whole control. All necessary entries are thereby converted automatically into the new measurement units, e.g.:

Positional data

Tool corrections

Zero point offsets

By pressing the HSK 2.8 “Settings” in the extended horizontal softkey bar in operation area “Machine” under operation mode “JOG” the following input mask will be shown on the screen.



By pressing the VSK 5 "Changeover inch" the measuring units are converted from the metric to the imperial (inch) dimension system. New values have to be entered in inches. By pressing this key the key function switches to "Changeover metric".

By pressing the VSK 5 "Changeover metric" the measuring units are converted from the imperial (inch) to the metric dimension system. New values have to be metric. By pressing this key the key function switches to "Changeover inch".

Accept the selection by pressing the VSK 8 “OK” or cancel by pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”.

By pressing the VSK 8 "Back" you switch back to the main screen of the Sinumerik Operate with ex-tended HSK.

Section 11


Notes:

11.4 Parameter setting for manual operation

In the “Settings for manual mode“ window all configurations for manual operation can be done.


Type of feedrate:

G94

G95

[mm/min] [mm/rev]

Axis feedrate/linear feedrate Revolutional feedrate

Setup feedrate:

G94

G95

[mm/min] [mm/rev]

Axis feedrate/linear feedrate Revolutional feedrate

Variable increment Enter the desired increment for axis tra-versal by variable increments

Spindle speed [rpm] Spindle speed in revolutions per minute

After inserting the values in the input fields, press the VSK 8 “Back“ to switch back to the main screen of the Sinumerik Operate in the extended view.

11.3 Measurement units [metric/imperial]

Country specific settings of the measuring units are not displayed in the input masks. In the following table the measuring units metric and imperial are compared with one another. A switchover can be made in the "T,S,M," input mask or by pressing the HSK 2.8 “Settings” in the extended HSK-bar and VSK 5 “Changeover Inch” or “Changeover Metric” as mentioned before.

metric Inch

mm in

mm/tooth in/tooth

mm/min in/min

mm/U in/U

m/min ft/min

Settings Section 11


Section End



Operating mode “MDA” B571

1 Brief description


In this module you learn the different options of the operating mode “MDA” in the operating area “Machine“.


This module describes how a program can be loaded directly from the program manager into the MDA-buffer and how the processing of the program is started. It will be explained how an edited program, created in the working window, is written from the MDA-buffer to any directory on the control unit. You learn how to create a directory and a workpiece file of the type *.WPD (workpiece directory. Furthermore the functions “Program control” and “Handwheel” will be explained.

Content:

Operating mode “MDA“ “Load MDI“ “Save MDI“ Program control Handwheel Synchronized actions


B571

B551

Notes :


Operating mode MDA: Description

This module describes how a program can be loaded directly from the program manager into the MDA-buffer and how the processing of the pro-gram is started. It will be explained how an edited program, cre-ated in the working window, is written from the MDA-buffer to any directory on the control unit. You learn how to create a directory and a work-piece file of the type *.WPD (workpiece directory. Furthermore the functions “Program control” and “Handwheel” will be explained.

Operating mode MDA:

START

Operating mode “MDA“

“Load MDI“

“Save MDI“

Program control

Handwheel


Operating mode MDA: END


Notes:

Operating mode “MDA”

In "MDA" mode (Manual Data Automatic), you can enter G-code com-mands block-by-block and immediately execute them for setting up the machine. You can load an MDA program straight from the Program Manager into the MDA buffer. You may also store programs which were rendered or changed in the MDA operating window into any directory of the program manager.

2.1 Selecting the operating mode “MDA“

The operating mode “MDA“ can be selected as follows:

Press the “MDA”-key on the operator panel (OP). The operating mode “MDA“ will be opened immediately.

- OR -

Press the “MENU SELECT”-key on the operator panel.

Press the VSK 2 “MDA“ in the yellow vertical softkey bar on the right side of the screen and the operating mode “MDA” will be opened immediately.

Now switch to the operating area “Machine” by pressing the “MACHINE” key on the operator panel or on the keyboard or press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator panel and the yellow HSK 1 “Machine“. The following screen opens:

In the operating mode “MDA“ the following softkeys are shown in the hori-zontal and vertical softkey bar of the Sinumerik Operate:

Section 2


Notes:




By pressing the VSK 1.1 “G functions“ the most important G-functions are displayed in a window.

Available auxiliary functions are displayed in a sub-window by pressing the VSK 1.2 "Auxiliary func-tions" at the time of the output.

By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Delete blocks” entered program blocks can be deleted.

By pressing the VSK 1.7 "Act. vls. MCS", the coor-dinate system will be toggled between the machine coordinate system (MCS) and the workpiece coor-dinate system (MCS). Note the machine manufacturer‘s documentation.

By pressing the VSK 1.8 "Forward" on the operator panel (OP) the selection of additional softkeys on the vertical softkey bar 2 is possible

By pressing the VSK 2.2 "All G functions" all G-functions will be shown.

By pressing the VSK 2.6 "Zoom act. val." all actual values are displayed full screen.

By pressing the VSK 2.8 "Back" on the operator panel (OP) the vertical softkey bar switches back to the menu of the VSK 1. The VSK-bar 1 is active again.

Section 2


Notes:


2.3 Horizontal softkey bar 1 and 2


By pressing the HSK 1 “Load MDI” the “Load into MDI” with the program manager window opens.

By pressing the HSK 2 “Save MDI” the “Save from MDI : Select storage location” with the program manager window opens.

By pressing the HSK 4 “Prog. cntrl.“ the “Program control” subwindow opens on the screen.

By pressing the "Extend"-button on the operator panel (OP) more softkeys on the HSK will be avail-able. This symbol on the right of the dialogue line indi-cates that more options on the HSK are available. Press the “Extend”-button on the OP to open the extended HSK. This symbol indicates that you are in the extended softkey bar. Press the “Extend”-button on the operator panel to switch back to the main HSK.

By pressing the HSK 2.6 "Handwheel" the input mask for traversing the axis in machine coordinate system (MCS) or workpiece coordinate system (WCS) will be available. By pressing the HSK 2.7 "Synchr. Action." the screen which shows the current synchronized ac-tions is displayed.

Section 2


Notes:

“Load MDI”

3.1 Selecting the function “Load MDI”

By pressing the HSK1 “Load MDI” the “Load into MDI” window with the Program Manger is displayed as below:



Press the VSK 7 “Cancel“ to close the “Load into MDI” window.

By pressing the VSK 8 “OK” the marked program will be opened after closing the window “Load into MDI” and taken over in the MDI-window. If a program is already in the MDI-buffer, you will be asked to overwrite. Accept with “OK” or refuse with “Cancel”. A program loaded in the MDI-buffer can be edited or can be executed by pressing the “CYCLE START“-button on the MCP

3. 3 Loading a MDI-program

1. Switch to operating mode “MDA“ (see section 2.1).

2. Press the VSK 1 “Load MDA”. The “Load into MDI” Program manger window opens.

3. Mark the program you want to load with the orange cursor-keys.

4 Press the VSK 8 “OK“.

The window closes and the program is ready for machining.

To navigate in the program manager window use the blue cursor-keys The following operation options are available in the vertical softkey bar to the right:

Section 3


Notes:

“Save MDI“

4.1 Selecting the function “Save MDI”

By pressing the HSK2 “Save MDI” the “Save from MDI : Select storage location” window with the Program Manger is displayed as below:

Navigate through the program manager window by means of the blue cursor-keys. The following softkeys are available in the vertical softkey bar.



By pressing the VSK 1 “New directory“ a new di-rectory can be created in the “Local drive” folder. An input window opens where a name can be en-tered for the new directory that is to be created. Create a new directory by pressing the VSK 8 “OK” or abort with pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”. The “New directory”-softkey is not active if you have placed the cursor on or in the “NC data” directory.

By pressing the VSK 3 “Workpiece” a new work-piece of the type WPD (workpiece directory) can be created. The current cursor position determines the location of the folder. An input window opens, where a name can be entered. By pressing “OK” the win-dow “New G-Code program” is being opened. After selecting the file type (Main program: MPF/Subprogram: SPF) and entering the filename, the program is saved from the MDA-Buffer into the cre-ated directory. The “Workpiece”-softkey only be-comes active if the cursor is placed on or in the “Workpieces” folder of the “NC data” section.

Section 4


Notes:

“Save MDI“


By pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel” the “Save from MDI” window will be closed without saving.

By pressing the VSK 8 “OK”, with the cursor on a folder, the “New G code program” window opens. Select the file type (Main program: MPF/Subprogram: SPF) that you wish to create. After in-put of the filename the program will be written from the MDI-buffer to the new created file or the file that is marked with the cursor.

4.3 Saving a MDI-program

1. Select the operating mode “MDA” (see section 2.1)

The “MDI” editor opens.

2. Create the MDI program by entering the G-code commands using the keyboard.

3. Press the VSK 2 "Save MDI”. The "Save from MDA : Select storage location" window opens. It shows you a view of the program manager.

4. Select the drive to which you want to save the MDI program you have created, and place the cursor on the directory in which the program is to be stored.

5. Press the VSK 8 “OK“. Note: When you place the cursor on a folder, a window opens which prompts you to assign a program name. When you place the cursor on a program, you are asked whether the file should be overwritten or not.

7. Enter a name for the program and press the VSK 8 “OK“.

The program will be saved under the specified name in the selected directory.

Section 4


Notes:

Program control

5.1 Selecting the function “Program control“

By pressing the HSK 4 “Prog. cntrl.“ the “Program control” window will be opened, as displayed below.

Navigate with the blue cursor-up and cursor-down through the option fields. To activate or deactivate a “program control” option press the “SELECT”-key on the machine control panel.

The following program control options are available:

Abbreviation/ Program control

Scope

PRT no axis motion

The program is started and executed with auxiliary function outputs and dwell times. In this mode, the axes are not traversed. The programmed axis positions and the auxiliary function outputs are controlled this way.

Note: Program processing without axis motion can also be activated with the function "Dry run feedrate".

DRY Dry run feedrate

The traversing velocities programmed in conjunc-tion with G1, G2, G3, CIP and CT are replaced by a defined dry run feedrate. The dry run feedrate also applies instead of the programmed revolutional feedrate.

Caution: Workpieces should not be machined when "Dry run feedrate" is active, because the altered feedrates might cause the permissible tool cutting rates to be exceeded and the workpiece or machine tool could be damaged.

Section 5


Notes:

Program control

Abbreviation/ Program control

Scope (continuation)

RG0 Reduced rapid trav.

In the rapid traverse mode, the traversing speed of the axes is reduced to the percentage value entered in RG0. (Please refer to chapter 9.1 in module B572)

M01 Programmed stop 1

The processing of the program stops at every block in which supplementary function “M01” is pro-grammed. In this way you can check the already ob-tained result during the processing of a workpiece.

Note: In order to continue executing the program, press the "CYCLE START" key again.

Programmed stop 2 (e.g. M101)

The processing of the program stops at every block in which the "Cycle end" is programmed (e.g. with M101). Note: In order to continue executing the program, press the "CYCLE START" key again. This function must be projected via a machine da-tum. Refer to the machine manufacturer‘s documen-tation.

DRF Handwheel offset

Enables an additional incremental zero offset while processing in automatic operation mode with an electronic handwheel. This function can be used to compensate for tool wear within a programmed block.

SB Individual blocks are configured as follows:

SB 1 - Single block, coarse: The machining stops only after blocks that perform a machine function (exept for cycles).

SB 2 - Data block: The machining stops after each block; also for data blocks (except for cy-cles).

SB 3 - Single block, fine: The machining stops after each machine block (also in cycles).

Select the desired setting using the "SELECT" key.

The activation of the function “Single block” takes place by pressing “SINGLE BLOCK” on the machine control panel.

Skip blocks are skipped during machining. SKP

Section 5


Notes:



By pressing the VSK 8 “Back“ you can switch back to the “Program control” window in “MDA” mode.

5.3 Controlling the program run

1. In the operating mode “MDA” select the HSK 4 „Progr. cntrl.“. The “Program control” window opens.

2. Select the desired program control (see Section 5.1 in this module).

3. Press the VSK 8 “Back” to switch back to the main screen of the Sinumerik Operate in “MDA”-operating mode.

Program control Section 5


Notes:

Handwheel

An input field for the assignment of the axes is offered for every hand-wheel parameterised on the machine. The axis-assignment can be made like described in the module B568 - "Basic operations". Besides there is the possibility to assign an axis directly to a handwheel using the corre-sponding softkey on the VSK.


The number of softkeys for the axis assignment is limited. For the assign-ment of all other axes refer to the module B568 - "Basic operations", Sec-tion 3.2 "Parameter selection". Generally you can switch through all avail-able axes by repeatedly pressing the blue "SELECT"-key on the key-board.


Geometry axes




6.1 Selecting the function “Handwheel“





Section 6


Notes:


Machine axes





By pressing the VSK 8 "Back" you can switch back to the main screen of the Sinumerik Operate with extended HSK-bar.


1. In the operating mode “MDA“ (or “JOG” or “AUTO”) select the operating area “Machine”, then press the HSK 2.6 “Handwheel” in the extended horizontal softkey bar.

2. The “Handwheel” window opens. A field for axis assignment will be offered for every connected handwheel.

3. Place the cursor in the field next to the handwheel with which you wish to assign the axis (e.g. no. 1).

4. Press the corresponding softkey to select the de-sired axis (e.g. "X").

- OR -

To open the "Axis" selection box using the "INSERT" key, navigate to the desired axis, and press the "INPUT" key. Selecting an axis also acti-vates the handwheel (e.g., "X" is assigned to hand-wheel no. 1 and is activated immediately).

5. Press the HSK 2.6 "Handwheel" again - OR - Press the VSK 8 "Back". The "Handwheel" window closes.

Handwheel Section 6


Notes:


Handwheel

1. The cursor must be placed on that handwheel whose axis-assignment should be cancelled.

2. By pressing the corresponding axis-softkey again the assignment is cancelled. -OR- Alternatively with pressing the “INSERT”-key, the selection menu with all available axes can be opened.

3. By using the blue “Cursor-up”- and “Cursor-down”-keys on the keyboard, switch to the empty field on top of the menu and press the yellow "INPUT"-keys on the keyboard. The empty value will be accepted.

The corresponding handwheel is now deactivated.

Section 6


Notes:



By pressing the HSK 2.7 “Synchronized actions” on the extended horizontal Softkey-bar, in the opera-tion area “Machine” in operation mode “MDA” , the following mask will be shown on the screen.




Waiting

Active

Blocked

Note:

Refer to the machine manufacturer‘s documentation for further in formation about the programmed synchronized actions.

Section 7



Operating mode “AUTO” B572

1 Brief description

Objective of the module: In this module you learn the different options of the operating mode "AUTO" in the operating area "Machine".


This module describes, how to overstore technological parameters (for example, auxiliary functions, axis feed, spindle speed, programmable instructions, etc.) for a program run in the main memory of the NCK. It is described among other things, how the execution of a program can be stopped at a specific part of the program run with the function “Program control“ (programmed stop). The differences between the two block search modes (with or without calculation) will be explained in detail as well as the function “Simultaneous recording”. The handwheel assignment and the functions “Settings” and “Synchronized actions” complete this module.

Content: Operating mode “AUTO“ Overstore Program control Block search Simultaneous recording Program correction Handwheel Synchronized actions Settings


B572

B572

Notes :


Operating mode AUTO: Description

This module describes, how to overstore techno-logical parameters (for example, auxiliary functions, axis feed, spindle speed, programmable instructions, etc.) for a program run in the main memory of the NCK. It is described among other things, how the execu-tion of a program can be stopped at a specific part of the program run with the function “Program con-trol“ (programmed stop). The differences between the two block search modes (with or without calculation) will be ex-plained in detail as well as the function “Simultaneous recording”. The handwheel assignment and the functions “Settings” and “Synchronized actions” complete this module.

Operating mode AUTO: START

Operating mode “AUTO“

Overstore

Program control

Block search

Simultaneous recording

Program correction

Handwheel


Operating mode AUTO: END

Settings


Notes:

2.1 Selecting the operating mode “AUTO”

The operating mode “AUTO” can be selected as follows:

Press the “AUTO“ button on the machine control panel (MCP). The operating mode “AUTO” opens directly.

- OR -

Press the button “MENU SELECT“ on the machine control panel.

Press the VSK 1 “AUTO“ in the yellow VSK-bar on the right hand side of the screen to switch directly to the operating mode “AUTO“.

Next, switch to the operating area “Machine” by pressing the “MACHINE”-key on the operator panel or the keyboard else press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator panel and the yellow HSK 1 “Machine“. The following screen opens:

The following softkeys will be shown in the vertical and horizontal softkey bars:

2.2 Vertical softkey bar 1 and 2


By pressing the VSK 1.1 “G functions“ the most important G-functions will be displayed.

By pressing the VSK 1.2 “Auxiliary functions“, available auxiliary functions will be displayed at the time of the output.

By pressing the VSK 1.3 “Basic blocks“ all G-code commands that trigger a function on the machine will be displayed. The display updates both in the test operation and in the actual machining of the workpiece at the machine.

Operating mode “AUTO” Section 2


Notes:


By pressing the VSK 1.4 “Time counter“ the pro-gram run time, the rest of the program run time and the amount of machined workpieces will be dis-played.

Note: Refer to the machine manufacturer‟s docu-mentation.

By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Program levels“ you can display the current program level during the execu-tion of a large program with several subprograms.

By pressing the VSK 1.7 “Act vls. MCS” you can switch over from the machine coordinate system (MCS) to the workpiece coordinate system (WCS).

Note: Refer to the machine manufacturer‟s documenta-tion.

By pressing the VSK 1.8 "Extend" on the operator panel (OP) you switch to the vertical softkey bar 2 with additional softkeys displayed.

By pressing the VSK 2.2 “All G functions” all G-functions will be displayed.

By pressing the VSK 2.6 “Zoom act. val.“ all actual values will be displayed full-screen.

By pressing the VSK 2.8 “Back” on the operator panel you can switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1.

2.2 Horizontal softkey bar 1 and 2 Display area Description

Pressing the HSK 1.2 “Overstore” allows you to overstore technological parameters (for example, auxiliary functions, axis feed, spindle speed, pro-grammable instructions, etc.) for a program run in the main memory of the NCK.

By pressing the HSK 1.4 “Prog. cntrl.” the working window for controlling the program run will be opened.

By pressing the HSK 1.5 “Block search” the block search window opens.

By pressing the HSK 1.7 “Simultaneous re-cording“ you can graphically display the execution of the program on the screen before or during ma-chining of the workpiece, to monitor the result of the programming.



Notes:


By pressing the HSK 1.8 “Prog. corr.“ (program correction) the program editor opens.

By pressing the "Extend"-button on the operator panel you can switch between the normal and the extended horizontal softkey bar. This symbol on the right of the dialogue line indi-cates that more softkeys are available on the ex-tended horizontal softkey bar. This symbol indicates that the extended horizontal softkey bar is shown on the screen. You can switch back to the HSK 1 again by pressing the “Extend”-key.

By pressing the HSK 2.6 "Handwheel" the input mask for assigning axes to all parameterized hand-wheels is displayed.

By pressing the HSK 2.7 "Synchr. Action." the screen which shows the current synchronized ac-tions is displayed.

By pressing the HSK 2.8 "Settings" a window opens up where you can adjust the settings for manual operation on the Sinumerik Operate.



Notes:

3.1 Selecting the Function “Overstore“

By pressing the HSK 1.2 “Overstore“ the “Overstore” window opens (see picture below).



By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Delete blocks” you can delete the blocks you have entered before.

By pressing the VSK 1.8 “Back“ the window is being closed. A change of the operation mode is now pos-sible. Press “CYCLE START“ to continue running the previously selected program.

The program to be corrected has to be in the STOP or RESET mode. In the “Overstore” editor view you can overstore technological parameters (for example, auxiliary functions, axis feed, spindle speed, programmable instructions, etc.) for a program run in the main memory of the NCK. The programs in the part program memory are not changed while using the function “Overstore”. You cannot change the operating mode while you are in overstore mode.

3.3 Procedure for „Overstore“

1. Open a program in the operating mode “AUTO” then press the HSK 1.2 “Overstore”. The “Overstore” window opens.

2. Enter the required data and NC block.

3. Press the “CYCLE START” key. The blocks you have entered are stored. You can observe execution in the "Overstore" win-dow. After the entered blocks have been executed, you can ap-pend blocks again.

4. Press the VSK 8 "Back". The "Overstore" window closes.

5. Press the “CYCLE START” key again. The program selected before overstoring continues to run.

Overstore Section 3


Notes:

4.1 Selecting the function “Program control”

By pressing the HSK 1.4 “Prog. cntrl.“ the “Program control” window opens like displayed below:

Navigation through the option menu takes place by pressing the blue Cursor keys on the keyboard. You can activate or deactivate an option by selecting the entry first and then pressing the blue “SELECT“ key.

The following program control options are selectable:

Abbreviation/Program control

Scope

PRT No axis motion

The program is started and executed with auxiliary function outputs and dwell times. In this mode, the axes are not traversed. The programmed axis positions and the auxiliary function outputs are controlled this way.

Note: Program processing without axis motion can also be activated with the function "Dry run feedrate".

DRY Dry run feedrate

The traversing velocities programmed in conjunction with G1, G2, G3, CIP and CT are replaced by a de-fined dry run feedrate. The dry run feedrate also ap-plies instead of the programmed revolutional feedrate.

Caution: Workpieces must not be machined when "Dry run feedrate" is active because the altered feedrates might cause the permissible tool cutting rates to be exceeded and the workpiece or machine tool could be damaged.



Notes:

Abbreviation/program control

Scope (Continuation)

RG0 Reduced rapid trav.

In the rapid traverse mode, the traversing speed of the axes is reduced to the percentage value entered in RG0. (Please refer to chapter 9.1 in this module)

M01 Programmed stop 1

The processing of the program stops at every block in which supplementary function “M01” is pro-grammed. In this way you can check the already ob-tained result during the processing of a workpiece. Note: In order to continue executing the program, press the "CYCLE START" key again.

Programmed stop 2 (e.g. M101)

The processing of the program stops at every block in which the "Cycle end" is programmed (e.g. with “M101”). Note: In order to continue executing the program, press the "CYCLE START" key again. The display can be changed. Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

DRF Handwheel offset

Enables an additional incremental zero offset while processing in automatic operation mode with an electronic handwheel. This function can be used to compensate for tool wear within a programmed block.

SB

Individual blocks are configured as follows:

SB 1 - Single block, coarse: The program stops only after blocks which perform a machine func-tion.

SB 2 - Data block: The program stops after each block.

SB 3 - Single block, fine: The program stops also in cycles after blocks, which perform a machine function.

Select the desired setting using the "SELECT" key on the keyboard.

The selection of the function “Single block” takes place by pressing the “SINGLE BLOCK”-key on the machine control panel (MCP).

SKP Skipped blocks are skipped during machining.



Notes:

Program control



By pressing the VSK 8 “Back” you return to the win-dow “Program control”.

Section 4

4.3 Controlling the program run

1. In the operating mode “AUTO“ and the operating area “Machine” press the HSK 4 “Prog. cntrl.“. The “Program control” window opens and shows a list of program control options.

2. Select the desired program control (see section 4.1 in this module).

3. Press the VSK 8 “Back” to go back to the main screen of the Sinumerik Operate in the operating mode “AUTO” and operating area “Machine”.

Hint: The orange selection cursor disappears, if a skip block is confirmed with the yellow “INPUT”-key. With the blue “cursor to the left” or “cursor to the right” you return again to the selection mode.


Notes:

5.1 Selecting the function “Block search”

By pressing the HSK 1.5 “Block search” the “block search” window opens as shown below.

If you would only like to perform a certain section of a program on the ma-chine, then you don’t have to start the program from the beginning. You can also start the program from a specified program block. Applications of this function are to stop or interrupt program execution and to specify a target position (e.g. during machining). Determination of search targets per:

a. Comfortable search target definitions (search positions)

Direct specification of the search target by positioning the cursor in the selected program (main program).

Search target via text search.

The search target is the interruption point (main program and subpro-gram). The function is only available if there is an interruption point. Af-ter a program interruption (“CYCLE STOP” or “RESET”), the controller saves the coordinates of the interruption point.

The search target is the higher program level of the interruption point (main program and subprogram). The level can only be changed if it was previously possible to select an interruption point in a subprogram. It is then possible to change the program level up to the main program level and back to the level of the interruption point.

- OR -

Block search Section 5


Notes:

b. Search pointer

Direct entry of the program path in the “Search pointer“ window.

If a search target was found, it is possible to start another search run im-mediately. This can be done many times after every successful search run.

Attention: Pay attention to a collision-free starting position as well as accurate active tools and other technological values. If necessary move the tool to a save starting position. Select the target block considering the selected block search type.

Navigation through the program blocks takes place by using the blue cursor-keys on the keyboard.

The following functions are available in the vertical softkey bar:



By pressing the VSK 1 “Start search“ the search run starts depending on the search mode you have se-lected before. Press the VSK 1 several times, until the found target (z.B. with search text) corresponds to the searched program block.

By pressing the VSK 2 “Blk. sear. mode“ the “Block search mode” window opens. Two different block search modes are selectable:

With calculation:

Without approach: It is used in order to be able to approach a target position in any circumstance (e.g. tool change po-sition). The end position of the target block or the next programmed position is approached using the type of interpolation valid in the target block. Only the axes programmed in the target block are moved.

With approach: It is used to be able to approach the contour in any circumstance. The end position of the block prior to the target block is found with "CYCLE START". The program runs in the same way as in normal program processing.

Block search Section 5


Notes:

Block search


Without calculation:

For a quick search in the main program. Calcula-tions will not be performed during the block search, i.e. the calculation is skipped up to the target block. All settings required for execution have to be programmed from the target block (e.g. feedrate, spindle speed, etc.).

Pressing the VSK 3 “Higher level“ changes the program level to one level higher.

Pressing the VSK 4 “Lower level“ changes the pro-gram level to one level lower.

By pressing the VSK 5 “Search for text“ the “Search” window opens. After entering the search direction in the “Direction” field and the search text in the “Text” field and by pressing the VSK 8 “OK” the search run starts. After a successful search you can search for the same search parameter again, by pressing the VSK 8 “Continue search”. The search can be cancelled by pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”. A new search run with new search pa-rameters can be initiated with the VSK 4 “Search”.

By pressing the VSK 6 “Interrupt point” the pro-gram that was interrupted before, by pressing the “RESET” key, will be executed again.

By pressing the VSK 7 “Search pointer“ you can jump directly to a desired part of the program. The following options are available in a list in the “Search pointer” window:

Program The name of the currently loaded program is automatically entered

Ext. File extension

P Pass counter: If a program section is performed several times, you can enter the number of the pass here at which processing is to be continued

Line Is automatically filled for an interruption point

Section 5


Notes:

Block search

5.3 Starting a block search

1. A desired program is selected and the machining was discontinued with pressing “RESET” or “CYCLE STOP“ or the control unit is generally in RESET state.

2. In the operating mode “AUTO“ and the operating area “Machine” press the HSK 5 “Block search”.

For further steps see below:

Simple search target definition:

Steps 1 and 2 (see above).

3. Place the cursor on a particular program block.

- OR -

Press the VSK 5 "Search for text", select the search direction, enter the search text and confirm with the VSK 8 "OK".

4. Press the VSK 1 “Start search“.

The search starts. Your specified search mode will be taken into ac-count (indicated in the upper blue title bar of the search target window). The current block will be displayed and marked in the "Program" window as soon as the target is found.

5. If the located target (for example, when searching via text) does not correspond to the program block, press the "Start search" softkey again until you find your target.

6. Press the "CYCLE START"-key twice. Processing is continued from the defined position.


Type

N no.: Block number

Label: Jump label

Text: Text string

Subprg.: Subprogram call

Line: Line number

Search target Search target point in the program at which ma-chining is to start

By pressing the VSK 8 “Back” the “Search” window closes.

Section 5


Notes:

Block search

Interruption point as search target:

1. - 2. Steps 1 and 2 (see above).

3. Press the VSK 6 “Interrupt point“ The interruption point is loaded.

4. If the VSK 3 "Higher level" and the VSK 4 "Lower level" are available, use these to change the pro-gram level.

5. Press the VSK 1 "Start search". The search starts. The specified search mode will be taken into ac-count (indicated in the upper blue title bar of the search target window). The search screen closes. The current block will be displayed and marked in the "Program" window as soon as the target is found.

6. Press the "CYCLE START"-key on the machine control panel (MCP) twice. The execution will continue from the interruption point.

Search target via search pointer:

Steps 1 and 2 (see above).

3. Press the VSK 7 “Search pointer”. The “Search pointer” window opens.

4. Enter the full path of the program as well as the subprograms, if required, in the input fields.

5. Press the VSK 1 “Start search”. The search starts. The specified search mode will be taken into ac-count (indicated in the upper blue title bar of the search target window). The search screen closes. The current block will be displayed and marked in the "Program" window as soon as the target is found.

6 Press the "CYCLE START" key on the machine control panel twice. Processing is continued from the defined location.

Section 5


Notes:


6.1 Selecting the function “Simultaneous recording”

Pressing the HSK 1.7 “Simult. Record.“ opens the simultaneous recording window.



By pressing the VSK 1.3 “Top view” the work piece will be shown in a plan view from the top.

By pressing the VSK 1.4 “3D view“ the work piece will be shown in a 3-D view.

By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Further views“ the verti-cal softkey bar 3 opens with options to change to different views of the workpiece (see section 6.3).

Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can graphically dis-play the execution of the program on the screen to monitor the result of the programming. You can replace the programmed feedrate with a dry run feedrate to influence the speed of execution. Simultaneous record can also be turned on, if machining is already run-ning. You can also use simultaneous recording during machining of a workpiece. This helps if the view towards the inside of the cabin is ob-structed by coolant. In each different view of the “Simultaneous recording” window you can adjust the view by using the blue cursor keys and zoom in or out by using the plus (“+”) and minus (“-”) keys on the keyboard. The traversing paths of the tool in the “Simultaneous recording” window are displayed in different colours: red for rapid traverse and green for feed motion. The following softkeys, each representing a different view on the simulated workpiece, are available on the vertical softkey bars.

Section 6


Notes:



By pressing the VSK 1.6 “Details“ the vertical soft-key bar 4 opens (see section 6.4 in this module).

By pressing the VSK 1.7 “Extend” on the operator panel the softkeys of the vertical softkey bar 2 will be shown.

By pressing the VSK 1.8 “Back” you switch back to the main screen of the operating area “Machine” in the operating mode “AUTO”.

By pressing the VSK 2.1 “Show tool path” the ani-mated path display that follows the programmed tool path of the selected program is shown on the screen. Press this softkey again to turn off the func-tion. The traversing paths are shown in two different colours: red colour for rapid traverse and green col-our for feed motion.

By pressing the VSK 2.2 “Delete tool path” all tool paths so far generated, including tool paths gener-ated in the background, are deleted.

By pressing the VSK 2.3 “Blank“ the “Blank input” window opens. Here, the zero offset, the form and the dimensions of the blank can be entered,.

By pressing the VSK 2.8 “Back“ on the operator panel you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1.

Section 6

6.3 Vertical softkey bar 3 (from VSK 1.5 “Further views“)


By pressing the VSK “2 windows“ the screen is split into two different views of the workpiece. The 2-windowed view contains a side view (left-hand win-dow) and a front view (right-hand window) of the workpiece. The viewing direction is always from the front to the cutting surface even if machining is to be performed from behind or from the back side. The active view is shown with a white background. You can switch between both windows by pressing the “NEXT WINDOW” key on the keyboard.

6.4 Vertical softkey bar 4 (from VSK 1.6 “Details“)


By pressing the VSK 4.1 “Autozoom“ the work-piece will be aligned in an optimal way on the screen, so that it fits the whole window.

By pressing the VSK 4.2 “Zoom +“ you zoom in to magnify the graphical representation of the work-piece in the window. Alternatively you can press the plus (“+”) key on the number block of the keyboard.


Notes:



By pressing the VSK 4.3 “Zoom -“ you zoom out of the window to reduce the graphical representation of the workpiece. Alternatively you can press the minus (“-”) key on the number block of the keyboard.

By pressing the VSK 4.4 “Zoom” a zoom window in the shape of a right angled frame is placed on the screen. With the VSK “Zoom +” and the VSK “Zoom -” you can increase or decrease the size of the right an-gled frame and therefore the zoom-factor. Alter-natively you can use the plus (“+”) or minus (“-”) key on the keyboard. The blue cursor keys on the key-board are used to pan the frame on the screen, ad-justing the fragment you wish to magnify. After pressing the VSK 8 “OK” the screen will be zoomed in to the extend of the frame window. You can exit the Zoom function with the Softkey “Cancel”

By pressing the VSK 4.5 “Rotate view” the vertical softkey bar 5 opens (see section 6.5).

By pressing the VSK 4.8 “Back“ on the operator panel you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1.

6.5 Vertical softkey bar 5 (from VSK 4.5 “Rotate view“)


By pressing the VSK 5.1 the workpiece will be turned right around its own vertical centre line.

By pressing the VSK 5.2 the workpiece will be turned left around its own vertical centre line.

By pressing the VSK 5.3 the workpiece will be turned upwards around its own horizontal centre line.

By pressing the VSK 5.4 the workpiece will be turned downwards around its own horizontal centre line.

By pressing the VSK 5.5 the workpiece will be turned left (counter clockwise) around the centre of the screen.

By pressing the VSK 5.6 the workpiece will be turned right (clockwise) around the centre of the screen.

By pressing the VSK 5.8 „Back“ on the operator panel you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 4.

Section 6


Notes:


6.6 Simultaneous recording of a program run

Simultaneous recording before machining of the workpiece

1. Load a program in the operating mode “AUTO”.

2. Press the HSK 1.4 “Prog. cntrl.“ and activate the checkboxes "PRT No axis motion" and "DRY Dry run feedrate". The program is executed without axis movement. The programmed feedrate is replaced by a dry run feedrate.

-OR-

Let the “DRY Dry run feedrate” box unchecked. Simultaneous recording is performed with the pro-grammed feedrate.

3. Press the HSK 7 “Simultan. record“. The “Simultaneous recording” window opens.

4. Press the “CYCLE START” key on the machine con-trol panel (MCP). The execution of the program on the machine is started and displayed graphically on the screen.

5. Press “CYCLE STOP” to stop machining and the HSK 7 "Simultan. record" again to close the “Simultaneous recording” window.

Simultaneous recording during machining of the workpiece

1. Load a program in the operating mode “AUTO”.

2. Press the HSK 7 “Simultan. record“. The “Simultaneous recording” window opens.

3. Press the “CYCLE START”-key on the machine con-trol panel (MCP). The machining of the workpiece is started and graphically displayed on the screen.

4. Press the “CYCLE STOP”-key and the HSK 7 "Simultan. record" again to stop the recording and to close the “Simultaneous recording” window.

Section 6


Notes:

Program correction

7.1 Selecting the function “Program correction”

By pressing the HSK 1.8 “Prog. Corr.“ the program editor window opens for correction of the program. See modules B600 and B604 “Basics of program-ming”.

As soon as a syntax error in the part program is detected by the controller, program execution is interrupted and the syntax error is displayed in the alarm line. Depending on the state of the control, you can make the following correc-tions using the “Program correction” function:

STOP mode: Only program lines that have not yet been executed can be edited.

RESET state: All program lines can be edited Note: The "Program correction" function is only available for part programs in the NC memory, not for external execution (e.g. on USB media).


A precise description of the vertical softkeys can be found in the modules B600 and B604 “Basics of programming”.

Section 7


Notes:

Program correction

7.3 Correcting a program

1. The program to be corrected is in the STOP or RESET mode.

2. Press the HSK 8 “Prog. corr.“. The selected program is opened in the editor. The program pre-processing and the current block are displayed. The current block is also updated in the running program, but not the displayed program section, i.e. the current block moves out of the dis-played program section. If a subprogram is executed, it is not opened auto-matically.

3. Make the necessary corrections.

4. Press the HSK 8 "NC Execute". The system switches back to the "Machine" operat-ing area and selects operating mode "AUTO".

5. Press the “CYCLE START“ key on the machine con-trol panel (MCP). The program execution is resumed. Note: Leaving the program editor via the VSK 2.7 “EXIT“, opens the operating area “Program Manager”.

Section 7


Notes:

Handwheel

An input field for the assignment of the axes is offered for every hand-wheel on the machine. The axis-assignment can be made like described in the module B568 - "Basic operations". Besides there is the possibility to assign an axis directly to a handwheel using the VSK 1 - 8.


The number of softkeys for the axis assignment is limited. For the assign-ment of all other axes refer to the module B568 - "Basic operations", Sec-tion 3.2 "Parameter selection. Generally you can switch through all avail-able axes by repeatedly pressing the blue "SELECT"-key on the key-board.


Geometry axes




8.1 Selecting the function “Handwheel“





Section 8


Notes:


Machine axes:





By pressing the VSK 8 "Back" you can close the window for the “Handwheel”


1. In the operating mode “AUTO“ select the operating area “Machine”, then press the HSK 2.6 “Handwheel” in the extended horizontal softkey bar.

2. The “Handwheel” window opens. A field for axis as-signment will be offered for every connected hand-wheel.

3. Place the cursor in the field next to the handwheel with which you wish to assign the axis (e.g. no. 1).

4. Press the corresponding softkey to select the desired axis (e.g. "X").

- OR -

To open the "Axis" selection box using the "INSERT" key, navigate to the desired axis, and press the "INPUT" key. Selecting an axis also activates the handwheel (e.g., "X" is assigned to handwheel no. 1 and is activated immediately).

5. Press the HSK 2.6 "Handwheel" again.

- OR -

Press the VSK 8 "Back" . The "Handwheel" window closes.


The cursor must be placed on that handwheel whose axis-assignment should be cancelled. By pressing the corresponding axis-softkey again the assignment is cancelled. Alternatively with pressing the “INSERT”-key, the selection menu with all available axes can be opened. By using the blue “cursor-up”- and “cursor-down”-keys on the keyboard, switch to the empty field on top of the menu and press one of the yellow "INPUT"-keys on the keyboard. The empty value will be accepted. The corresponding handwheel is now deactivated.

Handwheel Section 8


Notes:


By pressing the HSK 2.7 “Synchronized actions” the following mask will be shown on the screen:





Waiting

Active

Blocked

Note:

Refer to the machine manufacturer„s documentation for further in formation about the programmed synchronized actions.

Section 9


Notes:

10.1 Selecting the function “Settings”

By pressing the HSK 2.8 “Settings” the following input mask with the settings for automatic mode is shown on the screen.



By pressing the VSK 5 "Changeover inch" the measuring units are converted from the metric to the imperial (inch) dimension system. New values have to be entered in inches. By pressing this key the key function switches to "Changeover metric".

By pressing the VSK 5 "Changeover metric" the measuring units are converted from the imperial (inch) to the metric dimension system. New values have to be metric. By pressing this key the key function switches to "Changeover inch". Accept the selection by pressing the VSK 8 “OK” or cancel by pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”.


Settings Section 10


Notes:

Settings

10.3 Parameters for "Settings for automatic mode"

In the “Settings for automatic mode“ window all configurations for auto-matic operation can be done.


Dry run feedrate

DRY

[mm/ min]

The feedrate defined here replaces the pro-grammed feedrate during execution if you have selected „DRY dry run feedrate“ under program control.

Reduced rapid trav-erse RG0

[%] This value entered here reduces the rapid traverse to the entered percentage value if you have selected “RG0 reduced rapid trav-erse” under program control.

Display result of measurement

Using a MMC command, you can display measurement results in a part program:

When the control reaches the command, it

automatically jumps into the “Machine” oper-ating area and the window with the measure-ment results is displayed.

The window with the measurement results is

opened by pressing the softkey “Measurement result”.

Section 10



Operating area “Parameter” B573

1 Brief description


In this module you learn to use the tool management with the Sinumerik Operate. You learn about the programming philosophy of the adjustable and programmable work offset, the function of the user variables and how to modify the “working area limitation”.


In the tool management area all tool data relevant for machining (e.g., tool length, radius correction, tool wear and magazine configuration) can be viewed and modified.

The tool management contains the following sub-functions:

the tool list

the tool wear

the magazine management

In addition to these sub-functions a machine specific list can be configured by the machine manufac-turer. Refer to the machine manufacturers documentation. In the "Work offset" menu the linear and rotational offsets can be viewed and modified in the settable work offset (WO). The working range in which a tool can proceed, can be restricted in all axes with the function “Working area limitation”. Hereby safety zones can be installed in the workspace, where tool movement is prohibited. This function limits the traversing area of the axes, in addition to the limit switches.

Content: Operating area “Parameter“ Tool list Tool wear Magazine management Zero offset basics Work offset User variable Setting data


B573

B573

Notes :


Operating area Parameter: Description

In the tool management area all tool data relevant for machining (e.g., tool length, radius correction, tool wear and magazine configuration) can be viewed and modified.

The tool management contains the following sub-functions:

the tool list

the tool wear

the magazine management

In addition to these sub-functions a machine spe-cific list can be configured by the machine manu-facturer. Refer to the machine manufacturers documentation. In the "Work offset" menu the linear and rotational offsets can be viewed and modified in the settable work offset (WO). The working range in which a tool can proceed, can be restricted in all axes with the function “Working area limitation”. Hereby safety zones can be installed in the work-space, where tool movement is prohibited. This function limits the traversing area of the axes, in addition to the limit switches.

Operating area Parameter:

START

Operating area

“Parameter“

Tool list

Tool wear

Magazine

management

Zero offset basics

Work offset

User variable

Setting data

Operating area Parameter:

END


Notes:

2.2 Horizontal softkey bar (HSK)


By pressing the HSK 1 “Tool list” the tool list win-dow opens.

See section 3 “Tool list”.

By pressing the HSK 2 “Tool wear“ the tool wear list opens.

See section 4 “Tool wear”.

2.1 Selecting the operating area “Parameter”

In the Operation area “Parameter” you have a choice of selecting between various lists (e.g. Tool list, tool wear, magazine list, offsets, user variables and setting data). For example in the tool management area, all tools and if configured also the magazine locations are being displayed. Both lists display the same tools in the same order. When switching between lists, the position of the cursor on a particular tool in the current screen is carried over to the same tool in a new screen. The lists differ from each other by the displayed parameters and the Softkey functions. Switching between lists is a specific change from one topic to the next.

Tool list: All parameters and functions required to create and set up tools are displayed.

Tool wear: All parameters and functions that are required during opera-tion, e.g. wear and monitoring functions, are listed here.

Magazine: Magazine and magazine location-related parameters and functions for the tools and magazine locations are listed here.

The operating area “Parameter“ can be opened from every operating modes (“JOG”, “MDA”, “AUTO”).

Press the “OFFSET”-key on the keyboard. The operating area “Parameter“ respectively the “Tool list” opens directly.

- OR -

Press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator panel. The yellow horizontal and vertical softkey bar opens.

Then switch to the operating area “Parameter” by pressing the HSK 2 “Parameter” on the operator panel. The operating area “Parameter” opens, with the “Tool list”, “Tool wear”, “Magazine”, “Work offset”, “User variables” and the “Setting data”. These functions are made available in the following described horizontal softkey bar.

Operating area “Parameter“ Section 2


Notes:

3.1 Selecting the “Tool list”

By pressing the HSK 1 “Tool list“ the “Tool list“ window opens. (Note the screen below.)


By pressing the HSK 4 “Magazine“ the Magazine management is opened.

See section 5 “Magazine“.

By pressing the HSK 5 “Work offset“ a list with all Work offsets is opened.

See section 7 “Work offset”.

By pressing the HSK 6 “User variable“ a list with all R variables is opened.

See section 8 “User variable”.

By pressing the HSK 8 “Setting data” a list with all setting data is opened.

See section 9 “Setting data”.

In the tool list all parameters and functions that are required to create and set up the tools are displayed, regardless weather the tools are assigned or not assigned to a magazine location. Each tool is uniquely identified by the location number, the tool name and the replacement tool number. The most common tools and probes for turning, drilling and milling are offered in the tool list. Geometrical and technological tool data can be assigned to each tool type. Depending on the tool type different correction data are necessary.

Tool list Section 3


Notes:

Tool list



By pressing the VSK 1.1 “Tool measure” the “Measuring tool” window opens. (See section 3.7 in this module)

By pressing the VSK 1.2 “New tool” a new tool can be created. This function is only available, if the cursor is positioned on a filed that does not yet has a tool assigned to it. (See section 3.5 in this module)

By pressing the VSK 1.3 “Edges” the vertical soft-key bar for assigning new cutting edges and delet-ing existing cutting edges opens to the right side of the screen. If a tool has several cutting edges each edge gets its own set of correction data. (See section 3.8 in this module)

By pressing the VSK 1.4 “Further data” more infor-mation about a tool will be displayed. This function is only available for tools which have additional in-formation. (See section 3.5, page 17 in this module)

By pressing the VSKs 1.5 ”Unload” or “Load” the actual selected tool wil be unloaded from or loaded to the magazine. Unloaded tools are being dis-played on the bottom of the magazine list. (See section 3.10, page 24 in this module)

By pressing the VSK 1.6 “Delete tool” the selected tool will be deleted from the tool list. (See section 3.9, page 23 in this module)

By pressing the VSK 1.7 “Magazine selection” Softkey multiple times you can jump between buffer location (spindle and gripper), Magazine and NC-memory (unloaded tools) and back to the buffer lo-cation. The cursor is always positioned at the be-ginning of each group. (See section 3.11, page 26 in this module)

By pressing the VSK 1.8 “Extend” on the operator panel the extended vertical softkey bar 2 opens on the right hand side of the screen.

By pressing the VSK 2.1 “Sort” you can sort the tools in the tool list according to the following crite-ria:

Magazine

Name

Type

T-Number

The suitable softkeys are offered in the vertical soft-key bar. (See section 3.12 in this module)

Section 3


Notes:

Tool list


Pressing the VSK 2.2 “Filter” opens the screen to set the filter options. (See section 3.13 in this module)

Pressing the VSK 2.4 „Details“ opens a new softkey bar with the functions

Tool Data

Cutting edge data

Monitoring data

The details of the tool which is selected by the cur-sor position are listed in the screen.

Pressing the VSK 2.8 “Back“ on the operator panel you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1.

Pressing the VSK 3.3 “Tool data” opens the screen “Tool details - all parameters”.

By pressing the VSK 3.5 “Cutting edge data” the cut-ting edge data for the selected edge is being dis-played.

In case of tools with several cutting edges you can switch with VSK 3.1 “Cutting edge +” or VSK 3.2 “Cutting edge - ” between the individual cutting edges.

Section 3


Notes:

Tool list


By pressing the VSK 3.6 “Monitoring data” you can select the monitoring data of the selected tool.

In case of tools with several cutting edges you can switch with VSK 3.1 “Cutting edge +” or VSK 3.2 “Cutting edge - ” between the individual cutting edges.

Alternately you can also navigate with the cursor buttons “cursor left” and “cursor right” between the masks “Tool data”, “Cutting edge data” and “Monitoring data”.

Section 3


Notes:

Tool list

Press the VSK 1 “Favourites” to open the “New tool - favourites” list. In the favourite list the most often used tools are saved as favourites for a fast access.

3.3 Tool parameters

Column header Meaning

Loc.

Magazine/location number

Spindle location as an icon

Location for gripper 1 and 2 as icons: (Applies only when a spindle with dual gripper is used.)

Magazine number:

If more than one magazine is available, first the loca-tion number and then the magazine number is dis-played separated by a slash. E.g.:

Location number 1 in magazine 1

Location number 1 in magazine 2 Tools in the tool list not assigned to a magazine are displayed without a location number at the end of the window. You can manage tools that are not changed auto-matically, by hands (hand tools).

If the orange selection cursor is placed in the type field on a tool icon you can change the tool type by pressing the “SELECT”-key.

Type Tool type

Tools can be created on a free tool position or by pressing the VSK 1.2 “New tool” in the tool list. The following tool windows can be opened by pressing the corresponding vertical softkeys.

Section 3


Notes:

Tool list

Press the VSK 2 “Cutters 100-199” to open the “New tool - milling cutter” list. A list of all available milling cutters opens.

Press the VSK 3 “Drill 200-299” to open the “New tool - drill” list. A list with all available Drilling tools opens.

Press the VSK 5 “Spec.tool 700-900” to open the “New tool – special tools” list. A list with special tools opens.

Press the VSK 7 “Cancel” to reject the tool selection and to jump back to the “Tool list” window in the op-erating area “Parameter”.

Press the VSK 8 “OK“ to accept the selected tool and to jump back to the “Tool list” window in the op-erating area “Parameter”. The selected tool will be loaded into the tool list

Section 3


Notes:

Tool list

Column header Meaning (continuation)

Tool name Name of the tool: To identify a tool you can enter a tool name as text or a T-number. If a new tool is created, tool names are pre-assigned as default.

ST Replacement tool number: (for replacement tool strategy) As default “1” is being entered here. If a new tool with the same name, as a already existing tool, is being created, then the new tool gets the Index “2”. This way it is possible to de-fine a replacement tool.

D Cutting edge number: For tools with multiple cutting edges, each tool re-ceives it’s own correction data field. Up to 9 edges per tool can be managed. The max. Number depends upon the control configuration.

Length Tool length: Geometry length of the tool.

Radius/diameter Tool radius/diameter For every tool, information about the tool radius or diameter can be entered here. The changeover from diameter to radius or vice versa can be set via a machine datum.

Tip angle or Pitch Tip angle for Type 200 - twist drill Type 220 - center drill Type 230 - countersink

Pitch for Type 240 - tap

N Number of teeth for: Type 100 - milling tool Type 110 - ball nose cylindrical die sinking cutter Type 111 - ball nose tapered die-sinking cutter Type 120 - end mill Type 121 - end mill with corner rounding Type 130 - angle head cutter Type 140 - facing tool Type 150 - side mill Type 155 - bevelled cutter Type 156 - bevelled cutter with corner rounding Type 157 - tapered die-sinking cutter Type 160 - drill and thread cutter

Section 3


Notes:

Tool list

3.4 Icons in the toolbar and their meaning

Icons Meaning

Red X

The tool is disabled

Yellow triangle pointing downward

The pre-warning limit has been reached

Yellow triangle pointing upward

The tool is in a special state Place the cursor on the marked tool. A tool tip will provide a brief description

Green frame

The tool is preselected.

Magazine/location number:

Green double arrow

The magazine location is positioned at the change position

Gray double arrow

The magazine location is positioned at the loading position

Red X

The magazine location is disabled

Section 3


Notes:

Tool list

3.5 Additional data

The following tool types require geometry data that is not included in the tool list display.

Tool type Additional parameters

111 Conical ball head cutter

Corner radius

121 End mill with corner rounding

Corner radius

130 Angle head cutter

Geometry length (length X, length Y, length Z) Wear length (Δlength X, Δlength Y, Δlength Z) Adapter length (length X, length Y, length Z) V (direction vector 1 - 6) Vector X, vector Y, vector Z

131 Angle head cutter with corner rounding

Geometry length (length X, length Y, length Z) Corner radius Wear length (Δlength X, Δlength Y, Δlength Z) Adapter length (length X, length Y, length Z) V (direction vector 1 - 6) Vector X, vector Y, vector Z

140 Face milling

External radius Tool angle

155 Bevel cutter

Taper angle

156 Bevel cutter with corner rounding

Corner radius Taper angle

157 Conical die milling cutter

Taper angle

Note: You can use the configuration file to specify the data to be displayed for specific tool types in the "Additional Data" window. The VSK “Further data” is only available for those tool types which will support this function.

Section 3


Notes:

Tool list

3.6 New tool

In the window “New tool - favourites” you can choose a new tool from a list of favourite tools (VSK 1 “Favourites”). If the desired tool type should not be available in the Favourite list, you can simply select a tool from a group of cutting, drilling, turning or special tools by pressing the corre-sponding VSKs 2 - 5.

3.6.1 Selecting the function “New tool”

By pressing the VSK 1.2 “New tool“ the “New tool - favorits“ window opens.

3.6.3 Creating a new tool

1. In the operating mode “JOG“, “MDA“ or “AUTO“ se-lect the operating area “Parameter” by pressing the “MENU SELECT“-key on the keyboard and the HSK 2 “Parameter”.

1. -OR- Alternatively press the “OFFSET”-key on the key-board, to get directly to the tool list.

2. Press the VSK 1 “Tool list” to open the tool man-agement screen. The “Tool list” window opens directly.



For the softkeys see section 3.3.

Section 3


Notes:

Tool list

3. Place the cursor in the tool list at the position where the new tool should be stored. For this, you can se-lect an empty magazine location or the NC tool memory outside of the magazine. You may also place the cursor on an existing tool in the NC tool memory region. Data from the displayed tool will not be overwritten, but the new tool is created below.

4. Press the VSK 1.2 “New tool“ The "New tool - favourites" window opens.

- OR -

5. If you want to create a tool that is not in the “Favourites” list, press the VSK 2 "Cutters 100-199", VSK 3 "Drill 200-299" or the VSK 5 "Spec. tool 700-900" .

The corresponding tool window opens.

6. Select the tool by placing the cursor on the corre-sponding tool type.

7. Press the VSK 8 “OK“ to create the new tool.

The tool is added to the tool list with a predefined name. If the cursor is located on an empty magazine location in the tool list, then the tool is loaded to this magazine location.

Multiple loading points: If you have configured several loading points for a magazine, then the "Select loading point" window appears when a tool is created directly in an empty magazine location or when the "Load" softkey is pressed. Select the required load point and confirm with the VSK 8 "OK" or abort with pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”.

Additional data: If configured proper, the "New tool" window opens after the required tool has been selected and confirmed with the VSK 8 "OK". You can define the following data in this window:

Names

Tool location type

Size of tool (See section 3.4 in this module)

Note: For further information see the commissioning manual of the Sinumerik Operate.

Section 3


Notes:

3.7.3 Measuring a tool

1. Either press the “OFFSET“-key on the keyboard or press “MENU SELECT“ on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 “Parameter” and the HSK 1 “Tool list” to switch to the tool list.

2. Select the active tool that you want to measure in the tool list and press the VSK 1.1 "Tool measure". You jump to the "JOG" operating mode and the tool to be measured is entered in the "T" field in the "Length manual" screen.

3.7 Tool measure

You can measure the tool offset data for the individual tools directly from the tool list.

Note: Tool measurement is only applicable with an active tool.

3.7.1 Selecting the function “Tool measure”

With an active tool selected press the VSK 1.1 “Tool measure” to switch to the “Length manual” window in the operating mode “JOG”.



For the softkeys see module B570 “Operating mode JOG“, section 6.3.

Tool list Section 3


Notes:

3. Select the cutting edge number “D” and the replace-ment tool number “ST”.

4. Approach the workpiece in Z direction, scratch it with a rotating spindle and enter the set position of the workpiece edge in the “Z0” field.

5. Press the VSK 7 "Set length". The tool length is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list.

3.8 Managing cutting edges

In the case of tools with more than one cutting edge, a separate set of off-set data is assigned to each cutting edge. For every tool up to 9 edges can be installed. No gaps in the assignment of edges are allowed. If a tool has 3 cutting edges then edge numbers 1 to 3 have to be assigned. Tool cutting edges that are not required can be deleted.

3.8.1 Selecting the function “Edges”

By pressing the VSK 1.3 “Edges“ the following verti-cal softkey bar opens on the right hand side of the “Tool list”- window.

Tool list Section 3


Notes:

3.8.3 Installing a new cutting edge


2. In the tool list, position the cursor on the tool for which you would like to store more cutting edges. Press the VSK 1.3 “Edges”.

3. Press the VSK1 “New cutting edge”. A new data set is stored in the list. The cutting edge number is incremented by 1 and the offset data is assigned to the values of the cut-ting edge on which the cursor is positioned.

4. Enter the offset data for the new cutting edge.

5. Repeat the steps 3 - 4 if you wish to create more tool edge offset data.



Pressing the VSK 1 “New cutting edge” installs a new cutting edge for a tool in the tool list.

Pressing the VSK 2 “Delete cutting edge” deletes a selected cutting edge of a tool.

3.8.4 Deleting a cutting edge

1. Either press the “OFFSET“-key on the keyboard or press “MENU SELECT“ on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 “Parameter”, then press the HSK 1 “Tool list” to switch to the tool list.

3. In the tool list, position the cursor on the tool for which you would like to delete cutting edges, then press the VSK 1.3 “Edges”.

4. Press the VSK 2 “Delete cut. edge”. The data set is deleted from the list. The first tool cutting edge cannot be deleted.

Tool list Section 3


Notes:

3.9.2 Deleting a tool


2. In the tool list window place the cursor on the tool that you would like to delete. Press the VSK 1.6 “Delete tool“. A safety prompt is displayed asking for confirmation.

3. Press the VSK 8 “OK“ to delete tho tool or press the VSK 7 “Cancel” to abort. The tool is deleted from the tool list. If the tool is in a magazine location, it is unloaded and then deleted.

Several load points If you have configured several loading points for a magazine, then the "Select loading point" window appears after pressing the VSK 6 "Delete tool". Select the required load point and press the VSK 8 "OK" to unload and de-lete the tool.

3.9 Delete tool

To keep the tool list short and clear, unused tools can be deleted from the tool list.

3.9.1 Selecting the function “Delete tool”

Pressing the VSK 1.6 “Delete tool” the “Delete tool” dialogue window opens.

Tool list Section 3


Notes:

Tool list

3.10 Loading or unloading a tool

You can load and unload tools to and from a magazine via the tool list. When a tool is loaded, it is taken to a magazine location. When it is unloaded, it is removed from the magazine and stored in the tool list. When you are loading a tool, the application automatically suggests an empty location. You may also directly specify an empty magazine location. You can unload tools from the magazine that you are not using at present. The Sinumerik Operate then automatically saves the tool data in the tool list in the NC memory outside the magazine. Should you want to use the tool again later, simply load the tool with the tool data into the corresponding magazine location again. Then the same tool data does not have to be entered more than once.

3.10.1 Selecting the function “Load” or “Unload”.

By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Load” the following “Load on ...” window opens. The softkey is only active if the cursor is located on a tool that is not assigned to the magazine.

By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Unload“ the selected tool will be unloaded from the magazine. The softkey is only active if the cursor is placed on a tool that is as-signed to a magazine location.

Section 3


Notes:

Tool list



Press the VSK 4 “Spindle” to load the selected tool to the spindle location.

3.10.3 Loading a tool


2. In the tool list press the VSK 1.5 “Load”. The “Load on ...” window opens. The field “... loc." is reallocated with the first empty place in the magazine.

3. Press the VSK 8 “OK“ to accept the suggested loca-tion number.

- OR -

3. Insert another location number and press the VSK 8 “OK”.

- OR -

3. Press the VSK 4 “Spindle“.

The tool is loaded into the specified magazine loca-tion or spindle.

Several magazines If you have configured several magazines, the "Load on ..." window ap-pears after pressing the VSK 1.5 "Load". If you do not want to use the suggested empty location, then enter your desired magazine and magazine location. Confirm your selection with the VSK 8 "OK". Several loading points If you have configured several loading points for a magazine, then the "Select loading point" window appears after pressing the VSK 1.5 "Load". Select the required loading point and confirm with the VSK 8 "OK".

Section 3


Notes:

3.10.4 Unloading a tool


2. Place the cursor on the tool that you would like to unload from the magazine and press the VSK 1.5 "Unload".

3. Select the required loading point in the "Select load-ing point” window.

4. Confirm the selection with pressing the VSK 8 “OK“ or abort with pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel“.

3.11 Selecting a magazine

You can directly select the buffer memory, the magazine, or the NC mem-ory.

Press the VSK 1.7 “Magazine selection”. If there is only one magazine, you will move from one area to the next (i.e. from the buffer to the magazine, from the magazine to the NC memory and from the NC memory back to the buffer) each time you press the softkey. The cursor is positioned at the beginning of the magazine each time. If there is more than one magazine, the "Magazine selection" window opens. Position the cursor on the desired magazine in this window and press the "Go to" softkey. The cursor jumps directly to the beginning of the specified magazine.

Magazines can be hidden in the magazine list. Uncheck the checkbox alongside the corresponding magazine in the “Magazine selection” window, by pressing the “SELECT”-key on the key-board. Note: The magazine selection behaviour with multiple magazines can be config-ured in different ways. Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Tool list Section 3


Notes:



The tools in the tool list are sorted numerical by their positions in the magazines. Tools with identical magazine location will be sorted by tool type and tools of the same type are sorted depending on their radius value.

The tools are sorted alphabetical by name.

The tools are sorted by tool type. Similar types will be sorted by radius.

The tools are sorted by tool number.

3.12.1 Selecting the function “Sort”

Pressing the VSK 2.1 “Sort“ opens the following soft-keys in the vertical softkey bar.

3.12.3 Sorting tools

1. Press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 “Parameter” and the HSK 1 “Tool list” to switch to the tool list.

The “Tool list” window opens.

2. Press the VSK 2.1 “Sort”. A vertical softkey bar with all available sort criteria opens to the right (see section 3.12.2).

3. I order to sort the tool list depending on the “tool name”, “magazine location”, “tool type” or “T-number” press the corresponding softkey (VSK 1 - 4) (see section 3.12.2).

The tool list will be sorted following the chosen search criteria.

3.12 Sort

With the help of this function “Sort” you can sort and view the tools in the tool list depending on different sorting criteria.

Tool list Section 3


Notes:

3.13 Filter

The filter function allows you to filter-out tools with specific properties in the tool management lists.

3.13.1 Selecting the function tool “Filter”

Pressing the VSK 2.2 “Filter” the “Filter” dialogue window for “the tool list”, “tool wear” and “magazine” list is opened. Following selection window is dis-played.

Filter criteria:

Only display the first cutting edge

Only tools with the cutting edge number D1 are listed.

Only tools that are ready to use

Only tools that are ready to use are listed.

Only tools that have reached the pre-alarm limit

Only tools that have reached the pre-warning limit are displayed.

Only locked tools Only locked tools are displayed.

Note: Multiple selection

You have the option of selecting several criteria. You will receive an appropriate message if conflicting fil-ter options are selected.

Tool list Section 3


Notes:

Tool list

The following shows the filter setting “only tools with pre-warning limit

reached”.

Section 3


Notes:

4.1 Selecting the function “Tool wear“

All parameters and functions that are required during operation are con-tained in the tool wear list. Tools that are in use for long periods are subject to wear. You can meas-ure this wear and enter it in the tool wear list. The Sinumerik Operate then takes this information into account when calculating the tool length or ra-dius compensation. This ensures a consistent level of accuracy during workpiece machining. You can automatically monitor the tools' working times via the workpiece count, tool life or wear. In addition, you can disable tools when you no longer wish to use them. Note: Depending on the control configuration, the input of the tool wear can be additive. Please refer to the machine tool manufacturer documen-tation.

By pressing the HSK 2 “Tool wear“ the “Tool wear” screen input mask opens.



By pressing the VSK 1 “Sort” and “Filter” you can sort and filter the tools in the tool list according to different parameters.( See section 3.12 and 3.13)

By pressing the VSK 6 “Reactivate“ locked tools, and tools that have reached their pre-warning limit can be made operational again. (See section 4.7)

Tool wear Section 4


Notes:

4.3 Parameters for “Tool wear”

Parameter Meaning

Location Magazine/location number: (Only display, see section 3.3 “Tool list”)

Type Tool type: (See section 3.3 “Tool list”)

Tool name Tool name: (See section 3.3 “Tool list”)

ST Replacement tool number: (Only display, see section 3.3 “Tool list”)

D Cutting edge number (Only display, see section 3.3 “Tool list”)

ΔLength Length wear In this field changes for the tool length are entered

ΔRadius Radius wear The Sinumerik Operate checks the entered values whether they exceed an absolute or incremental threshold or not. The incremental threshold is the maximum difference between present wear and new wear. The absolute threshold is the maximum total wear value that can be entered.

Note: Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifica-tions.

T

C

W*

Tool monitoring by tool life: With the tool life T (Time), the service life for tool with machining federate is monitored in minutes.

Tool monitoring by count With the count C, the number of workpieces ma-chined by the tool is counted.

Tool monitoring by wear With wear W, the greatest value in the wear pa-rameters ΔLength X, ΔLength Z, ΔRadius or ΔØ in the wear list is monitored.

* The wear monitoring is configured via a machine data item.

Tool wear Section 4


Notes:

Tool wear

Parameter Meaning (continuation)

Tool life (T) Tool life

Quantity (C) Number of workpieces

Wear (W) Tool wear The wear monitoring is configured via a machine data item. Please refer to the machine manufacturer`s in-structions.

Set val Setpoint value for tool life, workpiece count, or wear.

Prewar limit Prewarning limit: Specification of the tool life, workpiece count or wear at which a warning is displayed.

Note: If the adjusted rest life of the tool, the number of changes or the wear is reached, the tool will be dis-abled. This tool will not be selected for the next tool change. If present, an adequate sister tool will be used in-stead. The monitoring refers in each case to the selected cutting edge. It is possible to reactivate a disabled tool.

D Single tools can also be disabled by hand, if these tools are not in use anymore or if the tools life ran off. (The tool is disabled if the checkbox is activated).

4.4 Icons in the tool wear list and their meaning (See section 3.3, Icons in the tool list, in this module)

4.5 Entering the tool wear or disabling a tool

1. Press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 “Parameter” and the HSK 2 “Tool wear” to switch to the tool wear list.

2. Enter values for length, radius, setpoint, prewarning and tool life.

- OR -

2. Activate the “D”-parameter checkbox for disabling the tool manually.

Section 4


Notes:

Tool wear

4.7 Reactivating a tool

You can replace disabled tools or make them ready for reuse. Prerequisite is, that the monitoring function must be active and a setpoint is stored.

1. Press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 “Parameter” and the HSK 2 “Tool wear” to switch to the tool wear list.

2. Position the cursor on the disabled tool which you would like to reuse.

Press the VSK 6 "Reactivate". The value entered as the setpoint is entered as the new tool life workpiece count. The disabled tool is active again.

Reactivating and positioning When the "Reactivate with positioning" function is configured, the selected tool's magazine location will also be positioned at a loading point. You can exchange the tool.

Reactivation of all monitoring types When the "Reactivation of all monitoring types" function is configured, all the monitoring types set in the NC for a tool are reset during reactivation. Note: Refer to the machine manufacturer„s specifications.

4.6 Sort and Filter

For the functions “Sort” and “Filter” in the tool list refer to the section 3.12 and 3.13 in this module.

Section 4


Notes:

Magazine management

5.1 Selecting the function “Magazine“

Tools are displayed with their magazine-related data in the magazine list. Here, you can take specific actions relating to the magazines and the magazine locations. Individual magazine locations can be location-coded or disabled for existing tools.

By pressing the HSK 4 “Magazine“ the following magazine list will be displayed on the screen.

In the magazine list, all magazine locations are shown. It is indicated whether a magazine location is available, disabled or occupied by a tool. If a magazine location is defect, this location can be disabled. If an oversized tool is inserted, which uses more than a half of the neighbouring magazine locations, then the neighbouring magazine locations will be disabled.



By pressing the VSK 5 “Relocate“ a tool can be transferred from one magazine location to another or, with pressing the VSK 4 “Spindle”, it can be transferred to the spindle. The selected target loca-tion must be confirmed with the VSK 8 “OK” or can aborted with VSK 7 “Cancel”.

By pressing the VSK 6 “Position magazine“ you can position magazine locations directly on the loading point. (See section 5.6)

By pressing the VSK 1.8 “Extend” on the operator panel the extended vertical softkey bar 2 opens with the functions “Sort”, “Filter” and “Details” (see sections 3.12 and 3.13).

Section 5


Notes:

Magazine management

5.3 Parameters for “Magazine”

Parameter Meaning

Loc.

Number of the magazine location: (Only display, see section 3.3 “Tool list“)

Type Tool type: (Only display, see section 3.3 “Tool list“)

Tool name Tool name: (See section 3.3 “Tool list“)

ST Sister tool: (Only display, see section 3.3 “Tool list“)

D Edge number: (Only display, see section 3.3 “Tool list“)

D Magazine location disabled

Z Oversized tool: Marking a tool as oversized. The tool occupies two half locations left, two half locations right, one half lo-cation top and one half location bottom in a magazine. Only tools that are not loaded yet can be marked as oversized.

L Fixed location coding. The tool is fixed to the magazine location.

5.4 Sorting and filtering tools

When you are working with many tools, with large magazines or several magazines, it is useful to display the tools sorted according to different cri-teria. Then you will be able to find a specific tool more easily in the lists. For sorting tools in the magazine see section 3.12 and 3.13 in this module.

Section 5


Notes:

Magazine management

5.5 Relocate

Tools can be directly relocated within magazines to another magazine lo-cation, which means that you do not have to unload tools from the maga-zine in order to load them into a different location. When you are relocating a tool, the application automatically suggests an empty location. You may also directly specify an empty magazine location.

5.5.1 Selecting the function “Relocate”

By pressing the VSK 5 “Relocate” depending on the tool type following window opens.

5.5.2 Relocating a tool

1. Press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 “Parameter” to open the oper-ating area “Parameter”. Alternatively press the “OFFSET”-key on the key-board.

2. Press the HSK 4 “Magazine“. The magazine window opens.

3. Position the cursor on the tool that you wish to relo-cate to a different magazine location.

4. Press the VSK 5 “Relocate”. The “...move from location...to...” window opens. The "... loc." field is initialized with the number of the first empty magazine location.

5. Press the VSK 8 "OK" to relocate the tool to the sug-gested location.

Section 5


Notes:

Magazine management

5.6 Positioning a magazine

You can position magazine locations directly on the loading point.

1. Press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 “Parameter” and the HSK 4 “Magazine”. Alternatively press the “OFFSET”-key on the keyboard.

2. Place the cursor on the magazine location that you want to position onto the load point.

3. Press the VSK 6 "Position magazine".

4. Select a loading point in the input mask. The magazine location is positioned on the loading point.

Several load points If you have configured several loading points for a magazine, then the "Load Point Selection" window appears after pressing the VSK 6 "Position magazine". Select the desired loading point in this window and confirm your selection with the VSK 8 "OK" to position the magazine location at the loading point.

- OR -

5. Enter the location number you require and press the VSK 8 "OK".

- OR -

5. Press the VSK 4 "Spindle" to load a tool into the spindle and press the VSK 8 "OK". The tool is moved to the specified magazine location or the spindle.

Several magazines If you have set up several magazines, then the "...move from magazine... location... to..." window appears after pressing the VSK 5 "Relocate" . Select the desired magazine and location, and confirm your selection with the VSK 8 "OK" to load the tool.

Section 5


Notes:

Zero offset basics

Following reference point approach, the actual value display for the axis coordinates is based on the machine zero (M) of the machine coordinate system (MCS ). The program for machining the workpiece, however, is based on the workpiece zero (W) of the workpiece coordinate system (WCS ). The machine zero and workpiece zero are not necessarily identical. The distance between the machine zero and workpiece vary in accordance with the type of tool and the way it is clamped. This zero offset is taken into account during execution of the program and can be a combi-nation of different offsets. On the Sinumerik Operate, the position actual value display refers to the SZS-coordinate system (settable zero system). The position of the active tool relative to the workpiece zero is displayed. The offsets are added as follows:

M

W WCS

Base offset

Work offset coarse

Tool offset

Work offset fine

Transformation of coordinates

SZS

MCS

Base offset

Zero offsets

The base offset is a zero offset that is always active. If you have not defined a base offset, its value will be zero. You determine the base offset via "Measure workpiece zero” .

See Module B570 - ”Operating mode JOG”, in Sinu-merik Operate section “Set Work offset” and “Measure workpiece zero”. Every zero offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599) con-sists of a coarse offset and a fine offset. You can call the work offsets from any sequence program (coarse and fine offsets are added together). You can save the workpiece zero, for example, in the coarse offset, and then store the offset that occurs when a new workpiece is clamped between the old and the new workpiece zero in the fine offset.

Section 6


Notes:

Zero offset basics

Coordinate transformations:

Fine offsets must be set up by the machine manu-facturer.

Note: Also refer to the machine manufacturer's instruc-tions. You always program coordinate transformations for a specific sequence program.

They are defined by:

Offset

Rotation

Scaling

Mirroring

These transformations can work as “new” or they can work “additive” to the active zero point offset.

Total offset: The total offset is calculated from the sum of all off-sets and coordinate transformations.

Section 6


Notes:

Work offset

The horizontal scroll bar above the horizontal softkey bar indicates that more parameters for the work offset are available. Because of the limited screen area, they are covered by the softkeys of the VSK bar. Move the orange selection cursor, with the help of the blue cursor keys on the key-board to the left to reach the additional parameters.

7.1 Selecting the function “Work offset“

By pressing the HSK 5 “Work offset“. The screen mask of the active work offsets is opened.



By pressing the VSK 2 “Active“ for all installed axis all current active offsets will be displayed, as well as all active system offsets. Fields in the work offset list with a light blue back-ground can not be altered. (See section 7.4 in this module)

By pressing the VSK 3 “Overview” the active off-sets and system offsets are displayed for all set-up axes. Only fields with a white background can be edited. (see section 7.4)

By pressing the VSK 3 “Base“ for all installed axis the channel specific basic work offsets are dis-played in coarse offset and fine offset. The values can be changed directly in the “Work offset - basic” window, (See section 7.5 in this module)

Section 7


Notes:

Work offset


By pressing the VSK 4 “G54...G57“ for all installed axis the work offsets G54 to G57 are displayed in coarse offset and fine offset. The values can be changed directly in the “Work offset - G54...G57” window. (See section 7.6 in this module)

By placing the cursor in an offset field in the work offset list and pressing the VSK 7 “Details“ more information (fine, coarse, scaling, shifting, mirroring) about all installed axis for the selected offset type will be displayed. Inputs for coarse and fine offset, already entered, are taken over or can be entered. The values can be changed directly in the “Work offset - details:...” window. (See section 7.7 in this module)

By pressing the VSK 7 “Details” the following softkeys in the vertical soft-key bar open.

7.3 Vertical softkey bar “Details“


By pressing the VSK 1 “WO +“ within the selected offset type (“Active“, “Base“, “G54...57“) you can change to the next work offset in the work offset list without changing back to the “Work offset” window first.

By pressing the VSK 2 “WO -“ within the selected offset type (“Active“, “Base“, G54...57“) you can change to the previous work offset in the work off-set list without changing back to the “Work offset” window first.

By pressing the VSK 7 “Clear offset“ all entered offsets for the installed axis will be deleted from the list.

By pressing the VSK 8 “Back“ you switch back to the “Work offset” window.

Section 7


Notes:

Work offset

7.4.1 Selecting the function “Active”

By pressing the VSK 2 “Active“ the “Work offset - active” window opens.

7.4 Active work offset

The following work offsets are displayed in the “Work offset - active” win-dow:

Work offsets, for which offsets are included, or for which values are entered

Adjustable work offsets

Total work offset This window is generally used only for monitoring. The availability of the offsets depends on the setting. Please refer to the manufacturer's docu-mentation.

7.5 Work offset overview

In the “Work offset - Overview” window, all active offsets and system off-sets are displayed for all set-up axes. In addition to the offset, the rotation, scaling and mirroring defined using this are also displayed. This window is generally used for monitoring.

Section 7


Notes:

Work offset

7.5.2 Parameters for “Work offset - active”

Parameters Meaning

DRF Display of the handwheel axis offset.

Rotary table ref. Display of additional work offsets programmed with $P_PARTFRAME .

Basic reference Display of additional work offset programmed with $P_SETFRAME. Access to the system offsets is protected via a keyswitch.

Total base WO Displays all effective basic offsets as well as rota-tion, scaling and mirroring. Values can not be changed here.

G500 or G54 - G57

Display of all work offsets activated with G500, G54 - G57, as well as rotation, scaling and mirroring. You cannot edit these values here.

Tool reference Displays the additional work offset programmed with $P_TOOLFRAME..

Workpiece ref. Displays the additional work offset programmed with $P_WPFRAME.

Programmed WO Displays the additional work offset programmed with $P_PFRAME.

Cycle reference Display of all additional work offsets activated via $MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK.

Total WO Display of the active work offset, representing the sum of all work offsets, as well as rotation, scaling and mirroring.

7.5.1 Selection of the function „Work offset - Overview““

By pressing the VSK 2 „Overview“ the window “Work offset - overview” opens.

Section 7


Notes:

Work offset

7.6 Base zero offset

The defined channel-specific and global base offsets, divided into coarse and fine offsets, are displayed for all set-up axes in the "Work offset - ba-sic" window.

7.6.1 Selecting the function “Work offset - basic”

By pressing the VSK 3 “Base“ the “Work offset - ba-sic” window with the channel specific and global basic work offsets opens.

The horizontal scroll bar above the horizontal softkey bar indicates that more parameters for the work offset are available. Because of the limited screen area, they are covered by the softkeys of the vertical softkey bar. Move the orange selection cursor, with the help of the blue cursor keys on the keyboard to the left, to reach the additional parameters.

7.6.2 Displaying and editing base zero offset

1. Press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 “Parameter” to open the op-erating area “Parameter”. Alternatively press the “OFFSET”-key on the keyboard.

2. Press the HSK 5 “Work offset”

3. Press the VSK 3 “Base”. The “Work offset - basic” window opens. With the cursor positioned on the fields with the white back-ground you can edit the values directly in the table.

Caution: The entered offset values are active directly.

Section 7


Notes:

Work offset

7.7 Settable zero offset

All settable offsets, divided into coarse and fine offsets, are displayed in the "Work offset - G54...G57" window. Rotation, scaling and mirroring are displayed.

7.7.1 Selecting the function “Work offset - G54...G57”

By pressing VSK 4 “G54...G57“ the following window opens.

7.7.2 Displaying and editing settable zero offset

1. Press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 “Parameter” to open the op-erating area “Parameter”. Alternatively press the “OFFSET”-key on the keyboard.

2. Press the HSK 5 “Work offset“.

3. Press the VSK 4 “G54…G57“. The “Work offset - G54...G57” window opens.

4. Values can be edited directly in the table.

Note: The settable work offsets must first be selected in the program before they have an impact.

Section 7


Notes:

Work offset

7.8 Details of the work offset

For each work offset, you can display and edit all data for all axes. You can also delete work offsets. For every axis, values for the following data will be displayed:

Coarse and fine offsets

Rotation

Scaling

Mirroring

Notes: Settings for rotation, scaling and mirroring are specified here and can only be changed here.

7.8.1 Selecting the function “Work offset - details:“

By pressing the VSK 7 “Details“ a different work offset win-dow opens, depending on the work offset (Active, Base, G54...G57) selected before:

“Work offset - details: Rotary table ref./Basic reference/Total basic WO/G54 - G55/Tool reference/Workpiece ref./Programmed WO/Cycle reference/Total WO“

“Work offset - details: 1. chan.-sp. Basic WO“

“Work offset - details: G54 - G57“

7.8.2 Displaying details of the work offset

1. Press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator panel and the HSK 2 “Parameter” to open the oper-ating area “Parameter”. Alternatively press the “OFFSET”-key on the keyboard.

2. Press the HSK 5 “Work offset”.

Section 7


Notes:

Work offset

3. Press the VSK "Active", "Base" or "G54…G57". The corresponding window appears.

4. Place the cursor on the desired work offset to view its details.

5. Press the VSK 7 “Details”. A window opens, depending on the selected work offset, e.g. "Work offset - details: G54...G57".

6. Enter changes of values directly into the table.

- OR -

6. Press the VSK 1 “WO +“ or the VSK 2 “WO -“ to select the next or previous offset, respectively, within the selected area ("Active", "Base", "G54 to G57") without having first to switch to the overview window. If you have reached the end of the range (e.g. G57), you switch automatically to the beginning of the range (e.g. G54).

- OR -

6. Press the VSK 7 "Clear offset" to reset all entered values.

7. Press the VSK 8 “Back” to close the window.

Note: The changes become effective immediately in the part program or after pressing the "RESET"-key.

7.9 Measuring the workpiece zero

1. Press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 “Parameter” to open the operating area “Parameter”. Alter-natively press the “OFFSET”-key on the keyboard.

2. Press the HSK 5 “Work offset”

3. Press the VSK 4 ”G54...57”.

4. Select the work offset in which the zero point ist to be saved by placing the cursor in an axis field right beside the corresponding work offset G54-57.

5. Press the VSK 1 “Work Measure”. The operating area “Meas. Workp.” in the operating mode “JOG” opens.

6. Press the VSK 2 “Set edge”, if not already active. The “Set edge” window opens

7. Use the softkeys “X”, ”Y, “Z” to select in which axis direction you want to approach the workpiece first.

7 Select the measuring direction (+ or -) you want to approach the workpiece in. The measuring direction cannot be selected for Z0.

8. In X0, Y0, or Z0, specify the setpoint position of the workpiece edge you are approaching. Traverse the tool up to the workpiece edge.

Press the VSK 7 "Set WO" to measure the workpiece zero.

For more details see module B570 - “Operating mode JOG”, section 5 “Measuring the workpiece zero”.

Section 7


Notes:

User variables

8.1 Selecting the function “User variable”

By pressing the HSK 6 “User variable” the “R vari-ables” window opens like displayed below.

The following variables can be defined:

Arithmetic parameters (“R variables”):

These are channel-specific variables that you can use within a G code program. G code programs can read and write R parameters. These values are retained after the control is switched off.

Global user data (Global GUD) are valid in all programs and can be de-fined as follows:

Keyword DEF

Range of validity NCK

Data type (INT, REAL,….)

Variable names

Value assignment (optional)

Channel-specific user data (“Channel GUD”) can be defined with a dif-ferent value for each channel.

Local user data (LUD) are valid in one program.

Program-global user data (“PUD”) are valid in one program and the called subroutines.

Local user data (“LUD”) defined in the main program can become program-global user data (“PUD”) by setting a machine datum. With that, they are valid in all subprograms, where they can be read and written. The PUD mode of action is depending on the machine settings. Only local and program-global user data can be displayed.

Up to 15 decimal places (including the place after the column) are being evaluated. If a number with more then 15 decimals is being entered, then exponential number format is used (15 places +EXXX).

Section 8


Notes:

User variables



By pressing the VSK 1.1 “R variables“ the “R vari-ables” window opens. The entered values (R0 - R999, depending on a machine datum) are retained after the control is switched off.

By pressing the VSK 1.2 “Global GUD“ a list of ”Global user variables” (UGUD) defined by the user is displayed. Further selection is possible with VSK 1.6 “GUD selection”.

By pressing the VSK 1.3 “Channel GUD” all chan-nel-specific user variables will be displayed in a list. Further selection is possible with VSK 1.6 “GUD selection”.

By pressing VSK 1.4 “Local LUD“ a list with local user data will be displayed.

By pressing the VSK 1.6 “GUD selection”, depend-ing on the softkeys pressed before VSK 1.2 “Global GUD” or VSK 1.3 “Channel GUD” a new vertical softkey will be displayed.

SGUD

MGUD Depending on the control configuration a additional area (UGUD) can be selected. SGUD: Definition of SIEMENS-system applications MGUD: Definitions of machine builder applications. UGUD: Definitions of user applications

By pressing the VSK 1.7 “Search” you can search within all available lists for any user variable by en-tering an arbitrary character string.

By pressing the VSK 1.8 “Extend” a new vertical softkey bar (VSK 2) with different functions opens.

By pressing the VSK 2.1 “Delete” in the extended vertical softkey bar you can delete R variables in a defined range (from... to...) from the “R variables” list. Deleting must be confirmed with the VSK 1.8 OK” or aborted with the “Cancel” Softkey. Alterna-tively you can delete all R variable with the VSK “Delete all”.

By pressing VSK 2.8 “Back“ you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1.

Section 8


Notes:

User variables

8.3 Arithmetic parameters (R variables)

“R variables” (arithmetic parameters) are channel-specific variables that can be used within a G code program. G code programs can read and write “R variables”.

8.3.1 Selecting the function “R variables”

By pressing the VSK 1 “R variables” the following window opens.

8.3.2 Displaying and editing R variables

1. Press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator panel and the yellow HSK 2 ”Parameter” to open the operating area “Parameter”. Alternatively press the “OFFSET”-key on the key-board to switch to the operating area “Parameter” directly.

2. Press the HSK 6 “User variable”.

3. Press the VSK 1.1 “R variables“. The “R variables” window opens

4. Enter the desired “R variable” value in the corre-sponding “R variable” field.

Section 8


Notes:

User variables

8.3.4 Deleting R variables

1 Press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 “Parameter” to open the oper-ating area “Parameter”. Alternatively press the “OFFSET”-key on the keyboard.

2. Press the VSK 8 “Extend”. The vertical softkey bar 2 opens.

3. Press the VSK 2.7 “Delete“.

4. Enter the range in which you want to delete “R vari-ables”. Enter even numbers from the range 0 to 99. Accept the selection by pressing the VSK 8 “OK” or abort by pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”. The selected “R variables” will be deleted.

- OR -

5. Press the VSK 6 “Delete all” to reset all R variables to 0 (zero). Accept your choice by pressing the VSK 8 “OK” or abort by pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”. All “R variables” will be reset to 0 (zero).

8.3.3 Selecting the function “Delete R variables”

After pressing the VSK 2.7 “Delete“ the following “Delete R variables” window opens.

Section 8


Notes:

User variables

8.4 Global user data

“Global GUD” are NC global user data (Global User Data) which remain available after switching the machine off. GUD apply in all programs.

A GUD variable can be defined through:

Keyword DEF

Range of validity NCK

Data type (INT, REAL, ….)

Variable names


Example.: DEF NCK INT COUNTER1 = 10

Note: GUD are defined in files with the extension *.DEF.

The following file names are reserved for this purpose:

File name Description

SGUD.DEF Definitions for system data (reserved)

MGUD.DEF Definitions for machine manufacturer data

UGUD.DEF Definitions for user data

GUD4.DEF - GUD7.DEF

Definitions for user data

8.4.1 Selecting the function “Global GUD“

By pressing the VSK 1.2 “Global GUD“ the following window opens.

Section 8


Notes:

User variables

8.4.1 Displaying and editing global GUD

1. Press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 “Parameter” to open the op-erating area “Parameter”. Alternatively press the “OFFSET”-key on the keyboard, to directly change into the operation area “Parameter”.

2. Press the HSK 5 “User variable“.

3. Press the VSK 1.2 “Global GUD“.

4. The “Global user variables” window opens. A list of the defined “SGUD” variables respectively the data selected by VSK 6 “GUD selection” are dis-played.

-OR -

4. By pressing the VSK 6 "GUD selection" further GUD data are available. Please refer to the manufacturer`s manual.

Section 8


Notes:

8.5.1 Selecting the function “Channel GUD“

After pressing the VSK 1.3 “Channel GUD“ the fol-lowing window opens.

User variables

8.5 Channel specific user data

Like the GUD, channel-specific user data are applicable in all programs for each channel. However, unlike GUD, they have specific values. A channel-specific GUD variable is defined with the following:

Keyword DEF

Range of validity CHAN

Data type

Variables names


Example: DEF CHAN REAL X_POS = 100.5

8.5.2 Displaying and editing channel GUD


2. Press the HSK 5 “User variable”.

3. Press the VSK 3 “Channel GUD“ and the VSK ´6 “GUD selection“ to select the specific GUD area. (See section 7.6 in this module)

Section 8


Notes:

User variables

8.6 Local user data

LUD are only valid in the program or subroutine in which they were de-fined. The control displays the LUD after the start of program processing. The display is available until the end of program processing. A local user variable is defined with the following:

Keyword DEF

Data type

Variable names


8.6.1 Selecting the function “Local LUD“

After pressing the VSK 1.4 “Local LUD“ a window with all present local user variables opens.

8.6.2 Displaying local user data


2. Press the VSK 6 “User variable“.

3. Press the VSK 1.4 “Local LUD“. The window with the local user data opens. If no local user data are defined the window stays blank.

Section 8


Notes:

User variables

8.7 Search

You can search for R variables and user data directly.

8.7.1 Selecting the function “Search”

Pressing the VSK 1.7 “Search” opens the “Find R variables” window.

8.7.2 Searching for R variables and user data.


2. Press the VSK1.1 “R variable”, the VSK 1.2 “Global GUD”, the VSK 1.3 “Channel GUD” or the VSK 1.4 “Locale GUD” to select the list in which you would like to search for user data.

3. Press the VSK 1.7 “Search”. The “Find R variable” or “Find user variable” window opens.

4. Enter the desired search term in the orange marked input field and press the VSK 8 “OK” to accept or press the VSK 7 “Cancel” to abort the search. The cursor is automatically positioned on the R vari-able or user data you are searching for, if they exist.

Section 8


Notes:

Setting data

With the function “Setting data” you have the option to install safety areas for the tool movement and to alter parameters for the spindle speed.

9.1 Selecting the function “Setting data”

By pressing the HSK 8 “Setting data” the “Working area limitation” window will be displayed.



By pressing the VSK 1 “Working area limit.” the working area limitation window opens, where you can install safety zones for the tool movement.

By pressing the VSK 3 “Spindle data” the “Spindles” window opens, where you can set limitations for the Spindle speed.

By pressing the VSK 6 “Data lists” the window “Setting data list” opens where you can select predefined lists of setting dates. Please refer to the machine manufacturer's docu-mentation.

Section 9


Notes:

Setting data

9.3.2 Specifying working area limitations

1. Press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 “Parameter” to open the operating area “Parameter”. Alter-natively press the “OFFSET”-key on the keyboard, to directly change into the operation area “Parameter”.

2. Press the HSK 8 “Setting data”. The “Working area limitation” window opens.

3. Place the cursor in the required field and enter the new values via the numeric keyboard. The upper or lower limit of the protection zone changes according to your inputs.

4. Click the checkbox "active" to activate the protection zone.

9.3 Working area limitation

The "Working area limitation" function can be used to limit the tool trav-erse range in all channel axes (e.g. X1, Y1, Z1, C1, AWZ1, SP2 and Z2). These commands allow you to set up protection zones in the working area which are out of bounds for tool movements. In this way, you are able to restrict the traversing range of the axes in addition to the limit switches. By marking the checkbox “active” the safety area is activated.

9.3.1 Selecting the function “Working area limitation”

Note: You can only make changes in "AUTO" operating mode when in the “RESET” condition. These changes are then immediate. You can make changes in "JOG" operating mode at any time. These changes, however, only become active at the start of a new motion.

By pressing the VSK 1 “Working area limit.” the “Working area limitation” window opens.

Section 9


Notes:

9.4.2 Editing spindle data


2. Press the HSK 8 “Setting data”.

3. Press the VSK 3 “Spindle data” The “Spindles” window opens.

4. If you want to change the spindle speed, place the cursor on the "Maximum", "Minimum", or "Spindle speed limitation at G96" and enter a new value.

9.4 Spindle data

The speed limits set for the spindles that must not be exceeded, are dis-played in the "Spindles" window. You can limit the spindle speeds in the fields "Minimum" and "Maximum" within the limit values defined in the relevant machine data. In the field "Spindle speed limitation for G96", the programmed spindle speed limitation at constant cutting speed is displayed together with the permanently active limitations. A additional limitation of the Spindle speed with constant cutting speed can be entered. This speed limitation, for ex-ample, prevents the spindle from accelerating to the max. spindle speed of the current gear stage (G96) when performing tapping operations or ma-chining very small diameters.

9.4.1 Selecting the function “Spindle data”

By pressing the VSK 3 “Spindle data“ the “Spindles” window opens.

Setting data Section 9



Operating area “Program” B574

1 Brief description

Objective of the module: In this module you learn about the structure of the program editor in the operating area “Program“.

Description of the module: The SINUMERIK Operate provides the opportunity to create NC-programs, and also to integrate comfortably cycles into the program. These programs are created as G-code programs as per DIN 66025, however, elements of the high level language can be included. This module shows the general structure of a G-code programs. The creation of G-code programs is explained in detail in the following modules: B655 “Programming milling”, B656 “Programming contour milling” , B657 “Programming diverse functions” , and B575 “Operating area Program-Manger”.

Content:

Structure of the program editor Options in the editor Screen elements and their meaning


B574

B574

Notes :


Operating area Program: Description

The SINUMERIK Operate provides the opportunity to create NC-programs, and also to integrate com-fortably cycles into the program. These programs are created as G-code programs as per DIN 66025, however, elements of the high level lan-guage can be included. This module shows the general structure of a G-code programs. The creation of G-code programs is explained in detail in the following modules: B655 “Programming milling”, B656 “Programming con-tour milling” , B657 “Programming diverse func-tions” , and B575 “Operating area Program-Manger”.

Operating area Program: START

Structure of the program

editor

Options in the editor

Screen elements and their meaning

Operating area Program:

END


Notes:

Structure of the program editor

2.1 Opening a program

Press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator panel.

The following screen of the Sinumerik Operate will be displayed. This ex-ample shows the part program NC/WKS/DOKU/DIN_DRILLING_1.

Press the HSK 3 “Program“ or the corresponding key on the keyboard. If a program is already loaded into the program edi-tor, because it was processed or edited before, then it opens immediately. If no program was loaded before, then the program manager opens first, giving you the opportunity to select a program.

- OR-

Press the HSK 4 „Program-Manager“ or the corre-sponding key on the keyboard. The program manager window opens with a view to the directory structure of the NC-memory.

If the desired program is not on the NC-memory, then you can switch over to a local drive by pressing the HSK 2 “Local drive” or to an USB device (such as an USB stick, or USB hard drive) by pressing the HSK 3 “USB”.

See module B575 “Operating area Program manager“.

Section 2


Notes:


1

Here you can see the free available main memory on the NC. The memory can not be fully used. If less then 0,1 MB is

available, more memory should be freed by:

deleting unused programs

moving unused programs to another storage (e.g. memory stick).

1

The memory structure shown in the picture below, with the 3 main directo-ries

Part programs

Subprograms

Workpieces

is always available on the NC, and does not have to be created.

2.2 The NC main memory

Directories: Directories are displayed with a folder icon in the program manager

window and have the extension *.DIR (Directory) or *.WPD (work piece directory).

Program/Data: Programs and data are displayed with a document icon.

Used file extensions: *.WPD = Workpiece *.MPF = Main program file *.SPF = Sub program file

If the workpiece directory contains a part program with the same name as the directory, this part program is automatically selected for machining when the workpiece directory is selected. For example, with selecting the workpiece POCKET.WPD the main program POCKET.MPF is selected automatically.

If an INI-file of the same name exists (e.g. POCKET.INI), it is executed once at the start of the part program selected.

Section 2


Notes:


With the blue “cursor up” and the “cursor down” keys the orange cursor is being positioned and you can navigate through the directory tree in the pro-gram manager window.

With the blue “cursor to the right” key you can open a folder or subfolder and select and open a file. In case of further subdirectories you can also extend the directory tree with the “cursor to the right”.

Alternatively you can use the yellow “INPUT” key or the VSK 1.3 “Open”, to load a selected program di-rectly into the program editor window. A double click with the mouse also opens the program file.

The VSK 1.1 “Select” loads a selected program into the main memory of the NC, ready for machining.

With the “cursor to the left” key on the keyboard you can close the selected folders or subfolders and step back one level higher in the directory hierarchy.

2.3 Navigation and program selection

Shown below is a directory tree of the opened NC-memory:

Section 2


Notes:

With the editor you can go through the program more clearly and make necessary changes by editing them.

Note: The maximum record length amounts to 512 characters.

The navigation in the editor window takes place with the blue cursor keys on the keyboard.

NC blocks consist of the following components:

Commands (instructions) as per DIN 66025 (G-code programs)

Elements of the NC high-level language

Shown below is the opened program editor with a part program loaded:

The program editor is described precisely in the module B600 and B604 “Basics of programming“.

If the editing of the program is finished, you can take over all changes in the program code with pressing the HSK 8 “NC Select”. The program is taken over and loaded to the machine. The screens switches to the operating area “Machine”.

If the part program is already selected for machining the HSK 8 “Execute” appears . The screens switches to the operating area “Machine”.

2.4 The program editor

By pressing the yellow HSK 3 “Program“, or the cor-responding key on the keyboard the program editor window opens with the part program selected be-fore, as long as the program was not closed explic-itly with the VSK 2.7 “Exit” after editing.

Structure of the program editor Section 2


Notes:

3.1 Horizontal softkey bar:

In this section the general functions of programming with the SINUMERIK Operate will be described. More information is available in the corresponding modules.

By pressing the HSK 2 “Drill.“ the following cycles for drilling will be called up:

Centering

Drilling and Reaming

Deep hole drilling

Boring

Thread

Positions

Positions repetition

See modules B608 and B609 - “Drilling“.

By pressing the HSK 3 “Mill.“ the following cycles for milling will be called up:

Face milling

Pocket

Multi-edge spigot

Slot

Thread milling

Engraving

See module B615 and B616 - “Milling”.

By pressing the HSK 4 “Cont. mill.“ the following cycles for contour milling will be called up:

Contour

Path milling

Rough drill

Pocket

Pocket residual material

Spigot

Spigot residual material

See module B623 and B624 - “Contour milling“.

Structure of the program editor Section 2


Notes:

By pressing the HSK 7 “Simulation“ the program run and the machining of the workpiece can be simulated. Different views on the simulated workpiece are avail-able:

Top view

3D view

Further views

Details

Program control

Show tool path

Delete tool path

Blank

See module B600 an B604 “Basics of programming”.

Press the HSK 8 "Select" or “Execute” to change over to the operating area “Machine” and to start the machining of the program.


Options in the editor

By pressing HSK 6 “Various“ the following functions will be called up:

Blank

High-Speed-Settings

Subprogram


Section 3


Notes:

Program name/Program path

Program code

Message bar 3

2

1

4.1 The “Current block display” screen

The following screen shows the actual machined program blocks.

4.2 Help menu

By pressing the “HELP“-key on the CNC-keyboard, the help window with the vertical softkey bar opens . If there is a specific help item for the current cursor position the corresponding help screen is shown.

Screen elements and their meaning

1

2

3

Section 4


Notes:

4.3 Vertical softkey bar of the help menu

Orange marked blocks will be taken over into the editor window.

Shows all G-functions.

Opens a search mask for searching for help topics.

Enlarges the help window to full-screen.

Follows a reference to a help topic selected.

Returns to the table of content.

Closes the help window.

If there is no specific help available the following screen is shown:

A message box with the note „No help available for „…“ appears. You can close this box with VSK 8 „OK“ and afterwards you can call a specific help directly below the line „Overview of Editor“.

Screen elements and their meaning Section 4


Notes:



Operating area “Program manager“ B575

1 Brief description


In this module you learn to handle programs and files in the program manager of the Sumerik Oper-ate.


All NC-Programs, which are created with the Sinumerik Operate, are stored in the NC-work memory. These programs can be accessed via the program manager for:

execution

alteration

copying

renaming

deletion

The SINUMERIK Operate provides the following means of data transmission of NC-programs to other storage media depending on the system components:

NC memory

Local drive memory

Its own hard disk (PCU 50.x)

Network connection

USB-storage (stick or drive) Note: The system components are described in the machine manufacturer documentation.

Content:

Selection and function of the program manager

Storage medium “NC”

Storage medium “Local drive”

Storage medium “USB” drive


B575

B575

Notes :


Operating area Program Manager:

START

Selection and function of the

program manager

Storage

medium “NC”

Storage me-dium “Local

drive”

Storage me-dium “USB”

drive

Operating area Program Manager:

END

Operating area Program Manager: Description

All NC-Programs, which are created with the Sinu-merik Operate, are stored in the NC-work mem-ory. These programs can be accessed via the program manager for:

execution

alteration

copying

renaming

deletion

The SINUMERIK Operate provides the following means of data transmission of NC-programs to other storage media depending on the system components:

Its own hard disk (only with 840D sl and PCU 50.x)

V.24-interface (with PCU 20 and PCU 50.2)

Floppy disk drive (only PCU 20 and PCU 50.2)

PCMCIA Card (only PCU 20)

Network connection

USB-storage (stick or drive) Note: The system components are described in the ma-chine manufacturer documentation.


Notes:

Selection and functions of the program manager

2.1 Selecting the function „Program manager“

The program manager can be selected as follows:


The following horizontal softkey bar of HMI sl will be displayed:

Press the HSK 4 “Program manager“ to open the program manager window.

- OR -

Press the “PROGRAM MANAGER“-key on the CNC-keyboard to open the program manager window directly.

The following functions and softkeys will be available in the horizontal soft-key bar of the Sinumerik Operate.

2.2 Horizontal softkey bar


By pressing the HSK 1 “NC“ all directories, folders and files of the NC/Hard disc will be displayed in a directory tree view in the program manager window.

By pressing the HSK 2 “Local drive” all programs and directories on an allocated network drive or on an allocated user memory on a CF-Card at the NCU will be displayed. Prerequisite for this function is that the "Additional 256 MB HMI user memory on CF card of NCU" option is activated. For larger CF-cards also more than 256 MB memory can be en-abled.

By pressing the HSK 3 “USB“ all programs and di-rectories on an USB drive will be displayed in a di-rectory tree view in the program manager window. Programs created on an external PC can be copied to an USB drive and transferred to the NC via the USB interface where they can be processed further. Direct processing from the USB flash drive is not recommended. The text on the Softkey e.g “USB” can also be replaced by a drive letter e.g. “G”.

Note: Refer to the documentation of the machine manufacturer.

Section 2


Notes:

The complete NC-memory is displayed along with all workpieces, the main programs and subroutines. The directories and programs are listed with the following information: (For navigation in the directory structure refer to module B574 “Operating area Program”, Section 2.3)

Name

The name can contain up to 28 characters (24 characters for the name + dot + 3-character extension, e.g. MPF). Permissible characters in-clude all upper-case letters (without accents), numbers, and under-scores.

Type

Directory/ Programs

Size The size of files of the selected directory is displayed in byte.

Date/Time

Date and time of file creation or last change

3.1 Selecting the function „NC“

By pressing the HSK 1 “NC“ the program manager opens .


*.WPD Directory (Workpiece Directory) *.MPF Program (Main program File) *.SPF Subprogram (Subprogram File) *.JOB Job list (Job list) *.TOA Tool data (Tool Offset Active) *.TMA Magazine (Tool/Magazine data) *.UFR Zero points (User Frame) *.RPA R-Parameter (R-Parameter Active) *.GUD Definitions (Global User Data) *.SEA Setting data (Setting data) *.PRO Protection zone (Protection zones) *.CEC Sag (Sag/angularity) *.INI Initialization (Initializing Data) program

Section 3


Notes:

3.2 Vertical softkey bar 1


By pressing the VSK 1.1 “Select“ you can select a program and change over to the operating area “Machine” in order to start machining the selected program.

By pressing the VSK 1.2 “New“ you can create a new directory. In the selected directory you can cre-ate a new ShopMill- or a programGUIDE-program . (See section 3.4 in this module)

By pressing the VSK 1.3 “Open“ the selected pro-gram (marked with an orange cursor) will be opened.

Alternatively you can also press the yellow “INPUT”-key on the keyboard or the blue “cursor to the right”-key to open a program.

By pressing the VSK 1.4 “Mark“ several programs or directories can be marked for copying or cutting. (See section 3.5 in this module)

By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Copy” one or several pro-grams or directories can be copied. (See section 3.6 in this module)

By pressing the VSK 1.6 “Paste” the copied pro-gram(s) or directorie(s) are inserted into the se-lected place in the directory tree of the NC, of a lo-cal drive or an USB drive. (See section 3.6 in this module)

By pressing the VSK 1.7 “Cut“ one to several pro-grams or directories can be cut out and inserted somewhere else on a location in the directory tree of the NC, a local drive or on an external USB drive. (See section 3.7 in this module)

By pressing the VSK 8 “Extend” the extended verti-cal softkey bar 2 with new functions will be dis-played.


Note: Files can not be copied under the same name into the same directory. The files are to be renamed.

Section 3


Notes:

3.3 Vertical softkey bar 2


By pressing the VSK 2.1 “Archive” a new vertical softkey bar is opened (see section 3.10 “Archives”)

By pressing the VSK 2.2 “Preview window“ a sub window opens below the file browser window, with a preview of the program code of the selected pro-gram (see picture in section 3.5).

By pressing the VSK 2.6 “Properties“ the “Properties of ...” input mask opens where you can:

View program path and modify the program name.

View the time and date of creation.

View the time and date of last changing of the program or folder.

User rights for execution, writing, listing and reading of files and folders.

(See section 3.11 “Properties“)

By pressing the VSK 2.7 “Delete“ the program or folder marked with the cursor will be deleted. (See section 3.8)

By pressing the VSK 2.8 “Back“ on the operator panel (OP) you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1.

Storage medium “NC” Section 3


Notes:


3.4 Starting a new NC-program

Press the VSK 1.2 “New“ to start a new G-code program or workpiece. Depending on the cursor position the following input masks open.

If the cursor is placed on the folder for part programs or subprograms, then a new G-code program of the type “*.MPF” (for part programs) or “*.SPF” (for subprograms) is created by pressing the VSK 1.2 “New”. In the name field of the input mask, a name for the program with a maxi-mum of 28 characters (name + point + extension) has to be entered.

Cursor is positioned on the directory (DIR): With the VSK 2.2 “Workpiece” you can create a new Workpiece directory (WPD).

Cursor is positioned on or in the workpiece directory (WPD):

Press the VSK 2.3 “ShopMill” to create a new sequential program.

Press the VSK 2.4 “programGUIDE G-code” to create a new G code program. In this case you select between a main program (MPF) or a subprogram (SPF).

Section 3


Notes:




By pressing the VSK 2 “Workpiece“ you can create a new workpiece of the type *.WPD (Workpiece di-rectory).

The current cursor position determines the folder where the workpiece is created.

The “New workpiece” window opens.

Note: The softkey is only available if the HSK 1 “NC“ was selected before.

By pressing the VSK 2.3 “ShopMill” a new sequen-tial program will be created.

By pressing the VSK 2.4 “programGUIDE G code”, a new main program or subprogram will be created, depending on the program type selected in the in-put mask.

By pressing the VSK 2.6 “Any“ an arbitrary pro-gram depending on the file type can be created (see the picture above).

By pressing the VSK 2.7 “Cancel“ the actual selec-tion will be discarded and the window closed.

By pressing the VSK 2.8 “OK“ or pressing the “INPUT”-key on the keyboard the entered values or selection made will be accepted and the window closed.

You can create a program of any type in every directory or subdirec-tory by pressing the VSK 5 “Any”. However in the area “local drive” and “USB” this does not apply. Only in the area “NC” you can create a program of different types (see the type list below).

After pressing the VSK 1.2 “New” the following functions in the vertical softkey bar are available.

Section 3


Notes:


3.4.2 Parameters for “New workpiece“

Parameter Meaning

Type:

WPD

Program type:

Workpiece directory Program name: The program name can only consist of a maximum number of 28 characters (Name + dot + 3-character extension, e.g. *.WPD). Permissible characters include all upper-case letters (without accents), numbers, and underscores (_).

Name

3.4.3 Parameters for „New G code program“

Parameter Meaning

Type:

MPF

SPF

Program type:

Program (Main program file)

Subprogram (Subprogram file)

Name Program name (see section 3.4.2 above)

3.4.4 Parameters for “Any new program“

Meaning Parameter

Template If templates are available, they are shown and select-able.

Type:

JOB

TOA

TMA

UFR

RPA

GUD

SEA

PRO

CEC

INI

Program type:

Job list

Tool data

Magazine assignment

Zero points

R-Variable

Definitions

Setting data

Protection zones

Sag compensation

Initialization program

Name Program name (see section 3.4.2)

Section 3


Notes:


3.5 Marking directories / NC-programs

First open the desired directory in the program manager, like described in sections 2.1 and 3.1.

1.

Place the cursor with the blue “cursor down”-key on the first program or folder that you want to mark.

2. Press the VSK 4 “Mark“.

The program or directory selected with the orange cursor is marked.

3. Mark more NC-programs or directories by pressing the blue “cursor down”-key. All selected files or directories are marked grey.

Thereafter, the marked NC-programs can stored to the clipboard of the

PCU by pressing the VSK 5 “Copy” or the VSK 7 “Cut” .

The programs stored to the clipboard can then be:

Copied in a different directory or to a different storage device

Deleted from a directory (cut) and pasted into a different directory or storage device.

Tip 1:

To shortcut the marking process place the cursor on the first program or directory you want to copy. Now press the “SHIFT”-key on the keyboard, hold it pressed and move the cursor with the blue “cursor down” key to the last program or directory you want to copy. Release the “SHIFT”-key. The files are now marked.

Tip 2:

If you only want to mark a single program or directory place the cursor on the file and press the blue “SELECT”-key on the keyboard. The single file is now selected. Go on with copying, cutting or deleting, like described next.

Section 3


Notes:


3.6 Copying and pasting directories / NC- programs

First open the desired directory in the program manager, like described in section 2.1 and 3.1 in this module.

1. Move the cursor with the blue cursor keys to the directory or file which you want to copy. If you want to copy more then one pro-gram or directory, mark them first with the VSK 4 “Mark” (see section 3.5).

2. Press the VSK 5 “Copy“.

3. If the program is to be copied into another directory on the NC, move the cursor with the “cursor to the left”-key to the next higher level of the directory tree.

4. Select the new directory where you want to copy the data with the “cursor up” and “cursor down”-key and open the directory by pressing the “cursor to the right” or the yellow “INPUT”-key on the keyboard.

5. Alternatively you can select another storage medium e.g. local drive or USB drive on the horizontal softkey bar.

6. By pressing the VSK 6 “Paste“ the program or directory can be inserted into the selected location. Accept with pressing the VSK 8 “OK” or abort with pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”. The original file remains.

Tip 3: To shortcut the copying process place the cursor on the program or directory you want to copy and press the CTRL + C keys on the keyboard at the same time. In order to paste the file to another location move the cursor to that lo-cation and press CTRL + V at the same time.

3.7 Cutting out directories / NC-programs

First open the desired directory in the program manager, like described in section 2.1 and 3.1 in this module.

1. Move the cursor with the blue cursor keys to the directory or file which you want to cut out. If you want to cut out more then one program or directory, mark them first with the VSK 4 “Mark” (see section 3.5).

2. Press the VSK 7 “Cut“. In the message line the message “1 element has been cut. It can now be pasted” will be displayed.

3. If the program or directory is to be moved to another directory on the NC, move the cursor with the “cursor to the left”-key to the next higher level of the directory tree.

4. Select the new directory with the “cursor up” and “cursor down”-key where you want to insert the data and open the direc-tory by pressing the “cursor to the right” or the yellow “INPUT”-key on the keyboard.

5. Alternatively you can select another storage medium (e.g. USB stick) on the horizontal softkey bar.

Tip 4:

To shortcut the cutting out of a program or directory place the cursor on the

selected file and press the CTRL + X keys at the same time.

Section 3


Notes:


3.8 Deleting directories / NC-programs

1. Move the cursor with the blue cursor keys to the directory or file which you want to copy. If you want to copy more then one pro-gram or directory, mark them first with the VSK 4 “Mark” (see section 3.5).

2. Press the VSK 2.7 “Delete“ in the extended vertical softkey bar 2. Accept the deletion process with pressing the VSK 8 “OK” or abort with pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”. The selected program or directory will be deleted.

6. Press the VSK 6 “Paste“ to insert the clipped data to the direc-tory or storage location of your choice. Accept your selection by pressing the VSK 8 “OK” or abort with pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”. The source file or directory will be deleted.

3.9 Opening a preview window

1. Press the VSK 2.2 “Preview window” in the extended VSK-bar. The preview sub window opens directly below the program man-ager window.

2. Use the blue cursor keys to navigate to the program you want to preview. The program code of the selected program is now dis-played in the preview window.

3. To deselect the function press the VSK 2.2 “Preview window” again. The preview window disappears.

Note: You cannot edit program code in the “preview window”.

Tip 5: Press the “NEXT WINDOW“-key on the keyboard to activate the pre-view window. Now you can navigate freely through the program code by us-ing the blue cursor keys.

Tip 6: The preview window stays active, even if you switch back to the verti-cal softkey bar 1, in order to copy or cut a program or directory.

Section 3


Notes:

3.10 Generating archive files of programs and directories


Pressing the VSK 2.1 “Archive” in the extended VSK-bar, will open the next vertical softkey bar.

After pressing the VSK 3.1 “Generate archive” the following input mask appears to select the storage location.

With the VSK 3.7 “Back” you can go back to the pre-vious vertical softkey bar.

Afterwards the storage location is selected the next mask appears to enter the name of the archive file.

Pressing the VSK 4.2 “New directory” will open an input mask “New directory”, where you can define a new directory at the selected cursor position.

Pressing the VSK 4.7 “Cancel” will abort the gener-ating of archive files and the first vertical softkey bar is selected.

Pressing the VSK 4.0 “OK” will start generating the archive file.



Notes:

3.11 Properties of programs and directories

By pressing the VSK 2.6 “Properties” in the ex-tended vertical softkey bar depending on the cursor position and the selected program (here TEST.MPF) the “properties of ....”-window with security options for the selected program or directory opens.

Note: You can change the program name and the rights.

Parameters Meaning

Path and name: Program path and Program name; The program with the name “TEST1.MPF” is located in the folder NC/Workpieces/DOKU.

Created: Date and time of creation: On the right side of the field “Created”: Date and time of creation are displayed here.

Changed: Date and time change: On the right side of the field “Changed”: Date and time since the last edit of the program are displayed.

Rights:

Protection level 1

Protection level 2

Protection level 3

Protection level 4

Protection level 5

Protection level 6

Protection level 7

User rights for executing, writing, listing and reading of a program or directory. 7 protection levels are possible (level 1 highest pro-tection level, level 7 the lowest). Manufacturer Protected by password

Service Protected by password

User Protected by password

Programmer Key switch 3

Qualified worker Key switch 2

Skilled worker Key switch 1

Semi skilled worker Key switch 0



Notes:

A complete listing of all folders and files of the local drive is shown in the program manager window. For a description of the information of name, type, length and date/time displayed in this window, see section 3.1.

4.1 Selecting the function “Local drive“

By pressing the HSK 2 “Local drive“ the program manager shows the directory structure of the local drive.


The full functionality available under the NC program manager window is available by pressing the HSK 2 “local drive” or HSK 3 “USB” (see sec-tion 3 in this module). Additional, here you can create a new directory by pressing the VSK 1 “Directory”.

By pressing the VSK 1 “Directory” the “New direc-tory” input mask opens where you can create a new directory on the local drive. Enter a name for the new directory and accept with pressing the VSK 8 “OK”, or abort with the VSK 7 “Cancel”.



Notes:


The full functionality available under the NC program manager window is available by pressing the HSK 2 “local drive” or HSK 3 “USB” (see sec-tion 3 in this module). Additional, here you can create a new directory by pressing the VSK 1 “Directory”.

By pressing the VSK 1 “Directory” the “New direc-tory” input mask opens where you can create a new directory on the USB drive. Enter a name for the new directory and accept with pressing the VSK 8 “OK”, or abort with the VSK 7 “Cancel”.

A complete listing of all folders and files of the USB drive is shown in the program manager window. For a description of the information displayed in this window, see section 3.1.

5.1 Selecting the function “USB“

By pressing the HSK 3 “USB“ the following direc-tory tree of the USB drive is displayed.

Storage medium “USB” drive Section 5



Operating area “Diagnostics” B576

1 Brief description

Objectives of the module:

With this module you learn to recognize and understand the alarms and messages that can occur during the operation of the machine. Furthermore you learn to correct the problems indicated by alarm messages.


Faulty states which can occur during operation are shown in an alarm list on the Sinumerik Operate. If necessary the operation is interrupted, depending on the kind of error. The operator can acknowl-edge alarms or delete them. Messages give hints to certain behaviour patterns of cycles and to the machining progress. Generally they are displayed during a processing stage or at the end of a cycle. All present alarms and messages are shown in a sequential order of appearance in a alarm protocol.

Content:

Selection and function of the operating area “Diagnostics”

Displaying and handling alarms

Displaying messages

Alarm log


B576

B576

Notes :


Operating area Diagnostics:

START


Displaying and handling

alarms

Displaying messages

Alarm log

Operating area Diagnostics:

END

Operating area Diagnostics: Description

Faulty states which can occur during operation are shown in an alarm list on the Sinumerik Operate. If necessary the operation is interrupted, depend-ing on the kind of error. The operator can acknowl-edge alarms or delete them. Messages give hints to certain behaviour patterns of cycles and to the machining progress. Generally they are displayed during a processing stage or at the end of a cycle. All present alarms and messages are shown in a sequential order of appearance in a alarm proto-col.


Notes:


2.1 Selecting the operating area “Diagnostics“

The operating area “Diagnostics” can be selected as follows:

Press the “ALARM”-key on the CNC-Keyboard. The operating area “Diagnostics” opens immediately.

- OR -

Press the “MENU SELECT”-key on the CNC-keyboard.

The following horizontal softkey bar opens on the Sinumerik Operate.

Press the HSK 5 “Diagnostics“ to open the operat-ing area “Diagnostics”.

The following softkeys and functions are available in the horizontal soft-key bar of the operating area “Diagnostics“.

2.2 Horizontal softkey bar 1 (HSK)


By pressing the HSK 1.1 “Alarm list“ the “Alarms”-window opens.

See section 3 “Alarm list”.

By pressing the HSK 1.2 “Messages“ the “Messages” -window opens and PLC or program massages are being displayed.

See section 4 “Messages”.

By pressing the HSK 1.3 „Alarm log“ a protocol list with all alarms and messages opened so far, are being displayed.

See section 5 “Alarm log“.

By pressing the HSK 1.4 “NC/PLC variab.“ a win-dow opens where you can observe and modify PLC memory locations and NC system variables.

This function is described in the commissioning manual of the Sinumerik Operate.

By pressing the HSK 1.6 “Remote diag.“ a window opens where you can make the settings for remote diagnostics (RCS).


Section 2


Notes:


2.3 Horizontal softkey bar 2 (HSK)


By pressing the HSK 2.1 “BUS TCP/IP“ in the ex-tended horizontal softkey bar, the profibus status for diagnostic purposes during the configuration or when errors occur will be displayed.


By pressing the HSK 2.2 “Axis diag.“ in the ex-tended horizontal softkey bar the “Service over-view”-window opens.


By pressing the HSK 2.3 “SI diag.” in the extended horizontal softkey bar the “Safety integrated status”-window opens.


By pressing the HSK 2.7 “System utiliz.” in the ex-tended horizontal softkey bar, the “System utiliza-tion”-window opens where the system resources for the NC areas are shown.


By pressing the HSK 2.8 “Drive system“ in the ex-tended horizontal softkey bar the “Overview for the drive states”-window opens.


By pressing the HSK 1.8 “Version“ als software components with their version information will be displayed.


Section 2


Notes:

If faulty conditions are recognized in the operation of the machine, then an alarm will be generated and, if necessary, the machining will be inter-rupted. The error text that is displayed together with the alarm number gives you more detailed information on the error cause.

Date and time

- If a faulty condition is determined in the control, the system time (hh:mm:ss) and system date (TT.MM.YY) is monitored and displayed in a list. The date is above the clock time.

Clearing criterion

- For every alarm an icon shows the key that has to be pressed on the keyboard to clear the alarm (here the “ALARM CANCEL” -Taste auf dem Keyboard).

Alarm number

- The alarms are displayed with an alarm number, in sequence of their occurrence.

Alarm text

- The alarm text describes the error in short words.

Attention:

Please check the situation in the plant on the basis of the description of the active alarm(s). Eliminate the cause/s of the alarm/s and acknowledge it/them as instructed. Failure to observe this warning will place your ma-chine, workpiece, stored settings and eventually even your own safety at risk.

3.1 Selecting the function “Alarm list”

Press the HSK 1.1 “Alarm list” to open the “Alarms”-window like displayed below. All present alarms are displayed here and can be acknowl-edged.

Displaying and handling alarms Section 3


Notes:


Press the HSK 1.1 „Alarm list“ and select the Alarm with the blue cursor key on the keyboard. Press the following vertical softkeys shown in the VSK-bar to delete or acknowledge the Alarm.


Press the VSK 1 “Delete HMI alarm” to delete a marked alarm.

-OR-

Press the VSK 2 “Acknowl. alarm“ to delete a PLC alarm of the SQ type (Alarm numbers starting from 800000).

Note: The softkeys are activated when the cursor is placed on the correspond-ing alarm.

3.3 Acknowledgement symbols

Symbol Instruction

Turn the unit off and back on (main switch), or press “NCK POWER ON”.

Press the “RESET”-key.

Press the “ALARM CANCEL"-key.

Press the “Acknowl. HMI alarm”-key.

Press the key provided by the manufacturer.

3.4 Deleting or acknowledging an alarm

1. Press the “MENU SELECT”-key on the CNC-keyboard and the yellow HSK 5 “Diagnostics”. Alternatively press the “ALARM”-key on the CNC-keyboard. The operating area “Diagnostics” opens.

2. Press the VSK 1.1 “Alarm list” to open the “Alarms”-window.

3. Navigate the cursor with the blue cursor keys to the corresponding alarm.

4. Press the corresponding key on the keyboard that is displayed in the alarm line.

- OR -

4. Press the VSK 1 “Delete HMI alarm” to cancel a HMI alarm.

- OR -

4. Press the VSK 2 “Acknowl. Alarm” to delete a PLC alarm of the SQ type (alarm number as of 800000).

The alarms are now deleted.

Displaying and handling alarms Section 3


Notes:

PLC and part program messages may be issued during machining. Messages provide information with regard to a certain behaviour of the cy-cles and with regard to the progress of machining and are usually kept be-yond a machining step or until the end of the cycle.

Date and time

- On the occurrence of the message, the actual system time (hh:mm:ss) and system date (TT.MM.YY) are displayed in this list. The date is above the clock time.

Number

- Message number only displayed for PLC messages.

Text

- Message text in short words.

Note: These message will not interrupt the program execution.

4.1 Selecting the function “Messages

By pressing the HSK 1.2 “Messages” the “Messages”-window opens, showing PLC and part program messages during machining.

Displaying messages Section 4


Notes:

A maximum of up to 32000 alarm messages can be displayed in the „Alarm log“ window. They are shown chronological ordered with the following parameters:

Raised

- If the alarm message is raised, the actual system time (hh:mm:ss) and system date (TT.MM.YY) is displayed in a list. The date is above the clock time.

Cleared

- If the alarm message is cleared, the actual system time (hh:mm:ss) and system date (TT.MM.YY) is displayed in a list. The date is above the clock time.

Number

- In this column the alarm number or massage is being output .

Text

- In this column a short description of the alarm or massage is being output. Note These message will not interrupt the program execution.

5.1 Selecting the function “Alarm log”

By pressing the HSK 1.3 “Alarm log” the following “Alarm log”-screen will be displayed.

Alarm log Section 5


Notes:



By pressing the VSK 1 “Display new” the actual alarm log list will be updated.

By pressing the VSK 6 “Settings” the “Settings” input mask opens, where you can limit the numbers of entries in the log list and decide to write the log into a file on the control.

By pressing the VSK 7 “Store log” the actual alarm log is stored as a text file.

5.3 Showing and saving alarm logs

1. Press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator panel and then the yellow horizontal softkey 5 “Diagnostics“. Alternatively you can press the “Alarm”-key on the keyboard. The operating area “Diagnostics” opens.

2. Press the VSK 3 “Alarm-log.“. The “Alarm log” window opens with the correspond-ing vertical softkey bar.

3. Press the VSK 1 “Display new” to update the log list.

- OR -

3. Press the VSK 2 “Settings” to open the “Settings”-input mask. In the “Number of entries”-field enter values for the maximum number of entries (maximum 32000) that shall be displayed in the log window and in the “Write mode file” select:

“off“, if the changes are not to be written to a file.

“At every event“, if every change is to be written to a file.

“Time-controlled” if the file is to be overwritten after a particular time period. A new option field opens where you can insert the write interval in seconds.

Accept your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “OK” or abort with pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”.

- OR -

3. Press the VSK 7 “Store log” to save the log directly to the file: card/user/sinumerik/hmi/log/alarm_log/alarmlog.txt on the on the control.

Alarm log Section 5



Operating area “Start-up” B577

1 Brief description


In this module you learn to adjust the operating interface of the Sinumerik Operate to your local lan-guage and to set the password and the key-switches.


The user interface is adjustable to the most common global languages English, French, German, Ital-ian, simplified Chinese and Spanish, which you can select from a list.

Furthermore you can adjust the functionality of the user interface and so the functionality of the con-trol to different levels of user groups, which allows different user groups different operations on the machine, depending on their knowledge and education. This can be done by passwords and key switches.

Content:

Start-up


B577

B577

Notes :


Operating area Start-up: START

Start-up

Operating area Start-up:

END

Operating area Start-up: Description

The user interface is adjustable to the most com-mon global languages English, French, German, Italian, simplified Chinese and Spanish, which you can select from a list.

Furthermore you can adjust the functionality of the user interface and so the functionality of the con-trol to different levels of user groups, which allows different user groups different operations on the machine, depending on their knowledge and edu-cation. This can be done by passwords and key switches.


Notes:

Start-up

2.1 Selecting the operating area “Start-up“

The operating area “Start-up” can be selected as follows:


The following horizontal softkey bar of the Sinumerik Operate is displayed.

Press the HSK 6 „Start-up“, to open the window for Start-up.

The “Machine configuration“ window opens.

2.2 Horizontal softkey bar


By pressing the HSK 1 “Mach. data“ the “General MD”-window opens. The display of the machine data or drive mecha-nism depend on the configuration of the control. The access rights to the machine data are re-stricted by the position of key switches or pass-words.


By pressing the HSK 6 “System data” the “System data”-window opens.


Section 2


Notes:

Start-up



By pressing the VSK 3 “Change language” you can adjust the user interface language to the lan-guage of your choice.

By pressing the VSK 6 “Password“ the VSK 1 “Set password” becomes active. You can switch to dif-ferent protection levels of the control by using differ-ent passwords.

2.4 Changing the user language

1. Press the “MENU SELECT”-key on the operator panel. The yellow horizontal softkey bar opens.

2. Press the HSK 6 „Start-up“.

3 Press the VSK 3 “Change language” The “Language selection” window opens.

4 Move the orange cursor over the language field of your choice, by using the blue cursor keys. Accept your selection by pressing the VSK 8 “OK” or abort with pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”.

The Sinumerik changes the user interface language to the language of your choice.

Tip: You can change the user language of the interface directly at any time by pressing the “CTRL” + “L” key on the keyboard simultaneously.

2.3 Selecting the function “Change language”

By pressing the VSK 3 “Change language” the “Language selection”-window opens.

Section 2


Notes:

2.5 Selecting the function “Password”

The access to programs, data and functions is restricted user-oriented by 8 hierarchical protection levels.

They are separated into:

4 password levels for system, machine manufacturer, commissioner, and user

4 key-switch positions for the end user

There are the protection levels 0 - 7, where 0 is the highest and 7 is the lowest level.

By pressing the VSK 6 “Password” and VSK 1 “Set password” an input mask opens where you can set a new protection level by entering a password.

2.6 Changing the protection level via password

1. Press the “MENU SELECT”-key on the operator panel. The yellow horizontal softkey bar opens.

2. Press the HSK 6 „Start-up“.

3. Press the VSK 6 “Password”.

4. Press the VSK 1 “Set password”. The “Define password” input mask opens.

5. Enter the password in the orange marked input field and accept with pressing the VSK 8 “OK” or abort with pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”.

Note: The additional softkeys and functions “Set pass-word” and “Change password” are only accessible at a higher protection level.

Start-up Section 2



Basics of programming with the program-GUIDE

1 Brief description


Working with this module you will learn the concept of the G code programming with help of the pro-gramGUIDE under ShopMill .


This module explains the general program structure of a ShopMill G code program, programmed with the programGUIDE. Furthermore the functions of the “Editor“ are described, as well as the functions “Various “, “Simulation“ and “NC-Selection“.

B604

Content:

Basics Creating G-code programs Editor Various Simulation NC Execute


B604

B604

Notes :


Basics of the Programming with the program-GUIDE: Description

This module explains the general program struc-ture of a ShopMill G code program, programmed with the programGUIDE. Furthermore the func-tions of the “Editor“ are described, as well as the functions “Various “, “Simulation“ and “NC-Selection“.

Basics with programGUIDE:

START

Basics

Creating G-code

programs

Editor

Various

Simulation

NC Execute

Basics with programGUIDE:

END


Notes:

Basics

2. 1 G code programming with ShopMill

ShopMill offers beside the manual operation area, also the possibility, to create a NC-program on the control. These programs can be chained sequential programs, G code programs or a mixture of both. If you do not want to program with the ShopMill functionality, you can generate G code programs with G code commands in the ShopMill user interface. G code commands can be programmed as per DIN 66025.

Note: The creation of chained sequential programs is discussed in detail in the module -B600 „Basics of programming with ShopMill”.

With the G code programming in ShopMill, with the programGUIDE, pa-rameter masks guide you in the process of measuring, the programming of contours, as well as drilling and milling cycles. From within the parameter masks, G code will be generated, which can also be translated back into the parameter masks.

The following functions support the programming of G code programs:

Technology oriented program step selection (cycles) using softkeys

Input masks and -windows for parameters, with animated help graphics

Context sensitive online help for every input mask and window

Comfortable definition of the blank

Support for the contour input (geometric processor)

G code programs can be represented in different views:

As a work plan showing the call up of the tool, path commands, revolu-tion settings, spindle data, feed, cycle calls, the program end, etc.

Section 2


Notes:

Basics

As a parameter mask, with 3-D help pictures and animation during pa-rameter input, with the VSK 2 “Graphic view” deactivated.

As a parameter mask with an outline drawing during parameter input, with the VSK 2 “Graphic view” activated.

Note: The animated help pictures are displayed always in the correct position to the adjusted coordinate system. The parameters are dynamically displayed into the graphic and are high-lighted in a different colour.

Section 2


Notes:

Basics

2.2 General program structure

In general, a G code program can be programmed freely. For a good legibility however, the following structure is recommended:

Zero point selection, plane selection, absolute dimensioning

Blank attribution for the simulation

Tool call-up and tool change

Technology data, path commands

Programming of the technologies (cycles)

Program end

1

2

3

4

5

5

3

2

5

1

4

6

Section 2


Notes:

Basics

2.3 Standard commands in the G code Editor

Unlike in a program with ShopMill functionality, the following G-code com-mands are programmed through graphically supported parameter masks, where as in the programGUIDE G-code editor they have to be specifically typed into the editor.

Note: Unnamed G commands are freely selectable. The documentation by the machine manufacturer must be observed.

Command Meaning

G 00 Rapid traverse command

G 01 Linear interpolation (Feed motion)

G 02 Circular interpolation clockwise

G 03 Circular interpolation anti-clockwise

G 04 Dwell time: additional parameters F or S are required

G 17 Plane selection XY

G 18 Plane selection ZX

G 19 Plane selection YZ

G 54 - G 57 Selection of the zero points Note: More zero points may be available. The documentation by the machine manufacturer must be observed.

G 90 Absolute dimensions

G 91 Incremental dimensions

The following standard M commands are available in the G code editor.

Note:

Unnamed M-commands are freely selectable.

The documentation by the machine manufacturer must be observed.

Command Meaning

M00 Programmed Halt

M01 Optional Stop, see also M00

M02 End of Program

M03 Spindle Start clockwise

M04 Spindle Start anti-clockwise

M05 Spindle Stop

M06 Tool change

M08 Coolant ON

M09 Coolant OFF

M19 Defined spindle stop

M30 End of Program (see also M02)

Section 2


Notes:

Basics

2.4 Navigation in the editor window

For a fast and comfortable navigation within a G code program and the parameter masks you can use the blue cursor keys.

With the blue “cursor-up”-key on the keyboard you can navigate upwards in the program editor and the parameter masks.

With the blue “cursor-down”-key on the keyboard you can navigate downwards in the program editor and the parameter masks.

The arrow symbol (extend symbol) on the right side of a cycle or workpiece line in the editor window indicates that you can enter the parameter input mask by pressing the “cursor-to-the-right”-key

(see picture below).

The “cursor-to-the-right”-key opens the parameter mask of the corresponding program block.

The “cursor-to-the-left”-key closes the parameter mask for the cycle or workpiece settings and brings you back to the editor window, displaying the G code program.

The following standard “other“ commands are available in the G code edi-tor.

Note:

The documentation by the machine manufacturer must be observed.

Com-mand

Meaning

T Tool call-up (Tool)

S Speed (Speed)

F Feed rate (Feed)

Section 2


Notes:

Creating G code programs

3.1 Creating a new G code program or opening an existing one

A new G code program can be created from the operating modes “JOG”, “MDA” and “AUTO” as follows:

Press the “Program Manager“-key on the keyboard. The program manager for creating and administering programs opens directly.

See module B575 - „Operating area Program Manager“.

- OR -

Press the “MENU SELECT“ key on the operator panel (OP).

Press the yellow HSK 1.4 “Program Manager“. The program manager for creating new programs and administering existing programs opens.

- THEN -

Select a storage drive (by pressing the horizontal soft-key “NC”, “Local drive” or “USB”) where you want to cre-ate the program. Move the orange cursor with the blue cursor-keys to the directory of your choice.

For the navigation process refer to the modules B566 - “Operating elements“ or B575 - “Operating area Pro-gram Manager“.

Press the VSK 2 “New”. The vertical softkey bar with functions for creating new programs opens.

Press the VSK 3 „programGUIDE G code“, to open the input mask for creating a new ShopMill G code program.

Here you can create a new main program

or a new subprogram.

Enter a name for the program and confirm your input by pressing the VSK 8 “OK”, or abort with pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”.

Section 3


Notes:


After creating a new programGUIDE program, the program is loaded into the G code editor in the operating area “Program”, where all the functions for tool selection, entering and editing G code commands and cycles are available (see picture below).

3.2 Programming a tool

Within the editor, tools can be selected and inserted in the G code program comfortably by using a softkey.

Under the function “Edit” HSK 1 press the VSK 1.1 “Select Tool” to open the tool list in the operating area “Parameter”.

Press the VSK 1.2 “New tool” to create a new tool (see module - B573 “Operating area Parameter”).

- OR -

Select an already existing tool from the tool list by placing the orange selection cursor on that tool and pressing the VSK 1.1 “To program”.

Afterwards program the tool change (M06), the spin-dle start (M03/M04), the coolant (M07/M08), the speed (S...), the feed (F) and if needed, some tool specific functions.

Section 3


Notes:


3.3 Programming the blank

The blank is needed for the simulation and the simultaneous recording. Only with a blank, that represents the real blank as precise as possible, a accurate simulation is possible. For the blank you have to define the shape (Block, Pipe, Cylinder, N-corner or Block centric) and dimensions.

In the operating area “Program” press the HSK 1.6 “Various” to open the vertical softkey bar with “various” functions.

Here, press the VSK 1.1 “Blank” to open the input mask for defining the blank. Fill in the needed parameters and press the VSK 8 “Accept” to take over the blank settings into the pro-gram, or abort by pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel” (see section 5.3).

3.4 Programming a cycle

Cycles (technologies) can be programmed easily by using softkeys and parameter masks as follow.

In the operating area “Program”

press the HSK 1.2 “Drill.”, or press the HSK 1.3 “Mill.”, or press the HSK 1.4 “Cont. mill.”, to open the cycles for drilling, milling or contour mill-ing. Select the corresponding technology (cycle) and a position pattern and accept the input. See module B609 - “Drilling“, B616 - “Milling” and B624 - “Contour milling“.

3.5 Inserting G code and programming the program end

In the G code editor window several functions for inserting, copying and cutting G code commands are available.

In the operating area “Program” press the HSK 1 “Edit” to program a part program with G code com-mands or to edit an already loaded program. Then program the program end (M02/M30) (see section 4).

Press the HSK 1.7 “Simulation“ to simulate the ma-chining (see section 6).

- OR -

Press the HSK 1.8 “NC Execute” to load the pro-gram to the NC memory, ready for machining (see section 7).

Section 3


Notes:

With the editor you can create, supplement, or change part programs.

4.1 Selecting the function “Edit”

The program editor can be opened from the operating modes “JOG”, “MDA” or “AUTO”.

By pressing the “PROGRAM“-key on the keyboard the editor window opens directly, with the last opened program. If no program was loaded before, the program man-ager window opens instead, where you can create or select an existing program.

- OR -

Press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator panel.

Press the yellow HSK 3 “Program” to open the oper-ating area “Program”. By default the editor window opens with the last opened program (see picture be-low).

Note: If the function is not active, press the HSK 1 “Edit“.

If no program had been opened for editing purpose, then the Sinumerik Operate opens the Program Manager window, offering a chance to the user for choosing the desired program for editing.

For further details see module - B574 “Operating area Program”, and also module - B576 “Operating area Program Manager”.

The following softkeys are available for editing a program:

Edit Section 4


Notes: 4.2 Vertical softkey bar 1 and 2


The VSK 1.1 “Select tool” opens the tool manage-ment area (tool list) in the operating area “Parameter”. Here you can select an existing tool or create a new one. By pressing the VSK 1.1 “To program” you can insert the selected tool data into the G code pro-gram.

By pressing the VSK 1.3 “Search“ you can search for any text in the current program. A search window opens where you can enter a search string. You can continue searching afterwards (see section 4.3).

By pressing the VSK 1.4 “Mark” you can mark one or several program blocks in order to copy or cut (delete) them.

By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Copy” you can copy one or several program blocks to the internal memory of the control, to paste them to a different location in the active program or to another program.

By pressing the VSK 1.6 “Paste“ copied program code can be inserted anywhere into the active pro-gram or into another program on a different location. The pasted program code will be inserted behind the program block marked with the orange selection cursor in the work plan. You can paste the code to the active program as well as to another program on the NC, local drive or USB-drive.

By pressing the VSK 1.7 “Cut” you can cut out one or several program blocks, to paste them later some-where in a program or to delete them. Cut program steps remain in the clipboard and can be inserted again with the VSK 1.6 “Paste” (see VSK 1.6 “Paste“).

By pressing the VSK 1.8 “Extend“ the extended ver-tical softkey bar 2, with the following functions, will be displayed.

By pressing the VSK 2.3 “Renumbering” you can assign new numbers for every program step in the editor window. (see section 4.4).

By pressing the VSK 2.6 “Settings“ you can change the setting for the program editor (see section 4.5).

By pressing the VSK 2.7 “Exit” you close the editor with the active program.

By pressing the VSK 2.8 “Back“ you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1.

Edit Section 4


Notes:

4.3 Search

With the function “Search” you can search for any text in a sequential pro-gram and even replace the text with other text.

4.3.1 Selecting the function “Search“

By pressing the VSK1.3 “Search” the search window opens, where you can search for any program code in the current program.

Edit



By pressing the VSK 1 “Go to start” the cursor will be positioned on the first line of the program.

By pressing the VSK 2 “Go to end” the cursor will be positioned on the last line of the program.

By pressing the VSK4 “Search” the search mask opens, where you can decide to search for complete words, select the search direction (forward/backwards) and enter the search text.

By pressing the VSK5 “Find + replace” the “Search and replace” mask opens where you can decide to search for complete words, select the search direc-tion (forward/backwards), enter the search text and enter the text you want to use for the replacement.

With pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel” you can abort the search process.

By pressing the VSK 8 “OK“ you start a search run with the above mentioned search criteria.

Section 4


Notes: 4.4 Renumbering

With the function “Renumbering” you can renumber manually the program steps in the work plan with an increment you can select here.

4.4.1 Selecting the function “Renumbering“

By pressing the VSK 2.3 “Renumbering” the input window opens where you can change the settings for the renumbering of the program blocks in the edi-tor window.

Edit

4.4.2 Parameters for “Renumbering”

Parameters Meaning

First block number The first block number you want to start with. The values shown here by default can be adjusted under the function “Settings” in the input field “First block number” (see section 4.5).

Increment The Increment between the program blocks. The values shown here by default can be adjusted under the function “Settings” in the input field “Increment” (see section 4.5).

Section 4


Notes:

4.5 Settings

With the function “Settings” you can change the settings for the program editor.

4.5.1 Selecting the function „Settings“

By pressing the VSK 2.6 “Settings” the settings win-dow for the program editor opens.

Edit

4.5.2 Parameters for “Settings”

Parameters Meaning

Number automati-cally (Yes/No)

Program blocks will be numbered automatically. Deactivating this parameter, hides the following two parameters too.

First block number Block number of first block.

Increment Increment between block numbers.

Show hidden lines (Yes/No)

Show hidden line (with the ID ;*HD).

Display block end as symbol (Yes/No)

A symbol is displayed at the end of each block.

Move horizontally (Yes/No)

Blocks are displayed in one line with a scroll bar at the right side.

Save automatically (only local and ex-ternal drives) (Yes/No)

Changes are saved automatically without a query.

Section 4


Notes: 5.1 Selecting the function “Various”

The function “Various” can be selected from the operating mode “JOG”, “MDA” or “AUTO” in the operating area “Program” as follows:

Press the HSK 6 “Various“ to switch over to the function “Various”. Following functions are displayed in the vertical Soft-key-bar in the program editor.



By pressing the VSK 1.1 “Blank“ an input mask opens where you can change the settings for the blank (see section 5.3 “Blank”).

By pressing the VSK 1.4 “HighSpeed settings“ the input mask for adjusting the settings for the optimal speed in relation to the machining method opens (see section 5.4 “HighSpeed settings”).

By pressing the VSK 1.6 “Subprogram” the input mask for calling a subprogram opens in the main program (see section 5.8).

By pressing the VSK 1.8 “Extend“ the vertical soft-key bar 2 opens


Various Section 5


Notes:

5.3 Blank

The blank is needed for the simulation and the simultaneous recording dur-ing machining. Only with a blank, which corresponds to the real workpiece as exactly as possible, a meaningful simulation is possible. For defining the blank, the form (block, pipe, cylinder, N corner, block cen-tred) and the dimensions are needed.

5.3.1 Selecting the function “Blank“

By pressing the VSK 1.1 “Blank” the blank input win-dow opens.

Various Section 5


Notes: 5.3.2 Parameters for the “Blank”

Parameter Meaning

Blank The following blank can be selected:

Block centred

Block

Pipe

Cylinder

N-corner

X0 1 corner point X

Y0 1 corner point Y

X1 (abs/ink) 2 corner point related to X0 (absolute or incremental) (only with block)

Y1 (abs/ink) 2 corner point related to Y0 (absolute or incremental) (only with block)

ZA Initial dimension

ZI (abs/ink) Final dimension related to ZA (absolute or incre-mental)

XA Outside diameter (only with pipe or cylinder)

XI Inside diameter (absolute or incremental)

N Number of edges (only with N corner)

SW Width across flats (only with N corner)

W Width of blank (only with Block centred)

L Length of blank (only with Block centred))

Various Section 5


Notes:

5.3.3 Changing the graphical view on the blank

The graphic view on the blank is adjustable in the operation area “Program” under the functions “Edit”, Drilling”, “Milling”, “Contour milling”, “Various” and “Straight Circle” by pressing the VSK 1.2 “Graphic view”. Within the function “Various” you can adjust the graphic settings with the Softkey “Graphic view” for the blank. Help pictures and animations are only displayed if the VSK 2 “Graphic view” is deselected and then only in the side view. You can change the graphic view on the blank as follows:

1. In the operating area “Program” and operation mode “JOG”, “MDA”, or “AUTO” press the HSK 1.6 “Various”.

2. Press the VSK 1.1 “Blank” to open the input mask for the blank settings.

By activating and deactivating the VSK 2 “Graphic view” you can switch the graphical representation of the blank, the help pictures and animations between 2 different views:

3D view/side view

A wireframe model

Various Section 5


Notes:

Various

5.4 High Speed Settings

With the machining of free form surfaces, there are high demands on ma-chining speed as well as accuracy and surface finish. The optimal speed profile in conjunction with the machining method (roughing, pre-finishing, finishing) can be adjusted easily with the function “HighSpeed settings”. It is advisable to program the cycle in the technology part first, before pro-gramming the geometry part. Machining methods: With the function “HighSpeed settings” you can select from 3 different technological machining methods:

"roughing"

"pre-finishing"

"finishing"

"deselect" (default setting)

These four machining methods are associated directly with accuracy, ve-locity and surface quality of the contour path (see the triangle in the Help pictures). The operator/programmer can make an appropriate weighting by adjusting the tolerance value. Different tolerance values and technologies can be assigned to the four machining methods.

5.3.4 Changing the setting for the blank


2. Press the VSK 1 “Settings”.

3. Optionally change the graphic view for the blank be-tween 3D-/side view or wireframe model by pressing the VSK 2 “Graphic view”.

4. Enter the parameter values for the blank (see pa-rameter list in section 5.3.2).

5. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept” or abort with pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”. A new program block “Workpiece” is inserted in the program (see the picture below).

Section 5


Notes:

Various

5.4.1 Selecting the function “HighSpeed settings“

By pressing the VSK 4 “HighSpeed settings“ the “High-speed Settings” screen opens.

The screens roughing, pre-finishing and finishing change in intervals be-tween Help picture and animation.

5.4.2 Parameter for „HighSpeed settings“

Parameter Help picture Animation

PL The parameter for the machining plane is optional and has to be activated by a machine datum.

Tolerance Tolerance values for the machining

Machining:

Roughing

Pre-finishing

Section 5


Notes:

Various

Parameter Help picture Animation (continuation)

Finishing

Deselect

none

5.4.3 Changing the ”High-speed settings“

1. In the operating area “Program“ and operation mode “JOG”, “MDA”, or “AUTO” press the HSK 6 “Various”.

2. Press the VSK 4 “HighSpeed settings“.

3. Optionally change the graphic view for the blank by pressing the VSK 2 “Graphic view”.

4. Enter the parameter values for “Tolerance” and “Machining”. Press the VSK 8 “Accept” to accept your inputs or abort by pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”. A new program block “CYCLE832” with the “High Speed settings” is inserted into the program (see picture below).

Section 5


Notes:

5.5 Subprogram

If you require the same machining steps in the programming of different workpieces, you can define these machining steps in a separate routine. You can then call this subroutine in any programs. Identical machining steps therefore only have to be programmed once. ShopMill does not differentiate between main program and subprogram. This means that you can call a "standard" sequential control or G code program as subprogram in another sequential control program. In this subprogram, you can also call another subprogram. The maximum nesting depth is 8 subroutines. You cannot insert subroutines among blocks chained by the control. If you want to call a sequential control program as a subroutine, the program must already have been calculated once (load or simulate program in “Machine Auto” mode). This is not necessary for G code subroutines. The subroutine must always be stored in the NCK main memory (in a separate directory "XYZ" or in the "ShopMill", "Part programs", "Subroutines" directories). If you want to call a subprogram located on another drive, you can use the G code command "EXTCALL".

Note: Please note that, when a subprogram is called, ShopMill evaluates the settings in the program header of the subroutine. These settings also remain active even after the subprogram has ended. If you wish to activate the settings from the program header for the main program again, you can make the settings again in the main program after calling the subprogram.

5.5.1 Selecting the function “Subprogram”

By pressing the VSK 3 “Subprogram”, the input win-dow for calling up a subprogram opens.

Various Section 5


Notes: 5.5.2 Loading subprograms

1. In the operating area “Program“ and operating mode „JOG“, „MDA“ or „AUTO“ press the HSK 6 “Various“.

2. Press the VSK 1.6 ”Subprogram”.

3. Enter the directory path to the subprogram and the name of the subprogram in the input mask.

4. Press the VSK 8 “Accept” to confirm your inputs or press the VSK 7 “Cancel” to abort. A new program block “Execute” with the directory path to the subprogram is inserted (see picture below):

Various Section 5


Notes:

Simulation

ShopMill provides various extensive and detailed simulation functions for displaying the simulation of the machining. During simulation, the current program is calculated in its complete form and the result is displayed in graphic form. You can select the following modes of representation for simulation:

Top view

3-D view

Side view The simulation uses the correct proportions for the tools and workpiece contours. Cylindrical die-sinking cutters, bevel cutters, bevel cutters with corner rounding and tapered die-sinking cutters are dis-played as end milling tools. The traverse paths for the tools are shown in colour: Red line = tool is moving at rapid traverse Green line = tool is moving at machining feedrate In all views, a clock is displayed during graphical processing. The displayed machining time (in hours/minutes/seconds) indicates the ap-proximate time that would actually be required to execute the machining program on the machine (incl. tool change). If a program is interrupted during simultaneous recording, the clock stops. In addition, the current axis coordinates, the override, and the program block currently being executed are also displayed. The active tool with the cutting edge number and feedrate are also dis-played in the simulation. Transformations are displayed differently during simulation and simultaneous recording:

Coordinate transformations (translation, scaling, …) are displayed as programmed.

Cylinder surface transformations are displayed as a developed surface.

After swivel transformation, the previous machining operations are de-leted from the display and only machining of the swivelled plane is dis-played (viewing angle perpendicular to the swivelled plane).

Zero offsets (G54, etc.) do not alter the zero in the graphical display. This means that, in the case of multiple clamping, the machining opera-tions for each of the individual workpieces are plotted on top of one an-other.

Note: If you want to display a different portion of the workpiece from the one de-fined in ShopMill, you can define a new blank in the program (see section 5.3 “Blank” in this module).

Section 5


Notes:

Simulation

Press the VSK 1.4 “3D view” the simulated work-piece is displayed 3-dimesionally (see picture be-low).

The following functions will be available in the vertical softkey bar.

6.1 Selecting the function “Simulation“

The function “Simulation” can be selected from the operating mode “JOG“, “MDA“ and “AUTO“ as follows:

With a program loaded, press the HSK 1.7 “Simulation“ to start a simulation run. The following screen opens. The simulation starts after a short computing time in the top view by default.

Section 6


Notes:

Simulation



By pressing the VSK 1.1 “Stop“ the simulation will be halted. The softkey will be replaced with the VSK 1.1 “Start”, in order to continue the simulation again.

By pressing the VSK 1.1 “Start” the simulation will be started or continued. The softkey will be replaced with the VSK “Stop”.

By pressing the VSK 1.1 “SBL“ the simulation will be processed block by block. This softkey replaces the softkey “Start”, if the VSK 4 “Single block” is acti-vated under the function “Program control”.

By pressing the VSK 1.2 “Reset“ the simulation will be aborted, and can be started again by pressing the VSK 1.1 “Start”.

The “Top view“ is activated by default and shows the simulation in a plan view from above

By pressing the VSK 1.4 “3D view“ the simulation will be shown in a 3-D view

By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Further views” the vertical softkey bar opens, with more options to adjust the view on the simulation process (see section 6.3).

By pressing the VSK 1.6 “Details“ the vertical soft-key bar opens, where you can adjust the level of de-tails that will be shown during the simulation (see section 6.4).

By pressing the VSK 1.7 “Program control” the ver-tical softkey bar opens, with further functions to con-trol the simulation run (see section 6.5).

By pressing the VSK 1.8 “Extend” the vertical soft-key bar 2 with the following functions will be dis-played.

By pressing the VSK 2.3 “Show tool path” the dis-play of the simulated tool path can be switched on and off.

By pressing the VSK 2.4 “Delete tool path” the ani-mated tool path in the simulation window will be de-leted. A new tool path is shown immediately after pressing this softkey or after running a new simula-tion (if the simulation is in “Stop”- or “Reset”- mode).

By pressing the VSK 2.5 “Blank” you can change the dimensions of the simulated blank (see also sec-tion 5.3). This softkey is active if the simulation is in “Reset” mode.

By pressing the VSK 2.8 “Back” you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1.

Section 6


Notes:

Simulation

6.3 Further views

With the function “Further views” you can change the graphical side-views on the blank, to view the simulation process in an optimal way. You can change the sides from which you want to see the simulation.

6.3.1 Selecting the function “Further views”

By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Further views” the follow-ing window with side views on the blank opens.



By pressing the VSK 1 “From front” the simulated workpiece will be shown in a front view.

By pressing the VSK 2 “From rear” the simulated workpiece will be shown in a rear view.

By pressing the VSK 3 “From left” the simulated workpiece will be shown from the left side.

By pressing the VSK 4 “From right” the simulated workpiece will be shown from the right side.

By pressing the VSK 8 “Back” on the operator panel (OP) you switch back to the vertical softkey bar of the operating area “Details”.

Section 6


Notes:

Simulation

6.4 Details

With the function “Details” you can zoom in, zoom out, rotate and cut out parts of the workpiece.

6.4.1 Selecting the function “Details”

By pressing the VSK 1.6 “Details“ the following func-tions are available in a vertical softkey bar.



By pressing the VSK 1 “Autozoom“ the workpiece fills out the simulation window in an optimal way.

By pressing the VSK 2 “Zoom +“ you zoom in into the simulation window. Alternatively you can press the “+“-key on the number block of the keyboard.

By pressing the VSK 3 “Zoom -“ you can zoom out of the simulation window. Alternatively you can press the “-“-key on the keyboard.

By pressing the VSK 4 “Zoom” a frame opens in the simulation window, that lets you zoom in to the frame size. Press the VSK1 “Zoom +” to increase and the VSK 2 “Zoom -” to decrease the frame size. Alternatively you can change the frame size of the zoom area with the “+”or “-” key on the number pad of the key-board. Move the frame with the blue cursor keys on the keyboard. Press the VSK 8 “Accept” to zoom to the selected extent or abort with pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”.

Section 6


Notes:

Simulation


By pressing the VSK 5 “Rotate view” a vertical softkey bar opens to the right, with functions to ro-tate the workpiece in the simulation window (see section 6.4.2.1).

By pressing the VSK 6 “Cut” the functions for cut-ting out parts of the workpiece are available in a vertical softkey bar “(see section 6.4.2.3).

By pressing the VSK 8 “Back” on the operator panel you switch back to the vertical softkey-bar 1.

6.4.2.1 Selecting the function “Rotate view”

By pressing the VSK 5 “Rotate view” the following functions will be displayed in a vertical softkey bar.

6.4.2.2 Vertical softkey bar


By pressing the VSK “Arrow right” the workpiece will be turned right around the centre of the simula-tion window.

By pressing the VSK “Arrow left” the workpiece will be turned left around the centre of the simulation window.

By pressing the VSK 3 “Arrow up” the work piece will be turned up around the centre of the simulation window.

By pressing the VSK 4 “Arrow down” the work piece will be turned down around the centre of the simulation window.

By pressing the 5 “Arrow turns left” the workpiece will be rotated to the left, around the centre of the simulation window (counter clockwise).

By pressing the 5 “Arrow turns right” the work-piece will be rotated to the right, around the centre of the simulation window (clockwise).

By pressing the VSK 8 “Back” you switch back to the VSK-bar “Details”.

Section 6


Notes:

Simulation

6.4.2.3 Selecting the function “Cut”

By pressing the VSK 1.7 “Cut“ the functions for cut-ting out parts of the simulated workpiece will be shown in a vertical softkey bar. The cut surface ar-eas are only displayed during simulation run.



By pressing the VSK 1 “Cut active” you can acti-vate the cut surfaces on the workpiece and activate the greyed out axes softkeys in the vertical softkey bar. The function “Cut” stays active until the VSK “Cut active” is deactivated.

By pressing the VSK 2 “X+“ the cutting plane is shifted on the X-axis to the positive (“to the right”).

By pressing the VSK 3 “X-“ the cutting plane is shifted on the X-axis to the negative (“to the left”).

By pressing the VSK 4 „Y+“ the cutting plane is shifted on the y-axis (ordinate) to the positive („to the rear “).

By pressing the VSK 5 „Y-“ the cutting plane is shifted on the y-axis (ordinate) to the negative (“forward”).

By pressing the VSK 6 “Z+“ the cutting plane will be shifted on the Z-axis (applicate) to the positive (“up”).

Section 6


Notes:

Simulation

Anzeigebereich Beschreibung (Fortsetzung)

Durch Drücken des VSK 7 „Z-“ wird die Schnittebe-ne auf der Z-Achse (Ablikate) zum negativen („nach unten“) verschoben.

Durch Drücken des VSK 8 „Zurück“ gelangt man wieder in den Bedienbereich „Details“ zurück.

6.5 Programmsteuerung

Mit der Funktion „Programmsteuerung“ kann der Override für die Simula-tion eingestellt werden, das Programm kann Block für Block abgearbeitet werden, und Alarm Meldungen die während der Simulation auftreten, kön-nen angezeigt werden.

6.5.1 Anwahl der Funktion „Programmsteuerung“

Durch Drücken des VSK 1.7 „Programmsteuerung“ werden die folgenden Funktionen in der vertikalen Softkey-Leiste zur Verfügung gestellt..

6.5.2 Vertikale Softkey-Leiste

Anzeigebereich Beschreibung

Durch Drücken des VSK 1 „Override 100%“ wird der Vorschub-Override auf die maximale Vorschubge-schwindigkeit von 100% gesetzt.

Durch Drücken des VSK 2 „Override +“ wird der Vorschub um jeweils 5%-Schritte bis zur maximalen Vorschubgeschwindigkeit von 100% erhöht.

Durch Drücken des VSK 3 „Override -“ wird der Vor-schub-Override um jeweils 5%-Schritte reduziert. Bei einem Vorschub-Override von 0% wird die Simu-lation pausiert.

Durch Drücken des VSK 4 „Einzelsatz“ wird die Ab-arbeitung des Programms Satz für Satz simuliert. Mit jedem Drücken des VSK 1 „SBL“ im Bedienbe-reich Simulation wird jeder Programm-Block nach-einander abgearbeitet (siehe Abschnitt 6.2, „Vertikale Softkey-Leiste 1 und 2).

Durch Drücken des VSK 7 „Alarm“ wird das Fenster mit den Alarmmeldungen geöffnet, die während des Simulationslaufs auftreten, um bspw. eine Fehlerdi-agnose durchzuführen.

Durch Drücken des VSK 8 „Zurück“ gelangt man wieder in zur Vertikalen Softkey-Leiste 1 zurück.

Section 6


Notes:

6.6.1 Selecting the function “Alarm”

By pressing the VSK 7 “Alarm” the “Simulation alarms” window opens, with a list of all current active alarm messages that occurred during the simulation.

For error messages and acknowledgement symbols see module - B576 “Operating area Diagnostics”, section 3.



By pressing the VSK 1 “Acknowl. Alarm” all with the “Reset”- or “Cancel”-symbol marked alarm mes-sages can be deleted. This softkey is inactive as long as no appropriate error message is shown.

By pressing the VSK 2 “Simulation Power On” you can trigger a warm restart for the active simulation.

Press the VSK 8 “OK” to confirm or the VSK 7 “Cancel” to abort the warm restart. With a warm start the simulation will be ended and started new.

By pressing the VSK 8 “Back” you switch back to the operating area “Program control”.

Simulation Section 6


Notes: 7.1 NC Execute

The function “NC Execute” lets you load the active program from the editor to the operating area “Machine” in the operating mode “AUTO”.

7.1.1 Selecting the function “NC Execute”

By pressing the HSK 1.8 “NC Execute” the control, switches to the operating area “Machine” under the operating mode “AUTO”. The program is loaded into the internal memory of the NC and is now ready for machining (see picture below). The Softkey “NC Execute” is inactive on a running program.

NC Execute Section 7



Drilling

1 Brief description


Working through this module you become familiar with the technology “Drilling” by programming two G code programs with the programGUIDE in ShopMill.


This module explains the programming of a simple drilling example with the programGUIDE in Shop-Mill, as well as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece by means of drilling cycles and position patterns.

B609

Content:

Simple programming example Complex programming example


B609

B609

Notes :


Drilling programGUIDE:

START

Simple programming

example

Complex programming

example

Drilling programGUIDE:

END

Drilling - programGUIDE: Description

This module explains the programming of a simple drilling example with the programGUIDE in Shop-Mill, as well as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece by means of drilling cycles and position patterns.


Notes:

Simple programming example

2.1 Creating a new programGUIDE program

A new G code program can be created from within the operating modes “JOG, “MDA” and “AUTO” as follows:

1. Press the “Program Manager”-key on the keyboard. The program manager will be opened directly.

- OR -

1. Press the “MENU SELECT”-key on the operator panel.

Press the yellow HSK 1.4 “Program Manager”. The program manager opens.

2. Select a drive by pressing a horizontal softkey where you want to create the program (“NC”, “Local drive”, “USB”).

3. Press the VSK 2 “New“. The vertical softkey bar with functions for creating new programs opens.

4. Press the VSK 4 „programGUIDE G code“ to open the input mask for creating a new G code program. Select “Main program MPF”.

5. Enter a name for the program in the “Name” field, e.g DIN_DRILLING_1.MPF and accept with press-ing the VSK 8 “OK”. The editor window for entering G code commands opens.

Description:

A simple drilling using the drill cycle is to be programmed with the pro-gramGUIDE in ShopMill.

Objective:

A new G code program is to be created and opened. The G code lines and the drill cycle must be programmed and the program is to be simulated. For this, the tool and technology data below are to be used:

Tool data: Drill Ø 8,5 mm (DRILL_D8.5)

Technology data: As a start position for the machining, the first pro-grammed drill hole is to be used. This position is approached in rapid traverse.

Section 2


Notes:


2.2 Example: Drilling

The following G code program, with the call up of a simple drilling cycle, is to be programmed.

Create a new G code programGUIDE program, as described before in sec-tion 2.1 and give the program the name “DIN_DRILLING_1”.

1. Program the first line of the program:

N10 G54 G17 G90

2. Insert now a blank for the simulation.

Press the HSK 1.6 “Various” to open the operating area “Various”.

Press the VSK 1 “Blank” to open the input mask for the blank.

3. Fill in the following parameters for the blank:

Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The following line will be inserted into the program:

N20 WORKPIECE(,,,"RECTANGLE",64,0,-20,-80,100,100)

4. Now, insert a drill tool into the program.

Press the VSK 1.1 “Select tool“. The tool list win-dow opens. Select the tool “DRILL_D8.5” by using the blue cursor key on the keyboard.

Section 2


Notes:

Press the VSK 1.8 “OK”. The following program line is inserted into the pro-gram: N30 T="DRILL_D8.5"

5. Program the following G code commands: N40 M6 N50 S1000 M3 F150 N60 G0 X0 Y0 Z100

6. Program the drilling-cycle “CYCLE82”.

For this, press the HSK 1.2 “Drill.” to open the tech-nology “Drilling”.

Press the VSK 2 “Drilling Reaming”.

Press the VSK 3 “Drilling“. The input mask for the drilling cycle “CYCLE82” opens.

7. Insert the values into the parameter mask like dis-played below:

The following program line will be inserted into the program: N70 CYCLE82(100,0,1,,25,0,10,1,11)

9. Program the program end: N80 M30

10. Simulate the machining.

Press the HSK 1.7 “Simulation” to run the simula-tion of the program.

Simple programming example Section 2


Notes:


Press the VSK 1.4 “3D view” to view the simulation in a 3D view.

Section 2


Notes:

Complex programming example

Description:

By using different drilling cycles (Centering, Drilling, Thread drilling) and a position pattern, a more complex programGUIDE-program (drill pattern) is to be created in ShopMill.

Aim:

The workpiece shown below is to be programmed. Afterwards, the program is to be simulated.

The following tools and technology data are to be used.

Tool data: Center drill 12 mm (CENTERDRILL_D12) Drill Ø 8,5 mm (DRILL_D8.5) Tap M10 (TAP_M10)

Technology data: As a start position for the machining, the first pro-grammed drill hole is to be used. This position is approached in rapid traverse.

Section 3


Notes:


3.1 Example: Drill pattern

The following program, with the call up of a drilling-, center drilling- and thread drilling-cycle, is to be programmed:

Create a new programGUIDE-program in ShopMill, like described in sec-tion 2.1 in this module. Give the program a name, for example “DIN_DRILLING_2”.

1. Program the first line of the program: N10 G54 G17 G90

2. Now insert a blank for the simulation.

For this, press the HSK 1.6 “Various” to open the operating area “Various”.

Press the VSK 1 “Blank” to open the parameter mask for the blank.


Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The following line will be inserted into the program: N20 WORKPIECE(,,,"BOX",112,0,-20,-80,0,0,150,100)

4. Insert a tool into the program.

Press the VSK 1.1 “Select tool”. The tool list window opens. Use the blue cursor keys to select the tool: “CENTERDRILL_D12”.

Section 3


Notes:


Press the VSK 1.8 “OK”. The program line N30 T="CENTERDRILL_D12" is inserted into the program.

5. Program the following G code commands: N40 M6 N50 S2000 M3 F100

6. Program the center drill cycle “CYCLE 81”.

Press the HSK 1.2 “Drill.”, to open the technology “Drilling”.

Press the VSK 1 “Centering”. The input mask for the centering cycle “CYCLE81” opens.

Insert the values into the parameter mask like dis-played below:

Accept your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The following line will be inserted into the program: N60 MCALL CYCLE81(100,0,1,10,,0,10,1,11).

7. Insert now the position patterns (CYCLE802) for centering.

Press the VSK 7 “Positions” for selecting a position pattern.

Press the VSK 3 “Positions” to program the “CYCLE802”.

Insert DRILLING_1 into the “LAB” field to set a name for the jump marks for the repeat positions. Fill out the rest of the input mask like displayed be-low.

Section 3


Notes:


Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The following line will be inserted into the program: N70 DRILLING_1: CYCLE802(111111111, 111111111,30,25,120,25,120,75,30,75,,,,,,,,,,,0,0,1)

8. Program the following G code command: N80 MCALL

9. Insert the tool “DRILL_D8.5” into the program (see step 4) or type into the editor the following line by hand: N90 T="DRILL_D8.5"


11. Program the cycle for drilling (CYCLE82).


Press the VSK 3 “Drilling”. The input mask for the drilling cycle “CYCLE82” opens.


Accept your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The following line will be inserted into the program: N120 MCALL CYCLE82(100,0,1,,25,0,10,1,11).

13. Program the following G code commands: N130 REPEATB DRILLING_1 N140 MCALL

14. Insert the tool TAP_M10 into the program (see step 4) or type into the editor the following line by hand: N150 T="TAP_M10"


Section 3


Notes:


16. Finally program the cycle for the thread drilling.

Press the VSK 6 “Thread” to open the input mask for the CYCLE84 “Tapping”.


Accept your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The following line will be inserted into the program:

N180 MCALL CYCLE84(100,0,1,-25,,0,5,,1.5,0,500,500,0,1,0,0,,1.4,,"ISO_METRIC","M10",,1001,1001002)

18. Program the following lines and complete the pro-gram: N190 REPEATB DRILLING_1 N200 MCALL N210 M30

19. Start the simulation of the program.

Press the HSK 1.7 “Simulation” to open the simula-tion window. The control calculates the simulation and shows the simulation in a top view.

Section 3


Notes:


Press the VSK 1.4 “3D view“ to run the simulation in a 3-dimensional view.

Section 3

B609B609 828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate



Milling

1 Brief description


Working through this module you learn about the technology “Milling” by programming two G code programs with the programGUIDE in ShopMill.


This module explains the explains the programming of a simple milling example with the program-GUIDE in ShopMill, as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece by means of milling cycles and a position pattern.

B616

Content:



B616

B616

Notes :


Milling programGUIDE:

START

Simple programming

example

Complex programming

example

Milling programGUIDE:

END

Milling - programGUIDE: Description

This module explains the explains the program-ming of a simple milling example with the pro-gramGUIDE in ShopMill, as well as the program-ming of a more complex workpiece by means of milling cycles and a position pattern.


Notes:



A new programGUIDE program can be created from within the operating modes “JOG, “MDA” and “AUTO” as follows:


- OR -


Press the yellow HSK 4 “Program Manager”. The program manager opens.

2. Select a drive, where you want to create the pro-gram (“NC”, “Local drive”, “USB”).

3. Press the VSK 2 “New“. The vertical softkey bar for creating new programs opens.

4. Press the VSK 4 “programGUIDE G code” to open the input mask for creating a new ShopMill G code program. Select “Main program”. Enter a name for the program in the “Name” field, e.g “DIN_MILLING_1.MPF” and accept with press-ing the VSK 8 “OK”. The G code program is loaded to the editor.

Description:

A simple milling operation is to be programmed with the programGUIDE in ShopMill.

Objective:

A new G code program is to be created and opened in the editor window. The G code lines and the milling cycle are to be programmed and the pro-gram is to be simulated For this the tool and technology data shown below are to be used:

Tool data: Milling cutter Ø 10 mm (CUTTER_D10)

Technology data: F 0,15 mm/tooth, V120 m/min

Section 2


Notes:


2.2 Example: Rectangular pocket

The following program, with a simple call up of a milling cycle, is to be pro-grammed with the programGUIDE in ShopMill:


N10 G54 G17 G90

2. Insert now a blank for the simulation.


Press the VSK 1 “Blank” to open the parameter mask for the “Blank input”.

3. Insert the following values into the parameter mask:

Confirm your inputs with pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”: The following line is inserted into the program_

N20 WORKPIECE(,,,"BOX",112,0,-20,-80,0,0,150,100)

4. Insert now a tool into the program.

Press the VSK 1.1 “Select tool”. The tool list window opens. Place the orange selection cursor on the tool “CUTTER_D10” by using the blue cursor keys on the keyboard.

Section 2


Notes:


Press the VSK 1.8 „OK“. The program line N30 T="CUTTER_D10" is inserted into the program. Alternatively you can also program the line by hand.

5. Insert the following G code commands into the pro-gram:

N40 M6 N50 S3820 M3 N60 G95 FZ=0.15

6. Program now the rectangular pocket.

For this, press the HSK 1.2 “Mill.”, to call up the technology “Milling”.

Press the VSK 2 “Pocket”.

Press the VSK 3 “Rectang. pocket”. The input mask for the rectangular pocket opens.


Confirm your inputs with pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”: The following line will be inserted into the program: N70 POCKET3(100,0,1,-10,60,30,7,75,50,0,10, 0,0,0.15,0.1,0,21,40,8,3,15,2,2,0,1,2,11100,1,111)

9. Program now the program end with the following G-code command:

N80 M30

Section 2


Notes:


10. Simulate the machining of the workpiece.

Press the HSK 1.7 “Simulation” to start the simula-tion run. The control calculates the simulation parameters and opens the simulation in the simulation window in “Top view”.

To view the simulation in 3-dimensional press the VSK 1.4 “3D view”.

Section 2


Notes:


Description:

A more complex program (slanted rectangular pocket) is to be created with the programGUIDE in ShopMill, using milling cycles and a position pattern.

Objective:

The workpiece shown below is to be programmed and simulated after-wards. For this the tool and technology data shown below are to be used:

The following tool- and technology data are needed for the programming:

Tool data:: Milling cutter Ø 10 mm (CUTTER_D10) F 0,15 mm/tooth, V 120 m/min (roughing) and F 0,08 mm/tooth, V 150 m/min (finishing)

Technology data: The pocket is to be roughed first and later on to be finished.

Section 3


Notes:

3.1 Example: Slanted rectangular pocket

The following program is to be programmed using the milling cycle “Rectang. Pocket”.

For this, create a new programGUIDE G code program, like described in section 2.1 in this module. Give the program for example following name “DIN_MILLING_2”.

1. Program in the first line following G code command:

N10 G54 G17 G90

2. Insert now a blank for the simulation into the pro-gram.


Press the VSK 1 “Blank” to open the parameter win-dow for the blank input.

3. Insert the following parameters into the parameter window:

Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The following line is inserted into the program:

N20 WORKPIECE(,,,"BOX",112,0,-20,-80,0,0,150,100)

4. Insert now a tool into the program.

Complex programming example Section 3


Notes:

Press the VSK 1.1 “Select tool”. The tool list in the operating area “Parameter” opens. Use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard to select the tool “CUTTER_D10”.

Press the VSK 1.8 “OK”. The program line N30 T="CUTTER_D10" is inserted into the program. Optionally you can program this line by typing it into the editor.

5. Program the following G code commands:

N40 M6 N50 S3820 M3 N60 G95 FZ=0.15

6. Rough the rectangular pocket.

Press the HSK 1.3 “Mill.”, to open the technology “Milling”..


Press the VSK 3 “Rectang. pocket”. The parameter mask for the rectangular pocket cycle opens.

7. Here, enter the values displayed below and press the VSK 8 “Accept”. The following line is inserted into the program: N70 POCKET3(100,0,1,-15,60,40,6,75,50,30,2.5, 0.3,0.3,0.15,0.1,0,21,80,8,3,15,2,2,0,1,2,11100,1,110)



Notes:

8. Insert now the following G code command:

N80 S4775

9. Finish the rectangular pocket.



10. Insert the following values into the parameter mask and press the VSK 8 “Accept”.

The following line is inserted into the program:

N90 POCKET3(100,0,1,-15,60,40,6,75,50,30,15,0.3, 0.3,0.08,0.1,0,22,80,8,3,15,2,2,0,1,2,11100,1,110)

11. Program the following G code command and end the program:

N100 M30

12. Start the Simulation of the program.

Press the HSK 1.7 “Simulation” to start the simula-tion run. The control calculates the simulation parameters and opens the simulation in the simulation window in “Top view”.



Notes:

To view the simulation 3-dimensional press the VSK 1.4 “3D view”.




Contour milling

1 Brief description


Working with this module you learn about the technology “Contour milling”, by programming two G code programs with the programGUIDE in ShopMill.


This module explains the programming of a simple contour milling example (straight line) with the programGUIDE in ShopMill, as well as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece (mould plate) by means of contour milling cycles and contour descriptions.

B624

Content:



B624

B624

Notes :


Contour milling programGUIDE:

START

Simple programming

example

Complex programming

example

Contour milling programGUIDE:

END

Contour milling - programGUIDE: Description

This module explains the programming of a simple contour milling example (straight line) with the pro-gramGUIDE in ShopMill, as well as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece (mould plate) by means of contour milling cycles and contour descriptions.


Notes:



A new G code program can be created from within the operating modes “JOG, “MDA” and “AUTO” as follows:


- OR -


Press the yellow HSK 1.4 “Program Manager”. The program manager opens.

2. Select a drive by pressing a horizontal softkey where you want to create the program (“NC”, “Local drive”, “USB”).

3. Press the VSK 2 “New“. The vertical softkey bar with functions for creating new programs opens.

4. Press the VSK 4 „programGUIDE G code“ to open the input mask for creating a new G code program. Select “Main program MPF”. Enter a name for the program in the “Name” field, e.g. DIN_CONTOURMILLING_1.MPF and accept with pressing the VSK 8 “OK”. The editor window for entering G code commands opens.

Description:

A simple straight line is to be programmed using the technology “Contour milling” with the programGUIDE in ShopMill.

Objective:

A new G code program is to be created and opened. The G code lines and the contour milling cycles must be programmed and the program is to be simulated For this the tool and technology data below are to be used:


Technology data: F 0,15 mm/tooth, V 120 m/min

As a start position for the machining, the following position is to be used: X0, Y-100 This position is approached in the cycle in rapid trav-erse.

Section 2


Notes:


2.2 Programming example: Straight line

The following G code program “DIN_CONTOURMILLING_1.MPF” is to be programmed:


N10 G54 G17 G90

2. Insert now a blank for simulation.


Press the VSK 1 “Blank” to open the input mask for the blank.

3. Fill in the following parameters for the blank:


N20 WORKPIECE(,,,"BOX",64,0,-25,-80,-50,-100,100,150)

4. Now, insert a tool into the program.

First Press HSK 1 “Edit”. A vertical softkey-bar with additional functions shows on the right of the screen.

Press the VSK 1.1 “Select tool“. The tool list window opens. Select the tool “CUTTER_D32” by using the blue cursor key on the keyboard.

Section 2


Notes:


Press the VSK 1.8 “OK”. The program line N30 T="CUTTER_D32" is inserted into the program. Alternatively you can type this line by hand into the editor.


N40 M6 N50 S1194 M3 N60 G95 FZ=0.15

6. Insert a contour call (CYCLE62) into the program.

For this, press the HSK 1.4 “Cont. mill.” to open the technology “Contour milling”.

Press the VSK 2 “Contour”.

Press the VSK2 “Contour call” to open the input mask for the contour call.

7. Give the contour a name:

Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

The following line is inserted into the program:

N70 CYCLE62("STRAIGHTLINE",1,,)

Press VSK 2.8 to return to the VSK-bar 1.

8. Insert the cycle “Path milling” (CYCLE72) into the program.

Press the VSK 2 “Path milling“ to open the parame-ter mask for the “Path milling” cycle.

9. Enter following values into the input mask. Use the “Select” key on the MCP where indicated.

Section 2


Notes:


Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The following line will be inserted into the program.

N80 CYCLE72("",100,0,1,-15,5,0,0,0.15,0.1, 1,41,1,5,0.1,1,5,0,1,2,101,1001,100)

10 Program the following line:

N90 M30

11. At the end, program the contour for the straight line that you have called up in step 7.

Press the VSK 1 “Contour”. The vertical softkey bar with functions for calling up, or creating a new contour description opens.

Press the VSK1 “New contour” to insert a new con-tour description for the contour milling machining into the program.

12. The input window for a new contour opens. Fill in the following name into the name field:

Confirm your input by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

13. The contour editor for the input of the start point of the contour description opens.

Section 2


Notes:


14. Insert the following coordinates for the starting point:

Confirm by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

15. Program the contour with a straight line in Y-direction.

Press the VSK 1.3 “Straight line Y“. The input mask for the “Straight line Y” opens.

16. Enter the coordinates as follows:

Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The contour description is now finished.

17. Now, check the outline of the programmed contour.

In order to do this, use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard, to place the orange selection cursor on

the symbol, on the left side of the screen. The contour graphic is being displayed.

Section 2


Notes: 18. Complete the contour description by pressing the

VSK 8 “Accept”. The editor window opens and the following program lines are entered into the program:

N100 E_LAB_A_STRAIGHTLINE: ;#SM Z:2 ;#7__DlgK contour definition begin - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* G17 G90 DIAMOF;*GP* G0 X0 Y-100 ;*GP* G1 Y150 ;*GP* ;CON,0,0.0000,2,2,MST:0,0,AX:X,Y,I,J;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;S,EX:0,EY:-100;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LU,EY:150;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;#End contour definition end - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* E_LAB_E_STRAIGHTLINE: Notes: The lines marked as italic are shown optionally (see Settings - Show hidden lines).

19. Now simulate the machining of the workpiece.

Press the HSK 1.7 “Simulation” to start the simula-tion of the program. The control calculates the simulation and opens the animation of the machining in “top view” by default.



Notes:

Press the VSK 1.4 “3D view” to view the simulation in a 3-dimensional.



Notes: Description:

A more complex program (moulding plate) is to be created with the pro-gramGUIDE in ShopMill.

Objective:

The workpiece shown below is to be programmed and simulated.

Tool & technology data:

Milling cutter Ø 32 mm (CUTTER_D32) F 0,15 mm/tooth, V 120 m/min (roughing) F 0,08 mm/tooth, V 150 m/min (finishing) Milling cutter Ø 16 mm (CUTTER_D16) F 0,15 mm/tooth, V 120 m/min (roughing) Milling cutter Ø 8.0 mm (CUTTER_D8) F 0,10 mm/tooth, V 120 m/min (roughing) F 0,05 mm/tooth, V 150m/min (finishing)

Operations list: 1. Outer contour roughing + finishing 2. Spigot contour roughing + finishing 3. Contour pocket roughing 4. Contour pocket rest material roughing 5. Contour pocket wall + base finishing


R5

60

90

A

A

A-A

20

R36

20

5

R30

40

150

50

100

35

70

Section 3


Notes:


3.1 Programming example: Moulding plate

The following program is to be programmed with the technology “Contour milling”.

Create a new programGUIDE program in ShopMill, like described in sec-tion 2.1 in this module, with the name “DIN_CONTOURMILLING_2.MPF”.

1. Program the first line of the program with the follow-ing G code commands:

N10 G54 G17 G90

2. Insert a blank for the simulation.

Press the HSK 1.6 “Various“ to open the operating area “Various”.

Press the VSK 1 “Blank” to open the parameter win-dow for the blank.

3. Insert the following parameters for the blank:

Press the VSK 8 “Accept” to confirm your inputs. The following line is inserted into the program:

N20 WORKPIECE(,,,"BOX",64,0,-25,-80,-50,-100,100,150)

Section 3


Notes:


Press the VSK 1.8 “OK”. The line N30 T="CUTTER_D32" will be inserted into the program. Alternatively you can also program this line by hand.

5. Program now the following G code commands:

N40 M6 N50 S1194 M3 N60 G95 FZ=0.15 ; Feedrate per tooth

6. Insert a contour call into the program (CYCLE62), for the “moulding plate outside”.

To do this, press the HSK 1.4 “Cont. Mill” to open the technology “Contour milling”.


Press the VSK 2 “Contour call” to open the input mask for calling up a contour in the program. The input mask for naming the contour opens.

7. Fill out the name field like displayed below:

Confirm the contour name by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

The following line will be inserted into the program:

N70 CYCLE62("MOULDINGPLATE_OUTSIDE",1,,) Press VSK 2.8 to return to the VSK-bar 1.

8. Insert now the first “path milling cycle” (CYCLE72) into the program, for “roughing” the outside contour.

Press the VSK 2 “Path milling” to open the input mask for the CYCLE72 “Path milling”.

4. Insert now a tool call into the program.

First Press HSK 1 “Edit”. A vertical softkey-bar with additional functions shows.

Press the VSK 1.1 “Select tool”. The “Tool list” window opens. Use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard to select the tool “CUTTER_D32”.

Section 3


Notes:




N80 CYCLE72("",100,0,1,-15,5,0.3,0.3,0.15, 0.1,1,41,1,5,0.1,1,5,0,1,2,101,1001,100)

10. Program now the following G code command:

N90 S1942

11. Insert now the second path milling cycle (CYCLE72) into the program, for “finishing” the outside contour.

Press the VSK 2 “Path milling” to open the parame-ter mask for the path milling cycle (CYCLE72).

Enter following values into the input mask. Use the “Select” key on the MCP where indicated.


Section 3


Notes:


16. Give the contour a name as shown below: Confirm the contour name by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.


N120 CYCLE62("MOULDINGPLATE_SPIGOT",1,,) Press VSK 2.8 to return to the VSK-bar 1.

14. Give the contour a name as shown below:



N110 CYCLE62("MOULDINGPLATE_BOUNDARY",1,,) Press VSK 2.8 to return to the VSK-bar 1.

15. Insert another contour call (CYCLE62) into the program for the “moulding plate spigot”.



Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The following line will be inserted into the program.

N100 CYCLE72("",100,0,1,-15,5,0.3,0.3, 0.08,0.1,2,41,1,5,0.1,1,5,0,1,2,101,1001,100)

12. Insert another contour call into the program (CYCLE62), for the “spigot boundary”.

Press now the VSK 1 “Contour”.

Press the VSK 2 ”New contour” to insert a new con-tour description into the program. The input mask for naming the contour opens.

Section 3


Notes:



N130 CYCLE63("SPIGOT",1001,100,0,1,5,0.15,,50,2.5,0.3,0,0,0,0,,,,1,2,,,,0,201,111)

17. Insert now the first spigot milling cycle (CYCLE63), into the program, for “roughing”.

Press the VSK 6 “Spigot” to open the input mask for the CYCLE63 “Mill Spigot”.

18. Enter following values into the input mask. Use the “Select”-key on the MCP where indicated.

Note: With the blue “Select”-key the machining depth “Z1” can be set to “inc” or “abs” and the tool path step over “DXY” can be set to “%” of tool Ø or as value in “mm”.

19. Insert now another spigot milling cycle (CYCLE63) into the program for “wall finishing”

Press the VSK 6 “Spigot” to open the input mask for the CYCLE63 “Mill Spigot”.

Enter following values into the input mask. Use the “Select”-key on the MCP where indicated.

Section 3


Notes: Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.


N140 CYCLE63("SPIGOT_FINISH_WALL",1004,100,0,1,5,0.08,,50,2.5,0.3,0,0,0,0,,,,1,2,,,,0,201,111)



First Press HSK 1 “Edit”. A Vertical softkey-bar with additional functions opens.


Press the VSK 1.8 “OK”. The line N150 T="CUTTER_D16" will be inserted into the program. Alternatively you can also program this line by hand.


N160 M6 N170 S2388 M3 N180 G95 FZ=0.15; Feedrate per tooth

22. Insert another contour call (CYCLE62) into the pro-gram for the “Moulding plate pocket”.




23. Fill out the name field like displayed below:



N190 CYCLE62("MOULDINGPLATE_POCKET",1,,)

Press VSK 2.8 to return to the VSK-bar 1.

Section 3


Notes:


25. Insert now a “pocket milling cycle” (CYCLE63) into the program for “roughing” the pocket.

Press the VSK 4 “Pocket” to open the input mask for the CYCLE63 “Mill pocket”.

Enter following values into the input mask. Use the “Select” key on the MCP where indicated. Note: With the blue “Select”-key the machining depth “Z1” can be set to “inc” or “abs” and the tool path step over “DXY” can be set to % of tool Ø or a value in mm of the tool Ø. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The following line will be inserted into the program:

N200 CYCLE63("CONTOUR_POCKET",1011,100,-5,1,15,0.15,0.1,50,5,0.3,0.3,0,0,0,6,1.25,15,1,2,,,,0,101,111)


First Press HSK 1 “Edit”. Vertical softkey-bar with additional functions opens.


Press the VSK 1.1 “To program”. The line N210 T="CUTTER_D8" will be inserted into the program. Alternatively you can enter this line by hand.

Section 3


Notes:




N250 CYCLE63("POCKET_RESID_MAT",1001,100,0,1,20,0.1,,50,2.5,0.3,0.3,0,0,0,,,,,,"CUTTER_D16",1,,0,1101,11)

29. Insert another pocket milling cycle (CYCLE63) into the program for “base finishing”.



N260 S5968


N220 M6 N230 S4774 M3 N240 G95 FZ=0.1; Feed rate per tooth

28. Insert now a “Pocket residual material” cycle (CYCLE63) for residual material “roughing” of the pocket into the program.


Press the VSK 5 “Pocket res.mat.” to open the input mask for the CYCLE63 “Pocket residual material”.

Enter following values into the input mask. Use the “Select” key on the MCP where indicated. Note: With the blue “Select”-key the machining depth “Z1” can be set to “inc” or “abs” and the tool path step over “DXY” can be set to % of tool Ø or a value in mm of the tool Ø.

Section 3


Notes:


Enter following values into the input mask. Use the “Select” key on the MCP where indicated. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The following line will be inserted into the program:

N270 CYCLE63("POCKET_FINISH_BASE",1003,100,0,1,20,0.05,0.1,50,5,0.3,0.3,0,0,0,6,1.25,15,1,2,,,,0,101,111)

31. Insert another “pocket milling cycle” (CYCLE63) into the program for “Wall finishing”.



Section 3


Notes:



N280 CYCLE63("POCKET_FINISH_WALL",1004,100,0,1,20,0.05,0.1,50,5,0.3,0.3,0,0,0,6,1.25,15,1,2,,,,0,101,111)

32. Program the following G code command to end the program:

N290 M30

33. Now program the contour description for the “Moulding plate outside”, that you have called up in step 7 and in the program line N70 before.


Press the VSK ”New contour” to insert a new con-tour description for the machining operation.

The window for the contour name input opens. Assign the following name for the new contour.

Confirm your input by pressing VSK 8 “Accept”.

34. The contour description window opens, where you can enter a starting point for the new contour.

Section 3


Notes:


Enter the starting point coordinates as follows:

Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The contour description is being started and new functions to define the contour are available on the vertical softkey-bar on the right of the screen.

35. Start now the contour description with the first con-tour element “Straight line Y”.

Press the VSK 1.3 “Straight line Y”. The input mask for the straight line in Y-direction opens.

Enter the following coordinates:

Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The first contour element is to be created.

36. Extend the contour now, by adding a straight line in X-direction.

Press the VSK 1.2 “Straight line X“. The input mask for the straight line in X-direction opens.

Enter the following coordinates: Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

The contour description is extended by a new ele-ment.

37. Finish the contour description by adding a straight line in Y-direction.

Section 3


Notes:


Press the VSK 1.3 “Straight line Y” The input mask for the “Straight line Y” opens.


Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The contour description will be finished.

38. Check now the outline of the programmed contour.

For this, use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard to

place the orange selection cursor on the symbol on the left side of the screen. The following screen will be shown.

Section 3


Notes:


39. Now program the contour description for the “Moulding plate pocket”, that you have called up in step 22 and in the program line N180.



40. The window for the contour name input opens. Assign the following name for the new contour. Confirm your input by pressing VSK 8 “Accept”.

41. The contour description window opens, where you can enter a starting point for the new contour,

Finish now the contour description by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept” . The editor window opens and the following lines will be inserted into the program:

N300 E_LAB_A_MOULDINGPLATE_OUTSIDE: ;#SM Z:2 ;#7__DlgK contour definition begin - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* G17 G90 DIAMOF;*GP* G0 X-35 Y-100 ;*GP* G1 Y35 RND=15 ;*GP* X35 RND=15 ;*GP* Y-100 ;*GP* ;CON,0,0.0000,3,3,MST:0,0,AX:X,Y,I,J;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;S,EX:-35,EY:-100;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LU,EY:35;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;R,RROUND:15;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LR,EX:35;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;R,RROUND:15;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LD,EY:-100;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;#End contour definition end - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* E_LAB_E_MOULDINGPLATE_OUTSIDE:

Section 3


Notes:


42. Enter the starting point coordinates as follows: Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The contour description is being started and new functions to define the contour are available on the vertical softkey-bar on the right of the screen.

43. Start now the contour description with the first con-tour element “Straight line X”.

Press the VSK 1.2 “Straight line X”. The input mask for the straight line in X-direction opens.

Enter the following coordinates: Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The first contour element is being created.

44. Extend the contour now, by adding a straight line in Y-direction.

Press the VSK 1.3 “Straight line Y“. The input mask for the straight line in Y-direction opens.

Section 3


Notes:


. Enter the following coordinates: Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The contour description is extended by a new ele-ment.

45. Extend the contour now, by adding a circle in clock-wise direction.

Press the VSK 1.5 “Circle“. The input mask for the circle opens.

Enter the following coordinates: Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept” . The contour description is extended by a new element.

46. Extend the contour now, by adding a straight line in Y-direction.

Press the VSK 1.3 “Straight line Y“. The input mask for the straight line in Y-direction opens.

Section 3


Notes:




The contour description is extended by a new element.

47. Finish the contour description by adding a straight line in X-direction.

Press the VSK 1.2 “Straight line X” The input mask for the “Straight line X” opens.


The contour description of the pocket will be finished.


Section 3


Notes:


Finish now the contour description by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept” . The editor window opens and the following lines will be inserted into the program: N310 E_LAB_A_MOULDINGPLATE_POCKET: ;#SM Z:5 ;#7__DlgK contour definition begin - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* G17 G90 DIAMOF;*GP* G0 X0 Y-90 ;*GP* G1 X30 RND=5 ;*GP* Y-20 RND=5 ;*GP* G2 X-30 I=AC(0) J=AC(-.1) RND=5 ;*GP* G1 Y-90 RND=5 ;*GP* X0 ;*GP* ;CON,0,0.0000,6,6,MST:0,0,AX:X,Y,I,J;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;S,EX:0,EY:-90;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LR,EX:30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;R,RROUND:5;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LU,EY:-20;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;R,RROUND:5;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;ACW,DIA:0/235,EX:-30,EY:-20,RAD:36;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;R,RROUND:5;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LD,EY:-90;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;R,RROUND:5;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LR,EX:0;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;#End contour definition end - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* E_LAB_E_MOULDINGPLATE_POCKET:



Section 3


Notes:


49. Now program the contour description for the “Boundary”, that you have called up in step 13 and in the program line N110.



The window for the contour name input opens. Assign the following name for the new contour. Confirm your input by pressing VSK 8 “Accept”.


Enter the starting point coordinates as follows: Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The contour description is being started and new functions to define the contour are available on the vertical softkey-bar on the right of the screen.

51. Start now the contour description with the first con-tour element “Straight line Y”.

Section 3


Notes:


53. Extend the contour now, by adding a Straight line in Y-direction.

Press the VSK 1.3 “Straight line Y”. The input mask for the “straight line Y” opens.

52. Extend the contour now, by adding a Straight line in X-direction.

Press the VSK 1.2 “Straight line X“. The input mask for the “straight line X” opens.







The first contour element is being created.


Section 3


Notes:




54. Finish the contour description by adding a straight line in X-direction.

Press the VSK 1.2 “Straight line X” The input mask for the “Straight line X” opens.


Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The contour description of the “Boundary” will be finished.


Section 3


Notes:


56. Now program the contour description for the “Moulding plate spigot”, that you have called up in step 7 and in the program line N120.



. The window for the contour name input opens. Assign the following name for the new contour: Confirm your input by pressing VSK 8 “Accept”.


Finish now the contour description by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept” . The editor window opens and the following lines will be inserted into the program: N320 E_LAB_A_BOUNDARY: ;#SM Z:2 ;#7__DlgK contour definition begin - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* G17 G90 DIAMOF;*GP* G0 X-30 Y-100 ;*GP* G1 Y40 ;*GP* X30 ;*GP* Y-100 ;*GP* X-30 ;*GP* ;CON,0,0.0000,5,5,MST:0,0,AX:X,Y,I,J;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;S,EX:-30,EY:-100;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LU,EY:40;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LR,EX:30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LD,EY:-100;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LL,EX:-30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;#End contour definition end - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* E_LAB_E_BOUNDARY:

Section 3


Notes:


58. Start now the contour description with the first con-tour element a “Circle” in clockwise direction.

Press the VSK 1.5 “Circle“. The input mask for the circle opens.


The contour description is extended by a new ele-ment.

Enter the starting point coordinates as follows: Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

The contour description is being started and new functions to define the contour are available on the vertical softkey-bar on the right of the screen.

Section 3


Notes:




Enter the following coordinates: Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The contour description is extended by a new ele-ment.

60. Extend the contour now, by adding a circle in clock-wise direction.

Press the VSK 1.5 “Circle“. The input mask for the “circle” opens.


Section 3


Notes:






62. Finish the contour description by adding a circle in clockwise direction.

Press the VSK 1.3 “Circle” The input mask for the “Straight line X” opens.

Enter the following coordinates: Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The contour description of the “Spigot” is now finished.

Section 3


Notes:




Finish now the contour description by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept” . The editor window opens and the following lines will be inserted into the program: N330 E_LAB_A_MOLDINGPLATE_SPIGOT: ;#SM Z:5 ;#7__DlgK contour definition begin - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* G17 G90 DIAMOF;*GP* G0 X0 Y-30 ;*GP* G2 X-20 Y-22.361 I=AC(0) J=AC(0) ;*GP* G1 Y22.361 ;*GP* G2 X20 I=AC(0) J=AC(0) ;*GP* G1 Y-22.361 ;*GP* G2 X0 Y-30 I=AC(0) J=AC(-0) ;*GP* ;CON,0,0.0000,6,6,MST:0,0,AX:X,Y,I,J;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;S,EX:0,EY:-30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;ACW,DIA:207/15,EX:-20,CX:0,RAD:30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LU,EY:22.361;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;ACW,DIA:7/215,EX:20,CX:0,RAD:30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LD,EY:-22.361;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;ACW,DIA:0/35,EX:0,EY:-30,RAD:30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;#End contour definition end - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* E_LAB_E_MOLDINGPLATE_SPIGOT:

Section 3


Notes:


Program overview “DIN_COUNTOURMILLING_2.MPF” after comple-tion of all inputs. N10 G54 G17 G90 N20 WORKPIECE(,,,"BOX",64,0,-25,-80,-50,-100,100,150) N30 T="CUTTER_D32" N40 M6 N50 S1194 M3 N60 G95 FZ=0.15 N70 CYCLE62("MOULDINGPLATE_OUTSIDE",1,,) N80 CYCLE72("",100,0,1,-15,5,0.3,0.3,0.15,0.1,1,41,1,5,0.1,11,5,0,1,2,101,1011,100) N90 S1942 N100 CYCLE72("",100,0,1,-15,5,0.3,0.3,0.08,0.1,2,41,1,5,0.1,1,5,0,1,2,101,1011,100)

N110 CYCLE62("BOUNDRY",1,,) N120 CYCLE62("MOLDINGPLATE_SPIGOT",1,,) N130 CYCLE63("SPIGOT_ROUGHING",1001,100,0,1,5,0.15,,50,2.5,0.3,0,0,0,0,,,,1,2,,,,0,201,111) N140 CYCLE63("SPIGOT_FINISH_WALL",1004,100,0,1,5,0.08,,50,2.5,0.3,0,0,0,0,,,,1,2,,,,0,201,111)

N150 T="CUTTER_D16" N160 M6 N170 S2388 M3 N180 G95 FZ=0.15 N190 CYCLE62("MOULDINGPLATE_POCKET",1,,) N200 CYCLE63("POCKET_ROUGHING",1011,100,-5,1,15,0.15,0.1,50,5,0.3,0.3,0,0,0,6,1.25,15,1,2,,,,0,101,111)

N210 T="CUTTER_D8" N220 M6 N230 S4766 M3 N240 G95 FZ=0.1 N250 CYCLE63("POCKET_RESID_MAT",1001,100,0,1,20,0.1,,50,2.5,0.3,0.3,0,0,0,,,,,,"CUTTER_D16",1,,0,1101,11) N260 S5968 N270 CYCLE63("POCKET_FINISH_BASE",1003,100,0,1,20,0.05,0.1,50,5,0.3,0.3,0,0,0,6,1.25,15,1,2,,,,0,101,111) N280 CYCLE63("POCKET_FINISH_WALL",1004,100,0,1,20,0.05,0.1,50,5,0.3,0.3,0,0,0,6,1.25,15,1,2,,,,0,101,111)

N290 M30

N300 E_LAB_A_MOULDINGPLATE_OUTSIDE: ;#SM Z:2 ;#7__DlgK contour definition begin - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* G17 G90 DIAMOF;*GP* G0 X-35 Y-100 ;*GP* G1 Y35 RND=15 ;*GP* X35 RND=15 ;*GP* Y-100 ;*GP* ;CON,0,0.0000,4,4,MST:0,0,AX:X,Y,I,J;*GP*;*RO*;*HD ;S,EX:-35,EY:-100;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LU,EY:35;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;R,RROUND:15;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LR,EX:35;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;R,RROUND:15;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LD,EY:-100;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;#End contour definition end - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* E_LAB_E_MOULDINGPLATE_OUTSIDE:

Section 3


Notes:


N310 E_LAB_A_MOULDINGPLATE_POCKET: ;#SM Z:5 ;#7__DlgK contour definition begin - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* G17 G90 DIAMOF;*GP* G0 X0 Y-90 ;*GP* G1 X30 RND=5 ;*GP* Y-20 RND=5 ;*GP* G2 X-30 I=AC(0) J=AC(-.1) RND=5 ;*GP* G1 Y-90 RND=5 ;*GP* X0 ;*GP* ;CON,0,0.0000,6,6,MST:0,0,AX:X,Y,I,J;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;S,EX:0,EY:-90;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LR,EX:30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;R,RROUND:5;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LU,EY:-20;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;R,RROUND:5;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;ACW,DIA:0/235,EX:-30,EY:-20,RAD:36;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;R,RROUND:5;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LD,EY:-90;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;R,RROUND:5;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LR,EX:0;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;#End contour definition end - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* E_LAB_E_MOULDINGPLATE_POCKET: N320 E_LAB_A_BOUNDARY: ;#SM Z:2 ;#7__DlgK contour definition begin - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* G17 G90 DIAMOF;*GP* G0 X-30 Y-100 ;*GP* G1 Y40 ;*GP* X30 ;*GP* Y-100 ;*GP* X-30 ;*GP* ;CON,0,0.0000,5,5,MST:0,0,AX:X,Y,I,J;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;S,EX:-30,EY:-100;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LU,EY:40;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LR,EX:30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LD,EY:-100;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LL,EX:-30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;#End contour definition end - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* E_LAB_E_BOUNDARY: N330 E_LAB_A_MOLDINGPLATE_SPIGOT: ;#SM Z:5 ;#7__DlgK contour definition begin - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* G17 G90 DIAMOF;*GP* G0 X0 Y-30 ;*GP* G2 X-20 Y-22.361 I=AC(0) J=AC(0) ;*GP* G1 Y22.361 ;*GP* G2 X20 I=AC(0) J=AC(0) ;*GP* G1 Y-22.361 ;*GP* G2 X0 Y-30 I=AC(0) J=AC(-0) ;*GP* ;CON,0,0.0000,6,6,MST:0,0,AX:X,Y,I,J;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;S,EX:0,EY:-30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;ACW,DIA:207/15,EX:-20,CX:0,RAD:30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LU,EY:22.361;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;ACW,DIA:7/215,EX:20,CX:0,RAD:30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LD,EY:-22.361;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;ACW,DIA:0/35,EX:0,EY:-30,RAD:30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;#End contour definition end - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* E_LAB_E_MOLDINGPLATE_SPIGOT:

Section 3


Notes:


64. Start the simulation of the program.

Press the HSK 1.7 “Simulation” to open the simula-tion window. The control calculates the simulation and shows the simulation by default in the “top view”.

Press the VSK 1.4 “3D view“ to run the simulation in a 3D view.

Section 3


Notes:

Section End



Measurement milling

1 Brief description


Working through this module you become familiar with the technology “Measurement milling” by pro-gramming two G-code programs with the programGUIDE in ShopMill.

Description of the module: This module shows the efficient measuring of the top side of a workpiece, as well as the measuring of the 4 edges of a rectangular workpiece

B656

Content:



B656

B656

Notes :


Measure milling programGUIDE:

START

Simple programming

example

Complex programming

example

Measure milling programGUIDE:

END

Measure milling - programGUIDE: Description

This module shows the efficient measuring of the top side of a workpiece, as well as the measuring of the 4 edges of a rectangular workpiece


Notes:



A new programGUIDE program can be created from within all operating modes as follows:

1. Press the “Program Manager”-key on the keyboard. The program manager is opened directly.

- OR -





4. Press the VSK 4 “programGUIDE G code” to open the input mask for creating a new G code program. Enter a name for the program in the “Name” field, e.g. “DIN_MEASURING_1.MPF” and accept with pressing the VSK 8 “OK”. The program is loaded to the editor.

Description:

A simple measuring movement on the top side of the work piece is to be programmed with the programGUIDE in ShopMill.

Aim:

A new G code program is to be created and opened in the editor window. The G code lines and the measuring cycle are to be programmed and the program is to be simulated For this, the data shown below is to be used:

Tool data: 3D-Probe (3D_PROBE)

Section 2


Notes:


2.2 Programming example: Measuring a surface

The following program, with a simple call up of a measuring cycle (CYCLE978), is to be programmed with the programGUIDE in ShopMill:


N100 G54 G17 G90

2. Insert a blank for the simulation into the program.


Press the VSK 1 “Blank” to open the parameter mask for the “Blank input”.


Confirm your inputs with pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The following line is inserted into the program:

N110 WORKPIECE(,,"","RECTANGLE",0,0,-50,-80,70,70)

4. Insert now a measuring probe into the program.

Press the HSK 1 “Edit” to open the operating area Edit.

Press the VSK 1.1 “Select tool”. The tool list window opens.

Section 2


Notes:

Place the orange selection cursor on the tool “3D_PROBE” by using the blue cursor keys on the keyboard an press the VSK 1.8 „OK“. The program line N120 T="3D_PROBE" is inserted into the program.


N130 M6 N140 G0 Z100 N150 G0 X0 Y0 N160 G0 Z10

6. Program now the measuring cycle (CYCLE978):

Press the “Extend”-key on the operator panel in or-der to switch to the horizontal softkey bar 2. The horizontal softkey bar 2 opens.

Press the HSK 2.6 “Measurem. milling”. The work area “Measurement milling” with extended measuring functions opens.

Press the VSK 4 “Workpiece measure”. A vertical softkey bar with functions for measuring workpieces opens.

Press the VSK 4 “Plane”. The input window for the cycle “1-pt. Meas./CYCLE978” opens.


Accept your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “OK”.



Notes: The following lines are inserted into the program:

_MVAR=100 _SETVAL=0 _PRNUM=1 _MA=3 _KNUM=1 _FA=5 _TSA=1 _VMS=0 _NMSP=1 _EVNUM=0 CYCLE978

11. Program the program end with the following G code command:

N170 M30

12. At the end, simulate the machining of the workpiece.

Switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1, by pressing the “Extend”-key on the operator panel.

Press the HSK 1.7 “Simulation” to start the simula-tion of the program. The control calculates the simulation parameters and opens the simulation in the simulation window in “Top view”.

To view the simulation in 3-D press the VSK 1.4 “3D view”.



Notes:



Notes: Description:

A more complex measurement movement on the top side and the 4 edges of the work piece is to be programmed with the programGUIDE in Shop-Mill.

A new G code program is to be created and opened in the editor window. The G code lines and the milling cycle are to be programmed and the pro-gram is to be simulated For this, the data shown below are to be used:

Tool data: 3D-Probe (3D_PROBE)

3.1 Programming example: Measuring edges

The following program with the call up of two measuring cycles is to be programmed.

For this, create a new programGUIDE G code program, like described in section 2.1. Give the program the following name: “DIN_MEASURING_2.MPF“.


N100 G54 G17 G90

2. Insert now a blank for the simulation into the pro-gram.


Press the VSK 1 “Blank” to open the parameter win-dow for the blank input.



Notes:


Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The following line is inserted into the program:

N110 WORKPIECE(,,"","RECTANGLE",0,0,-50,-80,70,70)

4. Insert now a measuring probe into the program.

Press the HSK 1 “Edit” to open the operating area Edit.

Press the VSK 1.1 “To program”. The tool list window in the operating area “Parameter” opens. Use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard to select the tool “3D_PROBE“.

Press the VSK 1.8 “OK”. The program line N120 T="3D_PROBE" Is inserted into the program. Optionally you can program the tool by hand.


N130 M6 N140 G0 Z10 N150 G0 X0 Y0

6. Program now the measurement cycle (CYCLE978):

Press the “Extend”-key on the operator panel in or-der to switch to the horizontal softkey bar 2. The horizontal softkey bar 2 opens.

Press the VSK 2.6 “Measurem. milling”. The work area “Measurement milling” with extended measuring functions opens .

Press the VSK 4 “Workpiece measure”. A vertical softkey bar with functions for measuring workpieces opens.

Press the VSK 4 “Plane”. The input window for the cycle “1-pt. Meas./CYCLE978” opens.



Notes: 7. Insert the following values into the parameter mask:

Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “OK“. The following lines are inserted into the program:

_MVAR=100 _SETVAL=0 _PRNUM=1 _MA=3 _KNUM=1 _FA=5 _TSA=1 _VMS=0 _NMSP=1 _EVNUM=0 CYCLE978

8. Program now the CYCLE977 to measure the edges of the workpiece.

Press the VSK 4 “Workpiece measure”. The vertical softkey bar with different functions for measuring workpieces opens.

Press the VSK 1.7 “Extend” to open the vertical soft-key bar 2, with more functions for measuring work-pieces

Here, press the VSK 2.2 “Rectangle” The input window for the cycle „Meas.rectang/CYCLE977” opens.



Notes:


Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “OK“. The following line is inserted into the program:

_MVAR=106 _SETV[0]=100 _SETV[1]=100 _PRNUM=1 _KNUM=1 _FA=10 _TSA=1 _VMS=0 _NMSP=1 _ID=-20 CYCLE977

10. At last, program the end of the program with the fol-lowing G code command:

N160 M30

11. Simulate now the measuring of the workpiece.

Switch back to the horizontal softkey bar 1, by press-ing the “Extend”-key on the operator panel.

Press the HSK 1.6 „Simulation“ to start the simula-tion of the program. The control calculates the simulation parameters and opens the simulation in the simulation window in “Top view”. First, the top side of the workpiece is measured, then successively the edges.



Notes:

To view the simulation in 3-D press the VSK 1.4 “3D view”.



Notes:



Basics of programming with ShopMill

1 Brief description


Working with this module you will learn the basics of creating ShopMill sequential programs.


This module explains the general structure of a ShopMill program which includes the program header, the program block and the program ending. In addition to this, the programming of chained programming blocks (sequential programs), the functions of the “Editor”, as well as the functions “Various”, Simulation” and “NC Execute” will be described.

B600

Content:

Basics Creating ShopMill programs Editor Various Simulation NC Execute


B600

B600

Notes :


Basics of programming with Shopmill: Description

This module explains the general structure of a ShopMill program which includes the program header, the program block and the program end-ing. In addition to this, the programming of chained programming blocks (sequential pro-grams), the functions of the “Editor”, as well as the functions “Various”, Simulation” and “NC Execute” will be described.

Basics of program-ming with Shopmill:

START

Basics

Creating ShopMill programs

Editor

Various

Simulation

NC Execute

Basics of program-ming with Shopmill:

END


Notes:

2. 1 Programming with ShopMill

ShopMill offers the option to create NC programs directly on the control in the manner of chained sequential block programs. It also offers the option to program G-code programs directly, with additional ShopMill functionality. Note:

The creation of G code programs under ShopMill is described in detail in module - B604 „Basics of programming programGUIDE“.

The advantage of programming a ShopMill program lies in the graphical guiding of the programming process in the editor.

The following functions are available for this task:

Technology oriented program step selection (technology/cycles) using softkeys

Input masks and windows for parameters, with animated help graphics

Context sensitive online help for every input mask and window

Support for the contour input (geometric processor)

ShopMill programs can be represented in different views:

As a work plan, showing the program header, the programming steps with their linkages (chains) and the end of the program.

Basics Section 2


Notes:

Basics

As a programming graphic in the graphic view (with activated VSK 3 “Graphic view”): The workpiece or machining step are shown as an out-line graphic in side view or top view. The marked program block in the work plan is shown with a different colour.

As a parameter mask with a help graphic in 3-D, or a simulation of the machining step in side view or top view. If available, the view changes continuously from Help picture to anima-tion.

The animated help graphics are displayed always in the correct position to the adjusted coordinate system. The parameters are dynamically over-layed into the graphic and are highlighted in a different colour.

Section 2


Notes:

2.2 The work plan

Main aspect of programming with ShopMill is the “Work plan” in the editor window. The structure of the “Work plan” is as below:

Program header (with the base settings of the program like measuring units, work offset, blank dimensions, retraction plane, safety distance etc.)

Program blocks (the program steps with the cycles)

End of program (see also picture below)

2.2.1 Program header

The program header (also see section 2.2) contains the dimensions of the blank for the simulation, as well as the parameters that influence the whole program, as for example:

Work offset

Dimension units (mm/inch)

Tool axis X, Y or Z

Retraction plane, safety distance and machining sense

In the work plan, the program header is at the beginning of the program

and is labelled with the icon , and the signature “Program header” and the corresponding parameters (see picture below).

2.2.2 Program blocks

Program blocks are programmed working steps, which are shown in the editor in single rows marked with an icon and text representing the corre-sponding technology and the entered parameters (alike the picture be-low).

2.2.3 Sequential program blocks

For the functions “Drill”, “Mill”, and “Contour milling”, technology blocks and contours are programmed separately. These pro-gramming blocks are automatically linked by the control and connected in the work plan with square brackets. Technology blocks are blocks that describe in which manner the machining is to be processed, such as for instance centring and drilling. Position blocks or geometry blocks respectively, describe the positions where machining takes place, e.g. holes on a bolt hole pattern. A sequential program block (chain) is only consid-ered closed, if one ore more Technology blocks, end with a Position block. A error massage will be output if one of these elements is missing.

Basics Section 2


Notes:

Basics

2.3 Navigation in the editor window

For a fast and comfortable navigation within a sequential program and the parameter masks you can use the blue cursor keys.

With the blue “cursor-up” key on the keyboard you can navigate upwards in the program editor and the parameter masks.

With the blue “cursor-down”-key on the keyboard you can navigate downwards in the program editor and the parameter masks.

The arrow symbol (extend-symbol) on the right side of program block line in the editor window indicates that you can enter the parameter input mask by pressing the “cursor-to-the-right” key.

The “cursor-to-the-right” key opens the parameter mask of the corresponding program block.

The “cursor-to-the-left” key closes the parameter mask of the corresponding program block and brings you back to the editor window, displaying the ShopMill program steps.

2.2.5 G code programming steps

In the work plan, G code program blocks can also be inserted. For this, you must place the cursor on the desired position in the editor window, where you want to insert the G code block. Pressing the yellow “INSERT”-key on the keyboard, opens a new orange command line, marked with the letter G and a blinking cursor where you can enter G code commands. With the blue “cursor up” or “cursor down” the block can be closed. The input value is now accepted. From a G code line you can not switch to a parameter mask window.

2.2.4 End of program

The program end indicates to the control the end of the processing of the workpiece. Besides, you can define to repeat the program for multiple workpieces. The program end is marked with the icon and the text “End of program” and if selected with the text “Repetition = Yes” (see pic-ture below).

The icons of these blocks are marked by a square bracket, right beside the Technology block icon, from the beginning of the program chain to the end of the program chain. Every technology is represented by a unique icon. This icon and its chaining are also displayed on the left edge of the screen in the programming graphics and parameter input masks. (here centering, drilling and position circle).

Section 2


Notes:

Creating ShopMill programs

3.1 Creating a new ShopMill program

A new ShopMill program can be created from the operating modes “JOG”, “MDA” and “AUTO” as follows:

Press the “Program Manager“ key on the keyboard. The window for creating and manage programs opens directly.

See module B575 - „Operating area Program Manager“.

- OR -

Press the “MENU SELECT“ key on the operator panel (OP).

Press the yellow HSK 4 “Program Manager“. The window for creating and managing programs opens.

- THEN -

Select a storage drive by pressing the horizontal softkey “NC”, “Local drive” or “USB” where you want to create the program. Move the orange cursor with the blue cursor-keys to the directory of your choice.

For the navigation process refer to the modules B566 - “Operating elements“ or B575 - “Operating area Program Manager“.

Press the VSK 2 “New”. The vertical softkey bar with functions for creating new programs opens.

Press the VSK 3 “ShopMill”, to open the input mask for creating a new sequential ShopMill program, like dis-played below.

Section 3


Notes: 3.2 Defining the program header

After entering a name for the program and pressing the VSK 8 “OK” the mask for entering the parameters for the program header opens automati-cally. Here you can enter parameters for the measuring units, the work off-set, blank shape, blank dimensions, retraction plane, safety distance, ma-chining sense and the retract position patterns (see picture below).

Enter the appropriate parameter values and confirm with pressing the VSK 8 “Accept” or abort with pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”, to switch back to the editor window. The view changes to the work plan view in the editor window. Program header and program end are automatically programmed.

Creating ShopMill programs Section 3


Notes:

3.3 Creating program blocks

Place the orange cursor on the program header block, or any other pro-gram block after which you want to insert a new program block. Select a technology you want to apply like “Drilling”, “Milling”, “Contour milling”, “Straight Circle”. For example select “Milling” -> “Pocket” -> “Rectangular pocket” to open the corresponding parameter window and help screen by means animation for this technology.

Enter the appropriate parameter values and confirm with pressing the VSK 8 “Accept” or abort with pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”, to switch back to the editor window. The new program block is inserted automatically into the editor window. The “cursor-to-the-right” key opens the parameter win-dow anytime, to change the input parameters you have done before.

If necessary enter more program steps like described above.



Notes: 3.4 End of program

The program block “End of program” is already created automatically upon creation of a new program. if you want to make changes to the pro-gram end, you have to place the orange selection cursor with the blue ar-row keys on the “End of program” block and extend the display by press-ing the “cursor-to-the-right” key. The parameter input mask for “END of program” opens as displayed below. You can set here , if the program is to be repeated for multiple workpieces.

Select “Yes” if you want to repeat the workpiece and confirm with pressing the VSK 8 “Accept” or abort with pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel” to switch back to the editor window. The new values entered are updated automatically .



Notes:

With the editor you can create, supplement and change part programs.

4.1 Selecting the function “Edit“

The function “Editor” can be opened from the operating mode “JOG”, “MDA“ and “AUTO“.

By pressing the “PROGRAM“-key on the keyboard the operating area “Program” opens, showing the last program you have worked on.

- OR -

Press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator panel (OP).

Press the yellow HSK 3 “Program“ to switch to the operating area “Program“. The operating area “Program” opens, showing the last program you have worked on (see picture be-low). If not selected, press the HSK 1 “Edit”. If no program was loaded after starting the control, the “program manager” window opens first, after pressing the HSK 3 “Program”. Here you can select either a existing ShopMill-program or create a new one. See module - B574 “Operating area Program” und module - B576 “Operating area Program Manager“.

The following softkeys with their corresponding functions are now available in the vertical softkey bar:

Edit Section 4


Notes: 4.2 Vertical softkey bar 1 and 2


In a ShopMill program the tool call is inside the cycle mask. The function “Select tool” is available for ShopMill programs under the technologies “Drilling”, Milling, “Contour milling”, “Straight Circle” or in a corresponding program block with tool utilization. This is the reason for VSK 1.1 “Select tool” being grayed out (inactive) as long their is no G code line inserted. (see section 2.2.5)

By pressing the VSK 1.2 “Graphic view” you can see the simulated workpiece from a top view as an outline drawing (see section 2.1, picture programming graphic).

By pressing the VSK 1.3 “Search“ you can search for any text in the program blocks. A search window opens where you can enter a search string. You can continue searching afterwards (see section 4.3).

By pressing the VSK 1.4 “Mark” you can mark one or several program blocks in order to copy or cut (delete) them.

By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Copy” you can copy one or several program blocks to the internal memory of the control, to paste them to a different location in the active program or to another program.

By pressing the VSK 1.6 “Paste“ copied or cut program blocks can be inserted behind the selected program block (actual cursor position). You can paste the block to the active program as well as to another ShopMill pro-gram.

By pressing the VSK 1.7 “Cut” you can cut out one or several program blocks, to paste them later somewhere in a program or to delete them. Cut out program blocks remain in the clip board and can be inserted again with the VSK 1.6 “Paste” (see VSK 1.6 “Paste“).

By pressing the VSK 1.8 “Extend“ the extended vertical softkey bar 2 will be displayed.

By pressing the VSK 2.3 “Renumbering” you can assign new numbers for every program step in the Work plan window. (see section 4.4)

By pressing the VSK 2.6 “Settings“ you can change the settings for the editor (see section 5.3)

By pressing the VSK 2.7 “Exit” you close the editor with the active program.


Edit Section 4


Notes:

4.3 Search

With the function “Search” you can search for any text in a sequential pro-gram and even replace the text with other text.

4.3.1 Selecting the function “Search”

By pressing the VSK1.3 “Search” the search window opens like displayed below, with the following func-tions available in the vertical softkey bar.



By pressing the VSK 1 “Go to start” the cursor will be positioned on the first line of the program.

By pressing the VSK 2 “Go to end” the cursor will be positioned on the last line of the program.

By pressing the VSK4 “Search” the search mask opens, where you can decide to search for complete words, select the search direction (forward/backwards) and enter the search text.

By pressing the VSK5 “Find + replace” the “Search and replace” mask opens where you can decide to search for complete words, select the search direc-tion (forward/backwards), enter the search text and enter the text you want to use for the replacement.

With pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel” you can abort the search process.

By pressing the VSK 8 “OK“ you start a search run with the above mentioned search criteria.

Edit Section 4


Notes:

Edit

4.4 Renumbering

With the function “Renumbering” you can renumber the program steps in the editor window with an increment you can select here.

4.4.1 Selecting the function “Renumbering”

By pressing the VSK 2.3 “Renumbering” the input mask for the renumbering settings of blocks opens.

4.4.2 Parameters for “Renumbering”

Parameters Meaning

First block number The first block number you want to start with. The values shown here by default can be adjusted under the function “Settings” in the input field “First block number” (see section 4.5).

Increment The Increment between the program blocks. The values shown here by default can be adjusted under the function “Settings” in the input field “Increment” (see section 4.5).

Section 4


Notes:

Edit

4.5 Settings

With the function “Settings” you can change the settings for the editor.

4.5.1 Selecting the function “Settings”

By pressing the VSK2.6 “Settings” the input mask for the editor settings opens.

4.5.2 Parameters for “Settings”

Parameters Meaning

Number automati-cally (Yes/No)

Program blocks will be numbered automatically. Deactivating this parameter, hides the following two parameters too.

First block number Block number of first block.

Increment Increment between block numbers.

Show hidden lines (Yes/No)

Show hidden line (with the ID ;*HD).

Display block end as symbol (Yes/No)

A symbol is displayed at the end of each block.

Move horizontally (Yes/No)

Blocks are displayed in one line with a scroll bar at the right side.

Save automatically (only local and ex-ternal drives) (Yes/No)

Changes are saved automatically without a query.

Section 4


Notes: 5.1 Selecting the function “Various“

The function “Various” can be selected from the operating mode “JOG”, “MDA” or “AUTO” in the operating area “Program” as follows:

Press the HSK 1.6 “Various“ to switch over to the function “Various”. A screen similar to the screen shown below opens.

The following functions with their corresponding softkeys are displayed in a vertical softkey bar:



By pressing the VSK 1.1 “Settings“ an input mask opens where you can change the settings for the blank (see section 5.3 “Settings”).

By pressing the VSK 1.4 “HighSpeed settings“ the input mask for adjusting the settings for the optimal speed in relation to the machining method opens (see section 5.4).

By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Transformations” the ver-tical softkey bar with the functions for the coordinate transformations is displayed (see section 5.5).

By pressing the VSK 1.6 “Subprogram” the input mask for loading a subprogram to the main program opens (see section 5.8).

By pressing the VSK 1.8 “Extend“ the vertical soft-key bar 2 opens.

Various Section 5


Notes:

5.3 Settings

Each parameter defined in the program header, except the measuring units, can be changed everywhere in the program. The settings in the program header are constant, as long as they are not altered later in the program. For example you can define a new blank in a sequential program later on, if during a simulation run there is the need to change the visible view on the workpiece. This can be reasonable within the functions “Work offset” “Coordinate transformation” “Cylinder barrel transformation” and “Swivelling”. With that you can program the above mentioned functions first, and then define the blank afterwards. The function “Settings” can be opened as follows:

5.3.1 Selecting the function “Settings”

By pressing the VSK 1.1 “Settings” the following window for entering the parameters for the blank opens.

Display area Description (Continuation)

By pressing the VSK 2.3 “Repeat program” the ver-tical softkey bar with the function for repeating parts of programs opens (see section 5.7).


Various Section 5


Notes:

Various

5.3.2 Parameters for setting the blank

Parameter Meaning Help picture/animation

X0 1 corner point X

Y0 1 corner point Y

X1 (abs/ink) 2 corner point related to X0 (absolut or in-cremental)

Y1 (abs/ink) 2 corner point related to Y0 (absolut or in-cremental)

ZA Initial dimension

ZI (abs/ink) Finishing dimension related to ZA (absolut or incremental)

PL Machining plane:

G17

G18

G19

RP Retraction plane

SC Safety distance

Section 5


Notes:

Various

Parameter Meaning Help picture/animation (continuation)

Machining sense Down-cut

Up-cut

Retraction position pattern

RP: Liftmode before new infeed related to pa-rameter RP

Optimized: Lift mode before anew infeed, opti-mized

Section 5


Notes: 5.3.3 Changing the graphical view on the blank

The graphic view on the blank is adjustable under the functions “Edit”, Drill-ing”, “Milling”, “Contour milling”, “Various” and “Straight Circle” by pressing the softkey “Graphic view”. Within the function “Various” you can adjust the graphic settings with the Softkey “Graphic view” for the blank. Help pictures and animations are only displayed if the VSK 2 “Graphic view” is deselected and only in the side view. You can change the graphic view on the blank as follows:


2. By activating and deactivating the VSK 2 “Graphic view” you can switch the graphical representation of the blank, the help pictures and animations between 2 different views:

3D-/side view

A wireframe model

Various Section 5


Notes:

5.4 High Speed Settings

With the machining of free form surfaces, there are high demands on ma-chining speed as well as accuracy and surface finish. The optimal speed profile in conjunction with the machining method (roughing, pre-finishing, finishing) can be adjusted easily with the function “HighSpeed settings”. It is advisable to program the cycle in the technology part first, before pro-gramming the geometry part. Machining methods: With the function “HighSpeed settings” you can select from 3 different technological machining methods:

"roughing"

"pre-finishing"

"finishing"

"deselect" (default setting)

These four machining methods are associated directly with accuracy, ve-locity and surface quality of the contour path (see the triangle in the Help pictures). The operator/programmer can make an appropriate weighting by adjusting the tolerance value. Different tolerance values and technologies can be assigned to the four machining methods.

5.3.4 Changing the setting for the blank


2. Press the VSK 1 “Settings”.

3. Optionally change the graphic view for the blank be-tween 3D-/side view or wireframe model by pressing the VSK 2 “Graphic view”.

4. Enter the parameter values for the blank (see pa-rameter list in section 5.3.2).

5. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept” or abort with pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”. A new program block “Settings” is inserted in the program (see the picture below).

Various Section 5


Notes: 5.4.1 Selecting the function “HighSpeed settings“

By pressing the VSK 4 “HighSpeed settings“ the “High-speed Settings” screen opens.

The screen changes in intervals between Help picture and animation.

5.4.2 Parameter for „HighSpeed settings“

Parameter Help picture Animation

PL The parameter for the machining plane is optional and has to be activated by a machine datum.

Tolerance Tolerance values for the machining

Machining:

Roughing

Pre-finishing

Various Section 5


Notes:


Finishing

Deselect

none




3. Optionally change the graphic view for the blank be-tween sectional drawing/3-D model or wireframe model by pressing the VSK 2 “Graphic view”.

4. Enter the parameter values for “Tolerance” and “Machining”. Press the VSK 8 “Accept” to accept your inputs or abort by pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”. A new program block “High-speed settings” is in-serted into the program (see picture below).

Various


Finishing

Deselect

none





4. Enter the parameter values for “Tolerance” and “Machining”. Press the VSK 8 “Accept” to accept your inputs or abort by pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”. A new program block “High-speed settings” is in-serted into the program (see picture below).

Section 5


Notes: 5.5 Transformations

To make programming easier, you can transform the coordinate system. Use this function, for example, to rotate the coordinate system. Coordinate transformations only apply in the current program. You can define displacement, rotation, scaling or mirroring. You can select between a new or an additive coordinate transformation. In the case of a new coordinate transformation, all previously defined coordinate transformations are deselected. An additive coordinate transformation acts in addition to the currently se-lected coordinate transformations. Supported are:

Offset: For each axis, you can program an offset of the zero point.

Rotation: You can rotate every axis through a specific angle. A positive angle corresponds to a counter-clockwise rotation.

Scaling: You can specify a scale factor for the active machining plane as well as for the tool axis. The programmed coordinates are then multiplied by this factor. Note that the scaling always refers to the zero point of the workpiece. For example, if you increase the size of a pocket whose centre point does not coincide with the zero point, scaling will shift the centre of the pocket.

Mirroring: Furthermore, you can mirror all axes. Enter the axis to be mirrored in each case. Note that with mirroring, the travel direction of the cutting tool (conventional/climb) is also mirrored.

Various Section 5


Notes:

5.5.1 Selecting the function „Transformations“

By pressing the VSK 5 “Transformations“ the fol-lowing vertical softkey bar in the editor window opens.



By pressing the VSK 1 “Work offset” the parameter window for the work offset opens (see section 5.5.3).

By pressing the VSK 2 “Offset” the parameter win-dow for the offset opens (see section 5.5.4).

By pressing the VSK 3 “Rotation” the parameter window for the rotations opens (see section 5.5.5).

By pressing the VSK 4 “Scaling” the parameter win-dow for the scaling opens (see section 5.5.6).

By pressing the VSK 5 “Mirroring” the parameter window for the mirroring opens (see section 5.5.7).

The VSK 8 “Back” brings you back to the start screen of the function “Various”.

Various Section 5


Notes: 5.5.3 Work offset

You can call work offsets (G54, etc.) from any program. You can use these offsets, for example, when you want to machine workpieces with various blank dimensions using the same program. The offset will, in this case, adapt the workpiece zero to the new blank.

5.5.3.1 Selecting the function “Work offset”

By pressing the VSK 1 “Work offset” the input mask “work offset” opens.

5.5.3.2 Parameters for the work offset

Parameter Meaning

Work offset. Alternative work offsets

Basic ref. Basic Reference G500

G54 Storable Zero offset




Various Section 5


Notes:

5.5.3.3 Setting the work offset

1. In the operating area “Program“ and operation mode “JOG”, “MDA”, or “AUTO” press the HSK 6 “Various“ and the VSK5 “Transformations”.

2. Press the VSK 1 “Work offset”.


4. Select the work offset (Basic reference, G54, G55, G56 or G57). Press the VSK 8 “Accept” to confirm your selection or press the VSK 7 “Cancel” to abort. A new program block “Work offset” is inserted into the program in the editor window (see picture be-low).

5.5.4 Offset

Offsets apply only to the current program. Besides, you can select between a new and an additive offset. With a new offset, all offsets defined before are deselected. An additive offset works additional to the current selected offset. For every axis an offset can be programmed.

5.5.4.1 Selecting the function “Offset”

By pressing the VSK 2 “Offset” the input screen mask ”Offset” opens.

Various Section 5


Notes: 5.5.4.2 Parameters for the “Offset”

Parameters Description Help picture/Animation

Offset:

New Adds a new offset

Additive Adds an additive off-set

Axes: Unit

X Offset X-axis mm

Y Offset Y-axis mm

Z Offset Z-axis mm

5.5.4.3 Setting the “Offset”


2. Press the VSK 2 “Offset”.


4. Select the kind of offset “new” or “additive”. Enter the offset values for the different axes (X,Y,Z) in millimetre. Press the VSK 8 “Accept” to confirm your inputs or press the VSK 7 “Cancel” to abort. A new program block “Offset” is inserted into the program in the editor window (see picture below).

Various Section 5


Notes:

5.5.5 Rotation

Rotations apply only to the current program. Besides, you can select between a new and an additive rotation. With a new rotation, all rotations defined before are deselected. An additive rotation works additional to the current selected rotation. For every axis an rotational angle in degrees can be programmed. A positive angle means a rotation counter clockwise.

5.5.5.1 Selecting the function “Rotation“

By pressing the VSK 3 “Rotation“ the input screen mask “Rotation” opens.

5.5.5.2 Parameters for “Rotation”

Parameters Description Help picture/Animation

Rotation:

New Adds a new rotation

Various Section 5


Notes: Parameter Description Help picture/Animation

(continuation)

Rotation:

Additive Incremental rotation

Axes: Units

X Rotation around the

X-axis

mm

Y Rotation around the

Y- axis

mm

Z Rotation around the

Z-axis

mm

5.5.5.3 Setting the rotations


2. Press the VSK 3 “Rotation“.


4. Select if you want to add a “new” or a “additive” rotation. Enter the values for the rotation about the axes X, Y, und Z in degrees. Press the VSK 8 “Accept” to confirm your inputs or press the VSK 7 “Cancel” to abort. A new program block “Rotation” is inserted into the program in the editor window (see picture below).

Various Section 5


Notes:

5.5.6 Scaling

Scaling applies only to the current program. Besides, you can select be-tween a new and an additive scaling. With a new scaling, every scaling defined so far is deselected. An additive scaling works incremental to the current selected scaling. You can specify a scale factor for the active machining plane as well as for the tool axis. The programme coordinates are then multiplied by this factor. Note: Note that the scaling always refer to the zero point of the workpiece. For example, if you increase the size of a pocket whose centre point does not coincide with the zero point, scaling will shift the centre of the pocket.

5.5.6.1 Selecting the function “Scaling”

By pressing the VSK 4 “Scaling” the input screen mask “Scaling” opens.

5.9.2 Parameters for “Scaling”

Parameter Description Help picture/Animation

Scaling:

New Adds a new scaling

Various Section 5


Notes: Parameter Description Help picture/Animation

(continuation)

Scaling:

Additive Adds an additive scaling

Axes:

XY Scaling factor XY

Z Scaling factor Z

5.5.6.3 Setting the scaling


2. Press the VSK 4 „Scaling“.


4. Select whether the scaling “new” or “additive”. Insert the values for the scaling factor XY and Z. Press the VSK 8 “Accept” to confirm your inputs or press the VSK 7 “Cancel” to abort. A new program block “Rotation” is inserted into the program in the editor window (see picture below).

Various Section 5


Notes:

5.5.7 Mirroring

Mirroring applies only to the current program. Besides, you can select between a new and an additive mirroring. With a new mirroring, all mirror images defined so far are deselected. An additive mirroring works additional to the current selected mirroring. Furthermore it is possible to mirror all axes. Activate the axis to be mirrored in each case. Note: Note that with mirroring, the travel direction of the cutting tool (down-cut/up-cut) is also mirrored.

5.5.7.1 Selecting the function “Mirroring”

By pressing the VSK 5 “Mirroring” the input screen mask “Mirroring” opens.

5.5.7.2 Parameters for “Mirroring”

Parameter Description Help picture/Animation

Mirroring:

New Adds a new mirroring

Various Section 5


Notes: Parameters Description Help picture/animation

(continuation)

Mirroring:

Additive Adds an additive mir-roring

Axes:

X Mirroring for the X-axis (on/off)

Y Mirroring for the Y-axis (on/off)

Z Mirroring for the Z-axis (on/off)

5.5.7.3 Mirroring the axes


2. Press the VSK 5 “Mirroring”.


4. Select whether the Mirroring is “new” or “additive”. Switch on or off the axis that you want to have mir-rored. Press the VSK 8 “Accept” to confirm your inputs or press the VSK 7 “Cancel” to abort. A new program block “Mirroring” is inserted into the program in the editor window (see picture below).

Various Section 5


Notes:

5.6 Subprogram

If you require the same machining steps in the programming of different workpieces, you can define these machining steps in a separate subrou-tine. You can then call this subroutine in any program. Identical machining steps therefore only have to be programmed once. ShopMill does not differentiate between main program and subprogram. This means that you can call a "standard" sequential program or G code program as subprograms in another sequential program. In this subprogram, you can also call another subprogram. The maximum nesting depth is 8 subroutines. You cannot insert subroutines among blocks chained by the control. If you want to call a sequential control program as a subroutine, the program must already have been calculated once (load or simulate program in “AUTO” operating mode). This is not necessary for G code subroutines. The subroutine must always be stored in the NCK main memory (in a separate directory "XYZ" or in the "ShopMill", "Part programs", "Subprograms" directories). If you want to call a subprogram located on another drive, you can use G code command "EXTCALL".

Note: Please note that, when a subprogram is called, ShopMill evaluates the settings in the program header of the subroutine. These settings also remain active even after the subprogram has ended. If you wish to activate the settings from the program header for the main program again, you can make the settings again in the main program after calling the subprogram.

5.6.1 Selecting the function “Subprogram“

By pressing the VSK 3 “Subprogram” the input screen mask “Subprogram” opens.

Various Section 5


Notes:

Various

5.6.2 Inserting a subprogram

1. In the operating area “Program“ and operation mode “JOG”, “MDA”, or “AUTO” press the HSK 6 “Various“

2. Press the VSK 1.6 ”Subprogram”.

3. Optionally change the graphic view on the blank by pressing the VSK 2 “Graphic view”.

4. Enter the path to the subprogram folder and the name of the subprogram in the input mask. Press the VSK 8 “Accept” to confirm your inputs or press the VSK 7 “Cancel” to abort. A new program block “Execute” is inserted into the program in the editor window (see picture below).

5.7 Repeating program blocks

If certain steps in the machining of a workpiece have to be executed more than once, it is only necessary to program these steps once. ShopMill offers a function for repeating program blocks. You must mark the program blocks that you want to repeat with a start and end marker. You can then call these program blocks up to 9999 times again within a program. The markers must be unique, i.e. they must have different names. No names used in the NCK can be used for this. You can also set markers and repeats after creating the program, but not within chained program blocks. Note: It is also possible to use the same marker as the end marker of the preced-ing program blocks and as the start marker for the following program blocks.



By pressing the VSK 1 “Set Mark” the window for setting a start or end mark opens.

By pressing the VSK 2 “Repeat program” an input mask opens where you can specify the start and end marker which enclose the program parts you want to repeat.

5.7.1 Selecting the function “Repeat program”

By pressing the VSK 3 “Repeat Program” the follow-ing vertical softkey bar with the functions for repeat-ing program parts opens.

Section 5


Notes:

Various

5.7.3 Repeating a program block

1. In the operating area “Program“ and operation mode “JOG”, “MDA”, or “AUTO” press the HSK 6 “Various“

2. Press the VSK 1.8 “Extend” to open the extended vertical softkey bar 2.

3. Press the VSK 2.3 “Repeat program”.

4. Place the orange selection cursor on the program block before the program block that you want to re-peat.

5. Press the VSK 1 “Set Mark” to open the input screen mask for input of the start mark. In the “Set mark” input window, enter a unique name for the start mark (see the following picture).

With pressing the VSK 8 “Accept” a new program block “MARK1” is inserted into the work plan (see picture below).

6. Place the orange selection cursor on that program block in the editor window that shall be the last block in the repetition sequence.

7. Press the VSK 1 “Set mark” to open the input screen mask for input of the end mark. In the “Set mark” input window, enter a unique name for the end mark (see the following picture).

With pressing the VSK 8 “Accept” A new program block “MARK2” is inserted into the work plan (see picture below)..

Section 5


Notes: 8. Place the orange selection cursor on that block, after

that you want to repeat the program sequence.

9. Press the VSK 2.3 “Repeat program”. In the input mask enter the name for the start mark and the end mark as well as the number of repeti-tions.

Confirm your selection by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. A new program block “Repetition MARK1 MARK2” is inserted into the work plan (see picture below).

10. The program blocks between the marks will be re-peated during machining of the program.

Various Section 5


Notes:

ShopMill provides various extensive and detailed simulation functions for displaying the simulation of the machining. During simulation, the current program is calculated in its complete form and the result is displayed in graphic form. You can select the following modes of representation for simulation:

Top view

3-D view

Side view The simulation uses the correct proportions for the tools and workpiece contours. Cylindrical die-sinking cutters, bevel cutters, bevel cutters with corner rounding and tapered die-sinking cutters are dis-played as end milling tools. The traverse paths for the tools are shown in colour: Red line = tool is moving at rapid traverse Green line = tool is moving at machining feedrate In all views, a clock is displayed during graphical processing. The displayed machining time (in hours/minutes/seconds) indicates the ap-proximate time that would actually be required to execute the machining program on the machine (incl. tool change). If a program is interrupted during simultaneous recording, the clock stops. In addition, the current axis coordinates, the override, and the program block currently being executed are also displayed. The active tool with the cutting edge number and feedrate are also dis-played in the simulation. Transformations are displayed differently during simulation and simultaneous recording:

Coordinate transformations (translation, scaling, …) are displayed as programmed.

Cylinder surface transformations are displayed as a developed surface.

After swivel transformation, the previous machining operations are de-leted from the display and only machining of the swivelled plane is dis-played (viewing angle perpendicular to the swivelled plane).

Zero offsets (G54, etc.) do not alter the zero in the graphical display. This means that, in the case of multiple clamping, the machining opera-tions for each of the individual workpieces are plotted on top of one an-other.

Note: If you want to display a different portion of the workpiece from the one de-fined in ShopMill, you can define a new blank in the program (see section 5.3 in this module).



Notes: 6.1 Selecting the function “Simulation“

The function “Simulation” can be selected from the operating mode “JOG“, “MDA“ and “AUTO“ as follows:

With a program loaded, press the HSK 1.7 “Simulation“ to start a simulation run. The following screen opens. The simulation starts after a short computing time in the top view by default.

Press the VSK 1.4 “3D view” the simulated work-piece is displayed 3-dimesionally (see picture be-low).

The following functions will be available in the vertical softkey bar.



Notes:



By pressing the VSK 1.1 “Stop“ the simulation will be halted. The softkey will be replaced with the VSK 1.1 “Start”, in order to continue the simulation again.

By pressing the VSK 1.1 “Start” the simulation will be started or continued. The softkey will be replaced with the VSK “Stop”.

By pressing the VSK 1.1 “SBL“ the simulation will be processed block by block. This softkey replaces the softkey “Start”, if the VSK 4 “Single block” is acti-vated under the function “Program control”.

By pressing the VSK 1.2 “Reset“ the simulation will be aborted, and can be started again by pressing the VSK 1.1 “Start”.

The “Top view“ is activated by default and shows the simulation in a plan view from above

By pressing the VSK 1.4 “3D view“ the simulation will be shown in a 3-D view

By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Further views” the vertical softkey bar opens, with more options to adjust the view on the simulation process (see section 6.3).

By pressing the VSK 1.6 “Details“ the vertical soft-key bar opens, where you can adjust the level of de-tails that will be shown during the simulation (see section 6.4).

By pressing the VSK 1.7 “Program control” the ver-tical softkey bar opens, with further functions to con-trol the simulation run (see section 6.5).

By pressing the VSK 1.8 “Extend” the vertical soft-key bar 2 with the following functions will be dis-played.

By pressing the VSK 2.3 “Show tool path” the dis-play of the simulated tool path can be switched on and off.

By pressing the VSK 2.4 “Delete tool path” the ani-mated tool path in the simulation window will be de-leted. A new tool path is shown immediately after pressing this softkey or after running a new simula-tion (if the simulation is in “Stop”- or “Reset”- mode).

By pressing the VSK 2.5 “Blank” you can change the dimensions of the simulated blank (see also sec-tion 5.3). This softkey is active if the simulation is in “Reset” mode.

By pressing the VSK 2.8 “Back” you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1.



Notes: 6.3 Further views

With the function “Further views” you can change the graphical side-views on the blank, to view the simulation process in an optimal way. You can change the sides from which you want to see the simulation.

6.3.1 Selecting the function “Further views”

By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Further views” the follow-ing window with side views on the blank opens.



By pressing the VSK 1 “From front” the simulated workpiece will be shown in a front view.

By pressing the VSK 2 “From rear” the simulated workpiece will be shown in a rear view.

By pressing the VSK 3 “From left” the simulated workpiece will be shown from the left side.

By pressing the VSK 4 “From right” the simulated workpiece will be shown from the right side.

By pressing the VSK 8 “Back” on the operator panel (OP) you switch back to the vertical softkey bar of the operating area “Details”.



Notes:

6.4 Details

With the function “Details” you can zoom in, zoom out, rotate and cut out parts of the workpiece.

6.4.1 Selecting the function “Details”

By pressing the VSK 1.6 “Details“ the following func-tions are available in a vertical softkey bar.



By pressing the VSK 1 “Autozoom“ the workpiece fills out the simulation window in an optimal way.

By pressing the VSK 2 “Zoom +“ you zoom in into the simulation window. Alternatively you can press the “+“-key on the number block of the keyboard.

By pressing the VSK 3 “Zoom -“ you can zoom out of the simulation window. Alternatively you can press the “-“-key on the keyboard.

By pressing the VSK 4 “Zoom” a frame opens in the simulation window, that lets you zoom in to the frame size. Press the VSK1 “Zoom +” to increase and the VSK 2 “Zoom -” to decrease the frame size. Alternatively you can change the frame size of the zoom area with the “+”or “-” key on the number pad of the key-board. Move the frame with the blue cursor keys on the keyboard. Press the VSK 8 “Accept” to zoom to the selected extent or abort with pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”.



Notes: Display area Description (continuation)

By pressing the VSK 5 “Rotate view” a vertical softkey bar opens to the right, with functions to ro-tate the workpiece in the simulation window (see section 6.4.2.1).

By pressing the VSK 6 “Cut” the functions for cut-ting out parts of the workpiece are available in a vertical softkey bar “(see section 6.4.2.3).

By pressing the VSK 8 “Back” on the operator panel you switch back to the vertical softkey-bar 1.

6.4.2.1 Selecting the function “Rotate view”

By pressing the VSK 5 “Rotate view” the following functions will be displayed in a vertical softkey bar.



By pressing the VSK “Arrow right” the workpiece will be turned right around the centre of the simula-tion window.

By pressing the VSK “Arrow left” the workpiece will be turned left around the centre of the simulation window.

By pressing the VSK 3 “Arrow up” the work piece will be turned up around the centre of the simulation window.

By pressing the VSK 4 “Arrow down” the work piece will be turned down around the centre of the simulation window.

By pressing the 5 “Arrow turns left” the workpiece will be rotated to the left, around the centre of the simulation window (counter clockwise).

By pressing the 5 “Arrow turns right” the work-piece will be rotated to the right, around the centre of the simulation window (clockwise).

By pressing the VSK 8 “Back” you switch back to the VSK-bar “Details”.



Notes:

6.4.2.3 Selecting the function “Cut”

By pressing the VSK 1.7 “Cut“ the functions for cut-ting out parts of the simulated workpiece will be shown in a vertical softkey bar. The cut surface ar-eas are only displayed during simulation run.



By pressing the VSK 1 “Cut active” you can acti-vate the cut surfaces on the workpiece and activate the greyed out axes softkeys in the vertical softkey bar. The function “Cut” stays active until the VSK “Cut active” is deactivated.

By pressing the VSK 2 “X+“ the cutting plane is shifted on the X-axis to the positive (“to the right”).

By pressing the VSK 3 “X-“ the cutting plane is shifted on the X-axis to the negative (“to the left”).

By pressing the VSK 4 „Y+“ the cutting plane is shifted on the y-axis (ordinate) to the positive („to the rear “).

By pressing the VSK 5 „Y-“ the cutting plane is shifted on the y-axis (ordinate) to the negative (“forward”).

By pressing the VSK 6 “Z+“ the cutting plane will be shifted on the Z-axis (applicate) to the positive (“up”).



Notes: Display area Description (continuation)

By pressing the VSK 7 “Z-“ the cutting plane will be shifted on the Z-axis (Ablikate) to the negative (“downward”).

By pressing the VSK 8 “Back” you switch back to the operating area “Details”.

6.5 Program control

With the function “Program control” the override can be adjusted for the simulation, the program can be executed in single blocks and alarm mes-sages, that occurred during simulation, can be displayed.

6.5.1 Selecting the function “Program control”

By pressing the VSK 1.7 “Program control” the fol-lowing functions will be shown in a vertical softkey bar on the right side of the screen.



By pressing the VSK 1 “100% override” the feedrate override is set to the maximum override of 100%.

By pressing the VSK 2 “Override +” the override will be increased in 5% steps each time you press the softkey, until a maximum of 100% is reached.

By pressing the VSK 3 “Override -” the override will be decreased in 5% steps each time you press the softkey until a minimum of 0% is reached. With a feedrate override of 0% the simulation is paused.

By pressing the VSK 4 “Single block” the simulation will be executed block by block. With pressing this softkey the VSK 1.1 “Start” in the operating area “Simulation” will be exchanged with the “VSK 1.1 “SBL” (see section 6.2).

By pressing the VSK 7 “Alarm” the “Simulation alarms” window opens, with alarm messages that have occurred during a simulation run. This can be used for error detection.

By pressing the VSK 8 “Back” you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1.



Notes:

6.6 Selecting the function “Alarm”

By pressing the VSK 7 “Alarm” the “Simulation alarms” window opens, with a list of all current active alarm messages that occurred during the simulation.

For error messages and acknowledgement symbols see module - B576 “Operating area Diagnostics”, section 3.



By pressing the VSK 1 “Acknowl. Alarm” all with the “Reset”- or “Cancel”-symbol marked alarm mes-sages can be deleted. This softkey is inactive as long as no appropriate error message is shown.

By pressing the VSK 2 “Simulation Power On” you can trigger a warm restart for the active simulation. Press the VSK 8 “OK” to confirm or the VSK 7 “Cancel” to abort the warm restart. With a warm start the simulation will be ended and started new.

By pressing the VSK 8 “Back” you switch back to the operating area “Program control”.



Notes: 7.1 NC Execute

The function “NC Execute” lets you load the active program from the editor to the operating area “Machine” in the operating mode “AUTO”.

7.1.1 Selecting the function “NC Execute”

By pressing the HSK 1.8 “NC Execute” the control, switches to the operating area “Machine” under the operating mode “AUTO”. The program modified in the editor is now ready for machining (see picture below). The Softkey is deactivated if the program is running.

NC Execute Section 7


Notes:



Drilling

1 Brief description


Working through this module you become familiar with the technology “Drilling” by programming two chained sequential ShopMill programs.


This module explains the programming of a simple drilling example with ShopMill functionality, as well as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece by means of chained drilling cycles and position patterns.

B608

Content:



B608

B608

Notes :


Drilling Shopmill:

START

Simple programming

example

Complex programming

example

Drilling Shopmill:

END

Drilling - Shopmill: Description

This module explains the programming of a simple drilling example with ShopMill functionality, as well as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece by means of chained drilling cycles and position patterns.


Notes:


Description:

A simple drilling machining, using a drill cycle is to be programmed as a sequential program with ShopMill functionality.

Aim:

A new sequential ShopMill program is to be created and opened in the edi-tor. The program header, as well as drilling cycle and position cycle (sequential chain program) are programmed. After this the program is to be simulated. For this, the below listed tool and technology data are to be used:

Tool data: Drill Ø 8,5 mm (DRILL_D8.5)

Approach strategy: As a start position for the machining, the first pro-grammed drill hole is to be used. This position is approached in rapid traverse.

2.1 Creating a new sequential program

A new ShopMill program can be created from within the operating modes “JOG, “MDA” and “AUTO” as follows:


- OR -

1. Press the “MENU SELECT”-key on the operator panel and then the yellow HSK 4 “Program Man-ager”. The program manager opens.



4. Press the VSK 3 “ShopMill” to open the input mask for creating a new ShopMill sequential program. Enter a name for the program in the “Name” field and accept with pressing the VSK 8 “OK”. The program is loaded to the “editor” and the pa-rameter window for the program header is opened by default.

Section 2


Notes:


2.2 Example: Drilling

The following sequential program, with the call up of a simple drilling cycle, chained with a position pattern, is to be programmed.

1. Create a new ShopMill program like described in the previ-ous section 2.1 and give the program a name, for example “SM_DRILL_1.MPF”. The input window for the program header opens.

2. Enter following values in the program header like displayed below, and confirm your inputs with by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

The following program block “Program header” will be in-serted into the program.

Section 2


Notes:

3. Program the drilling cycle.

For this, press the HSK 1.2 Drill.”, to open the tech-nology “Drilling”.


Press the VSK 3 “Drilling”. The input mask for the drilling cycle opens.

4. Enter the following parameters like displayed below:

To insert a tool into the parameter window, press the VSK 1 “Select tool”, mark the desired tool (here DRILL_D8.5) in the tool list with the orange selection cursor and press the VSK 8 “OK”.

The following program block “Drilling” will be inserted into the program.

5. Insert now the position pattern for the drilling.

Press the VSK 7 “Positions”.

Select the VSK 4 “Positions” as a position pattern for the drilling. The input window for the position settings opens.

6. Enter the following position values into the mask and confirm by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

The program block “Positions” will be inserted into the program:

7. Program the end of the program and simulate the machining. Place the orange selection cursor on the program block “End of program” and extend the program block by pressing the blue “cursor-to-the-right”-key on the keyboard.



Notes:

8. The settings window for the program end opens, where you can define to repeat the workpiece.

Accept the default value by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

For starting the simulation, press the VSK 1.7 “Simulation”. The control calculates the simulation parameters and opens the simulation in the simula-tion window in “Top view”.

To view the simulation in 3-dimensional press the VSK 1.4 “3D view”.



Notes:

Description:

A more complex program (hole pattern) with chained program blocks is to be created in ShopMill. For this, different drilling cycles and a position pattern cycle will be called up and chained to a sequential program.

Objective:

The following workpiece is to be programmed and simulated. For this, the tool data and technology data shown below shall be used.


Tool data: Center drill 12 mm (CENTERDRILL_D12) Drill Ø 8,5 mm (DRILL_D8.5) Tap M10 (TAP_M10)

Approach strategy: As a start position for the machining, the first pro-grammed drill hole is to be used. This position is approached in rapid traverse.



Notes:

3.1 Example: Hole pattern

The following program with call of the drilling cycles “Centering”, “Drilling”, “Taping” and a hole pattern is to be programmed.

Create a new ShopMill program, like described in section 2.1 in this module. Give the program a name, for example “SM_DRILL_2.MPF”. The program with the parameter mask for the program header opens auto-maticlly.

1. Program the “Program header”, by taking over the following values:

Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The following program block “Program header” will be inserted into the program:



Notes:

2. Program the center drilling cycle.

Press the HSK 1.2 “Drill.”.

Press the VSK 1 “Centering”. The parameter mask for the “Centering” opens.

3. Insert the following values for centering in the pa-rameter input mask, like displayed below.

To insert a tool into the parameter window, press the VSK 1 “Select tool”. Mark the desired tool (CENTERDRILL_D12) in the tool list with the orange selection cursor and press the VSK 8 “OK”. Confirm the input with the VSK 8 “Accept”.

The following program block “Centering” will be in-serted into the program.

The program chain starts (see bracket symbol).

4. Program the drill cycle.


Select the VSK 3 “Drilling” to open the input mask for the drilling.

5. Fill out the input mask like displayed below:

To insert a tool into the parameter window, press the VSK 1 “Select tool”. Mark the desired tool (DRILL_D8.5) in the tool list with the orange selec-tion cursor and press the VSK 8 “OK”. Confirm the input with the VSK 8 “Accept”.

The following program block “Drilling” will be inserted into the program.

The program chain will be extended.



Notes:

6. Now program the tapping cycle.

Press the VSK 5 “Thread”. The “Tapping” window opens.

7. Insert the following values into the input mask:

To insert a tool into the parameter window, press the VSK 1 “Select tool”. Mark the desired tool (here TAP_M10) in the tool list with the orange selection cursor and press the VSK 8 “OK”. Confirm the input with the VSK 8 “Accept”.

The following program block “Tapping” will be in-serted into the program.

The chaining of the program blocks will be extended.

8. Program now the position pattern for the drilling, in order to close the program block chain.

Press the VSK 7 „Positions“. The positions window opens.

To set the positions for the drillings press the VSK 4 “Positions”. The drill position window opens.

9. Insert following values:

Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The following program block “Positions” will be in-serted:

The program block chain will be closed.



Notes:

10. Program the program end and simulate the machin-ing. Place the orange selection cursor on the “End of Program” program block. Extend the program block by pressing the blue “cursor-to-the-right”-key on the keyboard. The input mask for the “End of program” opens.






Notes:

To view the simulation 3-dimesional press the VSK 1.4 “3D View”.



Notes:



Milling

1 Brief description


Working through this module you become familiar with the technology “Milling” by programming two chained sequential ShopMill programs.


This module explains the programming of a simple milling machining with ShopMill functionality, as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece by means of milling cycles and a position pat-tern.

B615

Content:



B615

B615

Notes :


Milling Shopmill:

START

Simple programming

example

Complex programming

example

Milling Shopmill:

START END

Milling - Shopmill: Description

This module explains the programming of a simple milling machining with ShopMill functionality, as well as the programming of a more complex work-piece by means of milling cycles and a position pattern.


Notes:





- OR -






Description:

A simple milling machining is to be programmed as a chained sequential program in ShopMill.

Objective:

A new ShopMill program is to be created and opened in the editor. The program header, a milling cycle and a position pattern (program chain) are programmed. After this the program is to be simulated. For this, the tool and technology data below are to be used:

Tool data: Milling cutter Ø 10mm (CUTTER_D10)

Technology data: F 0,15 mm/tooth, V120 m/min

Section 2


Notes:


2.2 Example: Rectangular pocket

The following program with a chained milling cycle and position pattern is to be programmed.

1. Create a new ShopMill program like described in the previous section 2.1 and give the program a name, for example “SM_MILLING_1.MPF”. The input window for the program header opens automatically.

2. In the parameter mask for the program header enter the following values.

Accept your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

The following program block is inserted into the pro-gram:

Section 2


Notes:


2. Program now the rectangular pocket.

For this, press the HSK 1.3 “Milling” to open the technology “Milling”.



3. In the parameter mask for the rectangular pocket enter the following values:

To insert a tool into the parameter window, press the VSK 1 “Select tool”, mark the desired tool (here CUTTER_D10) in the tool list, with the orange selec-tion cursor and press the VSK 8 “OK”

Accept your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

The program block “Rectangular pocket” will be inserted into the program.

The program chain opens.

4. Insert now a position pattern for the milling cycle.


Press the VSK 7 “Positions”.

Select the VSK 4 “Positions” as a position pattern for the milling. The input window for the position settings opens.

Section 2


Notes:

5. In the parameter mask for the “Position pattern”, en-ter the following values and confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

The program block “Row of positions” is inserted into the work plan.

The program chain closes.

6. Program now the end of the program and simulate the machining. For this, place the orange selection cursor on the program block “End of program” using the blue cur-sor keys and switch over to the parameter window by pressing the blue “cursor-to-the-right” key on the keyboard.


Accept the default value and press the VSK 8 “Accept”.

In order to start the simulation, press the HSK 1.7 “Simulation”. The control calculates the simulation parameters and opens the simulation in the simulation window in “Top view”.



Notes:




Notes:

Description:

A more complex program (a slanted rectangular pocket) with chained pro-gram blocks is to be created in ShopMill.

Objective:

The workpiece shown below is to be programmed and simulated. For this, the tool and technology data below are to be used:


Tool data: Milling tool Ø 10 mm (CUTTER_D10)

Technology data: F 0,15 mm/tooth, V 120 m/min (roughing) and F 0,08 mm/tooth, V 150 m/min (finishing) The pocket is to be roughed first and finished after-wards.



Notes:

3.1 Example: Slanted rectangular pocket

The following program, with the call up of rectangular pocket cycles and a position pattern, is to be programmed.

Create a new ShopMill program first, like described in Section 2.1 in this module. Name the program, e. g. “SM_MILLING_2.MPF”. The new ShopMill program, with the parameter window for the program header opens.

1. Program the program header like displayed below:

Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The following program block will be inserted into the program.



Notes:

2. Rough the rectangular pocket.

Press the HSK 1.3 “Mill.” to open the technology “Milling”.


Press the VSK 3 “Recttang. pocket”. The input mask for the rectangular pocket cycle opens.

3. Insert the following values and confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

:

To insert a tool into the program, press the VSK 1 “Select tool”, in the opening tool list, select the tool “CUTTER_D10” with the orange selection cursor and press the VSK 8 “OK”. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

The program block “Rectang. Pocket” is inserted into the program:

The program chain starts (see chain symbol).

4. After this finish the rectangular pocket.





Notes:

5. Insert the following values into the parameter mask and confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”:

To insert a tool into the program, press the VSK 1 “Select tool”, in the opening tool list, select the tool “CUTTER_D10” with the orange selection cursor and press the VSK 8 “OK”. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

The program block “Rectang. Pocket” is inserted into the program:

The program chain is extended (see chain symbol).

6. Insert now a position pattern for the rectangular pocket.


Press the VSK 7 “Positions“. The window for setting a position patterns for the rectangular pocket opens.

Press the VSK 4 “Position pattern” to open the position pattern input mask for the pocket positions.



Notes:

7. Enter the following values into the parameter win-dow:

Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The program block “Row of positions” is inserted into the program:


8. Program now the program end and simulate the ma-chining. Place the orange selection cursor on the program block “Program end” and open the parameter list by pressing the blue “cursor-to-the-right”-key on the keyboard. The input mask for the “End of program” settings opens.

9. Here you can define to repeat the program for multiple workpieces.

Take over the default value and press the VSK 8 “Accept”.

Press the HSK 1.7 “Simulation” to start the simula-tion of the program run. The control calculates the simulation parameters and opens the simulation in the simulation window in “Top view”.



Notes:

To view the simulation 3-dimensional, press the VSK 1.4 “3D view”.




Contour milling

1 Brief description


Working with this module you become familiar with the technology “Contour milling” by programming two chained sequential ShopMill programs


This module explains the programming of a simple and a more complex contour in ShopMill, with the technology contour milling and with help of the contour editor.

B623

Content:



B623

B623

Notes :


Contour milling Shopmill:

START

Simple programming

example

Complex programming

example

Contour milling Shopmill:

END

Contour milling - Shopmill: Description

This module explains the programming of a simple and a more complex contour in ShopMill, with the technology contour milling and with help of the contour editor.


Notes:


Description:

A simple contour milling operation is to be programmed as a chained se-quential program in ShopMill.

Objective:

A new ShopMill program is to be created and opened in the editor. The program header, a contour description and a contour milling cycle (as chain program) are to be programmed. Afterwards, the program is to be simulated. For this, the tool and technology data below are to be used:


Technology data: F 0,3 mm/tooth, V120m/min




- OR -






Section 2


Notes:


2.2 Programming example: Straight line

The following ShopMill program with a contour description and a contour milling cycle, chained together, is to be programmed.

1. Create a new ShopMill sequential program like de-scribed in the previous section 2.1 and give the program for example the name “SM_CONTOURMILLING_1.MPF”. The input window for the program header opens automatically.

2. Insert the following parameter values. Use the blue “Select”-key on the MCP where indicated. Accept your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

Section 2


Notes:



3. Start with the programming of a contour path for the contour milling machining.

For this, press the HSK 1.4 “Cont. mill.” to open the technology “Contour milling”.

Press the VSK 1 “New contour”. A parameter mask where you can insert a new name for the new contour opens.

4. Enter a name for the new contour, e.g. “PATH”,

Confirm your input by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The contour editor opens automatically and the pa-rameter mask for entering a start point for the con-tour is active by default.

5. Insert the following coordinates for the starting point:

Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The contour description begins and new functions for defining a contour are available as yellow vertical softkeys on the right side of the screen.

6. Extend the contour path by adding a straight line in Y-direction.

Press the VSK 3 “Straight line Y”. The parameter mask where you can define a straight line in Y direction opens.

Enter following coordinates into the parameter mask:

Section 2


Notes:


The contour path will be extended with a straight line in Y-direction. Note: In the input field “Y” you can switch between “inc” and “abs” by pressing the blue “SELECT”-key on the keyboard.

7. Now, check the programmed contour.

For this, place the orange selection cursor on the -symbol in the yellow column on the left side of

the screen, by using the blue cursor keys on the key-board. The contour path is displayed graphically.

Note: In the white column on the left side of the screen you see all the program blocks programmed so far as symbols (representing the technology) and in the yellow column you see the symbols of all the pro-grammed contour elements.

8. Finish now the contour description by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

The program editor opens and the following program block is inserted into the program:




Notes:


9. Program now the contour milling cycle.

Press the HSK 1.4 “Cont. Mill.” to open the technol-ogy “Contour milling”.

Press the VSK 1.2 “Path milling” to select the func-tion “Path milling”.

The parameter mask for the path milling cycle opens.

10. Insert the following parameter values. Use the blue “Select” key on the MCP where indicated.

Note: In the input field “F” you can switch between “mm/tooth” or “mm/min” . The input field for Speed can either be “V” in “m/min” or “S” in “rev/min” by pressing the blue “SELECT”-key on the keyboard.

To insert a tool into the cycle input mask, press the VSK 1 “Select tool”. The “Tool list” window opens. Use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard, to mark the tool “CUTTER_D32”, with the orange selection cursor.

Press the VSK 1.8 “OK”. The tool “CUTTER_D32" will be inserted into the cycle input mask.


The following program block will be inserted into the program.


11. End the programming by placing the orange selec-tion cursor on the program block “End of program” and switch to the parameter mask by pressing the blue “cursor-to-the-right”-key on the keyboard.

Section 2


Notes:

The setting window for the program end opens, where you can define to repeat the program for multiple workpieces.

Accept the default value “No” and press the VSK 8 “Accept”.

12. Simulate now the program to verify tool path.

Press the HSK 1.7 “Simulation” to start the simula-tion. The control calculates the simulation and opens the simulation window in a “Top view” on the workpiece.


To view the simulation 3-dimensional, press the VSK 1.4 “3D view”.

Section 2


Notes:

Description:

A more complex program (moulding plate) with chained program blocks is to be created in ShopMill with the technology “Contour milling”.

Objectives:

Following workpiece is to be programmed and simulated.

The following Tool & technology data are needed in the program:

Tool & technology data:

Milling cutter Ø 32 mm (CUTTER_D32) F 0,30 mm/tooth, V 120 m/min (roughing) F 0,15 mm/tooth, V 150 m/min (finishing) Milling cutter Ø 16 mm (CUTTER_D16) F 0,15 mm/tooth, V 120 m/min (roughing) Milling cutter Ø 8.0 mm (CUTTER_D8) F 0,10 mm/tooth, V 120 m/min (roughing) F 0,05 mm/tooth, V 150m/min (finishing)

Operations list: 1. Outer contour roughing + finishing 2. Spigot contour roughing + finishing 3. Contour pocket roughing 4. Contour pocket rest material roughing 5. Contour pocket wall + base finishing


R5

60

90

A

A

A-A

20

R36

20

5

R30

40

150

50

100

35

R15

70

Section 3


Notes:


3.1 Programming example: Moulding plate

The following program is to be programmed with the technology “Contour milling”.

1. Create a new ShopMill program like described in sec-tion 2.1 in this module with the name “SM_CONTOURMILLING_2.MPF”.

The program with the parameter mask for the program header opens automatically.

2. Insert following values for the program header. Use the “Select” key on the MCP where indicated.



Section 3


Notes:

3. Start programming the contour description for the “Moulding plate outside” with help of the contour editor.

Press the HSK 1.4 “Cont. mill.”, to open the technol-ogy “Contour milling”.

Press the VSK 1 “New contour”. A parameter mask where you can enter a name for the new contour opens.

4. Enter a name for the new contour, e.g. “MOULDINGPLATE_OUTSIDE”,


The contour editor opens automatically and the pa-rameter mask for entering a start point for the con-tour is active by default.

5. Enter the following coordinates for the starting point:


The contour description starts and new functions for defining a contour are available as yellow vertical softkeys on the right side of the screen.

6. Extend the contour description by adding a straight line in Y-direction.

Press the VSK 3 “Straight line Y”. The input window for the “Straight line Y” opens.



Notes:


Enter following values into the parameter mask: Confirm your input by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

A straight line in Y-direction is added to your contour description.

7. Extend the contour description by adding a straight line in X-direction.

Press the VSK 2 “Straight line X”. The input window for the “Straight line X” opens.

Enter the following values into the parameter mask: Confirm your input by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. A straight line in X-direction is added to your contour description.

8. Now finish the programming of the contour path by adding a straight line in Y-direction.

Press the VSK 3 “Straight line Y”. The input window for the straight line in Y-direction opens.

Enter the following values into the parameter mask: Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

The contour description is finished.

Section 3


Notes:

Note: The white column on the left side of the help screen shows all the program blocks programmed as sym-bols (representing the technology). The yellow col-umn next to it shows all the programmed contour elements as symbols.

10. Finish now the programming of the contour by press-ing the VSK 8 “Accept”.




9. Now, check the outline of the contour path.


the screen, by using the blue cursor keys on the key-board. The contour is displayed graphically.

Section 3


Notes:


11. Insert now a “path milling” cycle into the program for “roughing” the moulding plate.

Press the HSK 1.4 “Cont. mill.” to open the technology “Contour milling”.

Press the VSK 1.2 “Path milling”.

The input window for the path milling cycle opens.


Note: In the input field “F” you can switch between “mm/tooth” or “mm/min” . The input field for Speed can either be set to cutting speed “V” in “m/min” or Spindle speed “S” in “rpm”. The machining depth “Z1” can be “inc” or “abs”.

To insert a tool into the cycle input mask, press the VSK 1 “Select tool”.


Use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard, to mark the tool “CUTTER_D32”, with the orange selection cursor.



The following program block will be added to the program chain.


Section 3


Notes:


13. Extend now the program chain by inserting another “path milling” cycle for “finishing” the outside.

Press the VSK 1.2 “Path milling”.

The input window for the path milling cycle opens.









The program chain is now complete and closed.

Section 3


Notes:


15. Start programming the contour description for the “Spigot boundary” with help of the contour editor.

Press the VSK 1 “New contour”.

A parameter mask where you can enter a name for the new contour opens.

16. Enter a name for the new contour, e.g. “SPIGOT_BOUNDARY”. Confirm your input by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.



Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The contour description starts and new functions for defining a contour are available as yellow vertical softkeys on the right side of the screen.

18. Enter the first contour element by adding a straight line in Y-direction.


Section 3


Notes:


19. Extend the contour description by adding a straight line in X-direction.

Press the VSK 2 “Straight line X”. The input window for the “Straight line X” opens.



A straight line in X-direction is added to your contour description.


Press the VSK 3 “Straight line Y”. The input window for the straight line in Y-direction opens.




21. Now finish the contour description by adding a straight line in X-direction.

Press the VSK 2 “Straight line X”. The input window for the straight line in Y-direction opens.




Section 3


Notes:




the screen, by using the blue cursor keys on the key-board.

The contour is displayed graphically.


23. Finish now the contour description by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

The program editor opens again and the following program block is inserted into the program:


Enter following coordinates into the parameter mask: Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

The contour description of the “Spigot Boundary” is finished.

Section 3


Notes:


24. Start programming the contour description for the “Spigot” with help of the contour editor.


25. Enter a name for the new contour, e.g. “SPIGOT”, Confirm your input by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.



Press the VSK 8 “Accept” to confirm your updates. The contour description starts and new functions for defining a contour are available as yellow vertical softkeys on the right side of the screen.

27. Start the contour description with a circle in clock-wise direction.

Press the VSK 1.5 “Circle”. The input window for the “Circle” opens.

Section 3


Notes:




Enter following coordinates into the parameter mask: Confirm your input by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. A straight line in Y-direction is added to your contour description.

29. Extend the contour description by adding a circle in clockwise direction.

Press the VSK 5 “Circle”. The input window for the “Circle” opens.

Enter following coordinates into the parameter mask: Confirm your input by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. A circle in clockwise direction is added to your con-tour description.

Section 3


Notes:


Enter following coordinates into the parameter mask: Confirm the VSK 8 “Accept”. A circle in clockwise direction is added to your con-tour description.


Press the VSK 1.3 “Straight line Y”. The input window for the “Straight line Y” opens.

Enter following coordinates into the parameter mask: Confirm the VSK 8 “Accept”. A straight line in Y-direction is added to your contour description.

31. Now finish the contour description by adding a circle in clockwise direction.

Press the VSK 5 “Circle”. The input window for the circle opens.

Section 3


Notes:




The contour description of the “Spigot” is finished.



the screen, by using the blue cursor keys on the key-board.

The contour is displayed graphically.



The program chain remains open.

Section 3


Notes:


34. Insert now a “spigot milling” cycle into the program for “roughing” the spigot contour within the defined boundary area.

Press the VSK 1.6 “Spigot”.

The input window for the spigot milling cycle opens.

35. Insert the following parameter values. Use the blue “Select” key on the MCP where indicated. . Note: In the input field “F” you can switch between “mm/tooth” or “mm/min” . The input field for Speed can either be set to cutting speed “V” in “m/min” or Spindle speed “S” in “rpm”. The machining depth “Z1” can be “inc” or “abs”. The tool path step over “DXY” can be set to % of tool Ø or a value in mm of the tool Ø.








Section 3


Notes:


36. Extend the program chain by inserting another “spigot milling” cycle into the program for “finishing” the spigot “Wall”.

Press the VSK 1.6 “Spigot”. The input window for the spigot milling cycle opens.

37. Insert the following parameter values. Use the blue “Select” key on the MCP where indicated. .







The following program block will be added to the program chain. The program chain is now complete and closed.

Section 3


Notes:


38. Start programming the contour description for the “Moulding plate pocket” with help of the contour editor.


Enter a name for the new contour, e.g. “MOULDINGPLATE_POCKET”. Confirm your input by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.



Press the VSK 8 “Accept” to confirm your inputs. The contour description starts and new functions for defining a contour are available as yellow vertical softkeys on the right side of the screen.

Section 3


Notes:


40. Begin the contour description by adding a straight line in X-direction.

Press the VSK 1.2 “Straight line X”. The input window for the “Straight line X” opens.

Insert the following values into the parameter mask. Press the VSK 8 “Accept” to confirm your inputs. The first Kontur element is generated and a straight line in X-direction is added to your contour descrip-tion.


Press the VSK 3 “Straight line Y”. The input window for the “Straight line X” opens.

Insert the following values into the parameter mask. Press the VSK 8 “Accept” to confirm your inputs. A straight line in Y-direction is added to your contour description.

42. Extend the contour description by adding a circle in clockwise direction.

Press the VSK 5 “Circle”. The input window for the “Circle” opens.

Section 3


Notes:



Confirm the VSK 8 “Accept”.

A circle in clockwise direction is added to your con-tour description.



Insert the following values into the parameter mask. Confirm the VSK 8 “Accept”.


44. Now finish the programming of the contour path by adding a straight line in X-direction.

Press the VSK 2 “Straight line X”. The input window for the “straight line Y” opens.

Enter following coordinates into the parameter mask: Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

The contour description is now closed by a straight line in Y-direction and therefore finished.

Section 3


Notes:








the screen, by using the blue cursor keys on the key-board. The contour is displayed graphically.

Section 3


Notes:

47. Insert now a “pocket milling” cycle into the program for “roughing” the moulding plate pocket.

Press the VSK 1.4 “Pocket”.

The input window for the pocket milling cycle opens.


Note: In the input field “F” you can switch between “mm/tooth” or “mm/min” . The input field for Speed can either be set to cutting speed “V” in “m/min” or Spindle speed “S” in “rpm”. The machining depth “Z1” can be “inc” or “abs”. The tool path step over “DXY” can be set to “%” of tool Ø or a value in “mm” .










Notes:


49. Extend the program chain by inserting a “Pocket residual material” cycle for “roughing” of the residual material of the moulding plate pocket.

Press the VSK 1.5 “Pocket resid. mat.”. The input window for the pocket residual material cycle opens.

50. Insert the following parameter values. Use the blue “Select” key on the MCP where indicated. . Note: In the input field “F” you can switch between “mm/tooth” or “mm/min” . The input field for Speed can either be set to cutting speed “V” in “m/min” or Spindle speed “S” in “rpm”. The tool path step over “DXY” can be set to “%” of tool Ø or a value in “mm” .




Press the VSK 1.8 “OK”. The tool “CUTTER_D8" will be inserted into the cy-cle input mask.



The program chain is closed.

Section 3


Notes:

49. Extend the program chain by inserting another “Pocket milling” cycle for “finishing” the “base” of the moulding plate pocket.




Note: In the input field “F” you can switch between “mm/tooth” or “mm/min” . The input field for Speed can either be set to cutting speed “V” in “m/min” or Spindle speed “S” in “rpm”. The machining depth “Z1” can be “inc” or “abs”. The tool path step over “DXY” can be set to “%” of tool Ø or a value in “mm” of the tool Ø.

To insert a tool into the cycle input mask, press the VSK 1 “Select tool”. The “Tool list” window opens. Use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard, to mark the tool “CUTTER_D8”, with the orange selection cursor.




The program chain is closed.

Section 3 Complex programming example


Notes:







The following program block will be inserted into the program.

The program chain is now finished and closed.

51. Insert another “Pocket milling” cycle into the pro-gram for “finishing” the “base” of the moulding plate pocket.



52. Insert the following parameter values. Use the blue “Select” key on the MCP where indicated. Note: In the input field “F” you can switch between “mm/tooth” or “mm/min” . The input field for Speed can either be set to cutting speed “V” in “m/min” or Spindle speed “S” in “rpm”. The machining depth “Z1” can be “inc” or “abs”.

Section 3


Notes:

53. End the programming by placing the orange selec-tion cursor on the program block “End of program” and switch to the parameter mask by pressing the blue “cursor-to-the-right”-key on the keyboard.

The parameter mask for the program end opens, where you can define to repeat the program for multiple workpieces.

Accept the default value “No” and press the VSK 8 “Accept”.

The program is now completed and ready for simula-tion.

Section 3 Complex programming example


Notes:


54. Simulate now the program to verify tool path.

Press the HSK 1.7 “Simulation” to start the simula-tion. The control calculates the simulation and opens the simulation window in a “Top view” on the workpiece.

Press the VSK 1.4 “3D view“ to run the simulation in a 3-dimensional view.

Section 3


Notes:

Press the blue highlighted HSK 1.7 “Simulation" to return to the ShopMill chain program. After completion of the workpiece Simulation, the Total machining time is being displayed behind the „End of program“ program block

Note: The total time represents approximately the real time of machining. Tool change time and rapid traverse movements are being taken into consideration based on the values in the machine data.


This document was produced for training purposes. Siemens assumes no responsibility for its contents. 840D/828D SINUMERIK Operate Page 1 B639B639

840D/828D SINUMERIK Operate

Straight Circle

1 Brief description


Working with this module you become familiar with the technology “Straight Circle” in ShopMill with the programming of two sequential ShopMill programs.


This module explains the programming of a simple program using the straight circle technology in ShopTurn, as well as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece by means of chained straight circle cycles.

B639

Content:



B639

B639

Notes :


Straight Circle: START

Simple programming

example

Complex programming

example

Straight Circle: END

Straight - Circle: Description

This module explains the programming of a sim-ple program using the straight circle technology in ShopTurn, as well as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece by means of chained straight circle cycles.

B639B639 Page 4 840D/828D SINUMERIK Operate

Notes:


2.1 Creating a new sequential program



- OR -


Press the yellow HSK 1.4 “Program manager”. The program manager window opens.



4. Press the VSK 3 “ShopMill” to open the input mask for creating a new ShopMill sequential program. Enter a name for the program and accept with pressing the VSK 8 “OK”. The program is loaded to the editor and the parame-ter window for the program header is opened by de-fault.

Description:

A simple straight circle machining is to be programmed with ShopMill func-tionality.

Objective:

A new sequential program is to be created and opened in the editor. The program header, a Straight line and circle and the program end are to be programmed. Afterwards the program is to be simulated. For this the following tool- and technology data are to be used:

Tool data: Cutter Ø 20 mm (CUTTER_D20)

Technology data: Constant cutting speed V 80 m/min

Section 2

840D/828D SINUMERIK Operate Page 5 B639B639

Notes:


2.2 Example: Straight

The following ShopMill program is to be programmed:

1. Create a new ShopMill program, as described in section 2.1 and enter a new program name e.g. “SM_STRAIGHT_CIRCLE_1.MPF” The input mask for the program header is opened by default.

2. Enter following values for the program header and confirm with the VSK 8 “Accept”:

The following program block is inserted into the work plan:

Section 2


Notes:

3. Program now the tool.

For this, extend the horizontal softkey bar by press-ing the “Extend”-key on the operator panel. The horizontal softkey bar 2 opens

Press the HSK 2.2 “Strght Circle” to open the func-tion “Straight Circle” with the corresponding vertical softkeys .

Press now the VSK 1 “Tool”. The input mask for the tool parameters opens.

4. Enter following values into the input mask:

To insert a tool into the parameter window, press the VSK 1 “Select tool”, mark the desired tool (here CUTTER_D20) in the tool list with the orange selec-tion cursor and press the VSK 1.8 “OK”. The following program block will be inserted into the work plan.

5. Insert a straight line for positioning to the starting point of the milling operation.

Press the VSK 2 “Straight”. The input mask for the straight parameters opens.

6. Enter the following values for approaching the work-piece in a straight line into the input mask:

Press the VSK 5 “Rapid traverse” in order to posi-tion to the starting point in rapid traverse.

7. Press the VSK 8 “Accept” to confirm your input. The following program block is inserted into the work plan:



Notes:

8. Insert a work step to approach the target position Z in a straight line.

Press the VSK 2 “Straight” The window for the straight parameters opens.

9. Enter the following values into the input mask:

Press the VSK 5 “Rapid traverse” in order to ap-proach the target position Z in rapid traverse.


11. As next work step insert a straight line in Y-direction

Press the VSK 2 “Straight”. The input mask for the straight line opens.



14. As next work step insert a straight line in Z-direction, to retract the tool.

Press the VSK 2 “Straight”. The input mask for the parameter values for the straight opens.



Notes:


Press the VSK 5 “Rapid traverse” to execute the movement in rapid traverse.


17. Program the end of the program and simulate the machining. Place the orange selection cursor on the program block “End of program” and extend the program block by pressing the blue “cursor-to-the-right”-key on the keyboard. The input mask for the end of program opens.

Leave the parameter “Repetition” on “No”, as shown below.


In order to start the simulation, extend the horizontal softkey bar by pressing the “Extend”-key on the op-erator panel. The horizontal softkey bar 1 opens




Notes:




Notes:

Description:

A more complex program (die plate) is to be programmed, by using the technology “Straight Circle”.

Aim:

The workpiece shown in the graphic below is to be programmed. Afterwards the program is to be simulated.

The following tool and technology data are used for the programming.

Tool data: :

Cutter Ø 20 mm (CUTTER_D20)

Technology data: :

Constant cutting speed V 80 m/min

As starting point for the machining the following posi-tion is specified:

X - 12

Y - 12

Z - 5

This point is approached in rapid traverse.

The contour starting point (X5 and Y5) is ap-proached in a straight line (F 100 mm/min, cutter radius compensation left).



Notes:

3.1 Programming example: die plate

The following ShopMill program is to be created.

1. Create a new ShopMill program like described in section 2.1 in this module. Give the program the following name: “SM_STRAIGHT_CIRCLE_2.MPF“. The program, with the input mask for the program header opens by default.

2. Enter the following values into the program header:



Notes:

3. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 „Accept“.


4. Inset now a tool (CUTTER_D20) into the program.

In order to do this, switch to the horizontal softkey bar 2, by pressing the “Extend”-key on the operator panel. The horizontal softkey bar 2 opens.

Press the HSK 2.2 “Strght Circle” to select the func-tion “Straight Circle”. The operating area of the function “Straight Circle” opens.

Now press the VSK 1 “Tool” to open the input mask for the tool (see picture below).

To insert a tool into the parameter mask, press the VSK 1 “Select tool”. Select the The tool list window opens. Here, place the orange selection cursor on the tool “CUTTER_D20”, by using the blue cursor keys on the keyboard and press the VSK 1.8 “OK”. The selected tool is inserted into the tool input mask like displayed below

5. Fill out the rest of the input mask, as follows:





Notes:

6. Position now the tool to the starting position of the machining operation in a straight line.

Press the VSK 2 “Straight” to open the input mask for the function “Straight”.

7. Insert the following values into input mask:

Press the VSK 5 “Rapid traverse” in order to posi-tion to the starting point in rapid traverse.

Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The following program block is inserted into the pro-gram:

8. Insert now another straight move into the program.



Press the VSK 5 “Rapid traverse”, in order to move to the Z depth in rapid traverse.


10. Insert now another Straight move into the program.




Notes:

11. Insert the following values into the parameter win-dow:


12. Define now the reference point of the polar coordi-nate system (pole) for the technology “Straight cir-cle”.

Press the VSK 6 „Polar“ to open the input window for the function “Polar”.

Press the VSK 2 „Pole“ to open the input mask for the function “Pole”.

13. Define the pole as follows:


14. Insert now a “Straight polar” move into the program.

Press the VSK 6 „Polar“ to open the input window for the function “Polar”.

Press the VSK 3 “Straight polar“ to open the input mask for the function “Straight polar”.

15. Enter the values as follows:





Notes:

16. Insert another “Circle polar” move into the program.

Press the VSK 6 „Polar“ to open the operating area for the function „Polar“.

Press the VSK 4 „Circle polar“, the input mask for the circle polar opens.

17. Enter the values into the input window like displayed below:



18. Insert now a straight machining movement.

Press the VSK 2 „Straight“ to open the input win-dow.

19. Enter the values into the input window like displayed below:



20. Define now a second reference point of the polar coordinate system (pole) for the technology “Straight circle”.

Press the VSK 6 „Polar“ to open the input mask for the function „Polar“.

Press the VSK 2 „Pole” to open the input mask for the function „Pole“.



Notes:

21. Enter the values into the input mask as displayed below:



22. Insert another „Circle polar“ move into the program.

Press the VSK 6 „Polar“ to open the operating area for the function „Polar“.

Press the VSK 4 „Circle polar“, to open the input mask for “Circle polar”.




24. Insert now a straight machining movement.

Press the VSK 2 „Straight“ to open the input window.






Notes:

26. Insert another “Straight” machining movement into the program.

Press the VSK 2 „Straight“ to open the input mask for the function “Straight”.




28. Insert the final straight machining movement into the program.

Press the VSK 2 „Straight“ to open the input win-dow.




30. Program the end of the program and simulate the machining. Place the orange selection cursor on the program block “End of program” and extend the program block by pressing the blue “cursor-to-the-right”-key on the keyboard.



Notes:

The input mask for the program end opens. Leave the parameter “Repetition” on “No” as shown below.


31. To run the simulation go back to the horizontal soft-key bar 1.

Extend the horizontal softkey bar by pressing the “Extend”-key on the operator panel. The horizontal softkey bar 1 opens.




Notes:




Notes:

Section End



Measurement Milling ShopMill

1 Brief description


Working with this module you become familiar with the technology “Measurement milling” by pro-gramming two sequential ShopMill programs.


This module explains the programming of a simple and a complex measuring process of the work-piece with the function “Measurement milling” in ShopMill.

B655

Content:



B655

B655

Notes :


Measure milling Shopmill:

START

Simple programming

example

Complex programming

example

Measure milling Shopmill:

END

Measure milling - Shopmill: Description

This module explains the programming of a simple and a complex measuring process of the work-piece with the function “Measurement milling” in ShopMill.


Notes:



A new ShopMill program can be created from within all operating modes as follows:


- OR -






Description:

A simple measuring movement with a 3d-probe to the top side of a work-piece is to be programmed under ShopMill.

Objective:

A new ShopMill program is to be created and opened in the editor. The program header, a measuring cycle and the program end are to be programmed. Later, the program is to be simulated. For this, the data below are to be used:

Tool data: 3D Probe (3D_PROBE))

Section 2


Notes:


2.2 Programming example: Measuring a surface

The following ShopMill program with a measuring cycle is to be pro-grammed:

1. Create a new ShopMill program like described in the previous section 2.1 and give the program a name, for example “SM_MEASURING_MILLING_1.MPF”. The input mask for the program header opens auto-matically.

2. Insert the following values into the input mask of the program header and confirm the input with the VSK 8 “Accept”:

Section 2


Notes:



3. Insert a probe tool (3D_PROBE) into the program. In order to do this, you have to access the tool list window from the work area “Straight Circle”! Note: This is necessary, since the tool list is not directly accessible over the technology “Measurem. Milling”.

Press the “Extend”-key on the operator panel to reach to the “Straight Circle” function The vertical softkey bar 2 opens.

Press the HSK 2.2 “Strght Circle”, to get access to the function “Tool”.

Press the VSK 1 “Tool”, to open the input mask for the tool.

Press the VSK 1 “Select tool”. The tool list window opens.

Mark the desired tool (here 3D_PROBE) by using the blue cursor key on the keyboard and press the VSK 8 “OK”. The selected tool is loaded into the “tool“ input mask.

4. Leave the value as follows:

Confirm your tool selection by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The following program block is inserted into the work plan:

5. Program the approach of the tool probe in a straight line with rapid traverse.

Press the VSK 2 “Straight”. The input mask for the technology “Straight” opens.

Insert the following position values into the parame-ter mask:

Section 2


Notes:

Press the VSK 5 “Rapid traverse”, to set the federate to rapid traverse.

Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The following program block is inserted into the work plan:

6. Program the approach of the tool probe in a straight line in XY with rapid traverse.


7 Insert the following position values into the parame-ter mask:

Press the VSK 5 “Rapid traverse”, to set the feder-ate to rapid traverse.


8. Program the approach of the probe tool in a straight line in Z direction with rapid traverse.


9. Insert the following position values into the parame-ter mask:

Press the VSK 5 “Rapid traverse”, to set the feder-ate to rapid traverse.




Notes:

10. Program now a measuring cycle (CYCLE978).


Press the VSK 4 “Workpiece measure”. The vertical softkey bar with functions for the meas-urement of workpieces opens.

Press the VSK 4 “Plane”. The Input window for the cycle “1-pt.meas./CYCLE978” opens.


Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “OK”. The following two program blocks are inserted into the work plan.

12. Program the program end and simulate the meas-urement of the work piece. Place the orange selection on the program block “End of program” and extend the line by pressing the blue “cursor-to-the-right” key on the keyboard.

13. The input mask for the program end opens. Here, you can decide to repeat the program run.




Notes:


Switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1 by pressing the “Extend”-key on the control panel. The horizontal softkey bar 1 opens.

Press the HSK 1.6 “Simulation” to start the simula-tion of the program. The control calculates the simulation and opens the simulation window in “Top view” by default.

To view the simulation 3-dimensional press the VSK 1.4 “3D-view”.

Section 2


Notes:


Description:

Another program to measure a square work piece is to be programmed in ShopMill.

Objective:

The program header, two measuring cycles and the program end are to be programmed. Afterwards the program is to be simulated. For this, the data below is to be used:

Tool data: 3d probe (3D_PROBE)

3.1 Programming example: Measuring edges

The following program with two measuring cycles is to be programmed:

1. Create a new ShopMill program like described in the previous section 2.1 and give the program a name, for example “SM_MEASURE_MILLING_2.MPF”. The input mask for the program header opens auto-matically.

Section 3


Notes:

2. Insert the following values for the program header into the input mask and confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”:


3. Insert a probe tool (3D_PROBE) into the program. In order to do this, you have to access the tool list window from the work area “Straight Circle”! Note: This is necessary, since the tool list is not directly accessible over the technology “Measurement Mill-ing”.

Press the “Extend”-key on the operator panel to switch to the vertical softkey bar 2. The vertical softkey bar 2 opens.

Press the HSK 2.2 “Strght Circle”, to get access to the function “Tool”.

Press the VSK 1 “Tool”, to open the input mask for the tool.

Press the VSK 1 “Select tool”. The tool list window opens.

Mark the desired tool (here 3D_PROBE) by using the blue cursor key on the keyboard and press the VSK 8 “OK”. The selected tool is loaded into the tool parameter window.



Notes:

4. Leave the value as follows:


5. Program the approach of the probe tool in a straight line with rapid traverse.



Press the VSK 5 “Rapid traverse”, to set the federate to rapid traverse.


6. Program the approach of the probe tool in a straight line in XY with rapid traverse.



Press the VSK 5 “Rapid traverse”, to set the feed-rate to rapid traverse.

Confirm your tool selection by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”. The following program block is inserted into work plan.



Notes:

7. Program the approach of the probe tool in a straight line in Z with rapid traverse.


9. Insert the following position values into the parame-ter mask:

Press the VSK 5 “Rapid traverse”, to set the feed-rate to rapid traverse.

Confirm your tool selection by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

The following program block is inserted into the work plan.

10. Program now a measuring cycle (CYCLE978).



Press the VSK 4 “Plane”. The Input window for the cycle “1-pt.meas./CYCLE978” opens.




Notes:

Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “OK”. The following two program blocks are inserted into the work plan window.

12. Program now a measuring cycle to measure the 4 edges of the workpiece.


Press the VSK 1.7 “Extend”, to open the vertical softkey bar 2, where are more functions for measur-ing workpieces available.

Press the VSK 2.2 “Rectangle”. The input window for the cycle “Meas.rectang./CYCLE977” opens.


Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “OK”. The following two program blocks are inserted into the work plan window.



Notes:

14. Program the program end and simulate the meas-urement of the work piece. Place the orange selection on the program block “End of program” and extend the line by pressing the blue “cursor-to-the-right” key on the keyboard.

15. The input mask for the program end opens. Here, you can decide to repeat the program run.


Switch back to the horizontal softkey bar 1 by press-ing the „Extend“-key on the operator panel. The horizontal softkey bar 1 opens.

Press the HSK 1.6 “Simulation” to start the simula-tion of the measurement. The control calculates the simulation and opens the simulation window in “Top view” by default.

To view the simulation 3-dimensional, press the VSK 1.4 “3D view” (see following page).



Notes:


This documentation was produced for training purposes. SIEMENS does not accept resposibility for the contents. 828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate Page 1 B500B500


Cycles

1 Brief Description


With the help of this module you will get to know the various cycle parameters in ShopMill and Shop-Turn.


This module explains the various parameters that are called up in the cycle masks in tabular form . In the course of this the relationship and the differences of the parameters to the individual cycles and techniques are pointed out.

B500

Content:

Fundamentals Turning Drilling Milling


B500

B500

Notes :


Cycles: START

Fundamentals

Turning

Drilling

Milling

Cycles: END

Cycles: Description

This module explains the various parameters that are called up in the cycle masks in tabular form . In the course of this the relationship and the differ-ences of the parameters to the individual cycles and techniques are pointed out.


Notes.

Fundamentals

2. 1 Cycles

Cycles are sub-programs (technology-orientated functions) for the execu-tion of a repeatedly occurring operation on a work piece. Cycles can be selected comfortably via Softkeys and can simply be pa-rameterised by means of input masks. Programmed cycles are inserted in G-Code or step-chain-programs as a program step and can be re-selected and newly parameterised at any time. The following functionality is available both in ShopMill and ShopTurn

Technology-orientated cycle selection with help of Softkeys

Input masks for cycle parameters (cycle masks) with help pictures and animations

Context-sensitive online-help for every input window

Support for the contour input (geometry processor)

Section 2


Notes:

Turning

Unit

α (Thread relief)

Plunge angle

Degrees

α0 Starting angle offset

Degrees

α1 Angle of the tapers

Degrees

α1 (Stock removal)

Angle of the first edge

Degrees

α1 (Groove)

Flange angle 1

Degrees

α2 (Stock removal)

Angle of the second edge

Degrees

α2 (Groove)

Flange angle 2

Degrees

αP Infeed taper (angle)

Degrees

Allowance (Stock removal)

Finishing allowance (only with finishing)

Yes U1 contour allowance

No

mm

Selection (Thread)

Table value, e.g. M10, M12, M14,…

B1 Width of groove, bottom

mm

B2 Width of groove, top

mm

Machining Roughing

Finishing

Roughing + Finishing

Machining direction Turning (Stock removal parting)

Machining directions

Planar

Longitudinal

Machining direction (Thread relief)

Longitudinal

Parallel to contour

Section 3


Notes.

Turning

Unit

Machining direction Contour- turning (Stock removal)

Planar Longitudinal Parallel to contour From inside outward From outside inward From front to rear end From rear end to front

BL Blank description (contour, cylinder, allowance)

D Cutting edge number

D Maximum infeed depth (inc) mm

D1 (Thread)

First infeed depth mm

DA Start-changing depth (inc)

DI At 0 continuous cut

DIR (parting)

Spindle rotation direction

counter-clockwise (CCW)

clockwise (CW)

DP (Longitudinal thread)

Infeed taper as a flank (inc)

DP (Groove)

Distance of back-cut (inc) DP is not displayed when N = 1

mm

DX Maximum infeed depth (only parallel to contour alternatively to D)

mm

DZ Maximum infeed depth (only for parallel to con-tour and UX)

mm

Limit Machining range limitation

Yes XA: 1st limit XA Ø XB: 2nd limit XB Ø (abs) or 2nd limit referred to XA (inc) ZA: 1st limit ZA ZB: 2nd limit ZB (abs) or 2nd limit referred to ZA

No

Section 3


Notes:

Turning

Unit

F Feed

mm/min mm/rev

Form (Thread relief)

Normal (Form A)

Short (Form B)

FR (Parting)

Reduced feedrate

mm/rev

FR (Stock removal)

Plunging feedrate for relief cuts

FS (Stock removal)

Chamfer (n = 1...3) alternative to R

mm

FS Chamfer width

mm

FS1 Chamfer width 1

mm

FS2 Chamfer width 2

mm

FS3 Chamfer width 3

mm

FS4 Chamfer width 4

mm

FX Feed in X-direction

mm/rev

FZ Feed in Z-direction

mm/rev

G Change of thread pitch per rev.

Thread (Longitudinal thread )

Internal thread

External thread

H1 (Taper thread)

Calculated from thread pitch mm

H1 (Longitudinal thread )

Depth of thread obtained from thread table

mm

Relief cuts (Stock removal)

Machining of relief cuts

Yes

No

Location turning (Stock removal)

Location of stock removal

right top

right bottom

left top

left bottom

Section 3


Notes.

Turning

Unit

Location contour- turning (Stock removal, parting)

front

back

internal

external

LR Thread run-out (inc)

mm

LW Thread lead (inc)

mm

Multi-start No α0 Starting angle offset

Yes Nr. of thread starts are spread evenly around the circumference of work piece

N (Groove)

Number of grooves (N = 1...65535)

N (Thread)

Nr of thread starts

NN (Thread)

Number of dummy passes

P (Thread relief DIN)

Thread pitch (to be selected from DIN-table) or entered manually

mm/rev

P (Longitudinal thread )

Selection of the thread pitch/-starts

Thread pitch in mm/rev

Thread pitch in inch/rev

Threads per inch

Thread pitch in modulus

mm/rev in/rev threads/" modulus

R1 Rounding radius 1

mm


mm


mm


mm

R Radius (n = 1...3) alternative to FS

mm

S Spindle speed

rev/min

SR Reduced speed

rev/min

SV Maximum rotary speed for constant cutting speed

rev/min

Section 3


Notes:

Turning

Unit

Table Selection of the thread table

without

ISO metric

Whitworth BSW

Whitworth BSP

UNC

T Tool name

T1 (Groove)

Groove depth Ø (abs) or groove depth referred to X0 (inc)

mm

U1 Contour allowance

mm

U Finishing allowance

mm

UX Finishing allowance in X

mm

UZ Finishing allowance in Z

mm

V Constant cutting speed

m/min

VR Retraction distance (inc)

mm

VX (Relief cut)

Planar pass Ø (abs) or planar pass (inc)

mm

X0 (Groove)

Reference point Ø (abs)

mm

X1 (Relief cut)

Allowance in X Ø (abs) or allowance in X (inc)

mm

X1 (Stock removal Thread)

End point of the thread Ø (abs) or thread length (inc)

mm

X1 (Taper thread)

End point X Ø (abs) or end point referred to X0 (inc)

mm

X1α (Taper thread)

Thread taper

Degrees

X1 (Parting cut)

Depth for speed reduction Ø (abs) or depth for speed reduction referred to X0 (inc)

mm

X2 (Parting cut)

Final depth Ø (abs) or final depth referred to X1 (inc)

mm

Section 3


Notes.

Turning

Unit

XA 1st limit XA Ø (abs) (limiting)

XB (Stock removal)

2nd limit XB Ø (abs) (limiting)

XD (Parting)

Allowance or cylinder dimension (inc)

mm

XDA (Parting)

1st parting-limit tool Ø (abs)

mm

XDB (Parting)

2nd parting-limit tool Ø (abs)

mm

XF2 (Stock removal)

Relief cut (alternative to FS2 or R2)

mm

XM Intermediate point referred to X0

mm

Z0 (Groove)

Reference point Z (abs)

mm

Z1 (Stock removal)

End point Z Ø (abs) referred to Z0

mm

Z1 (Relief cut)

Allowance in Z

mm

Z1 (Thread)

End point of the thread

mm

ZA (Stock removal)

1st limit ZA (abs) (limiting)

ZB (Stock removal)

2nd limit ZB (abs) (limiting)

ZD (Parting)

Allowance or cylinder dimension (inc)

mm

ZM Intermediate point Z

mm

Infeed Linear: Infeed with constant cutting depth

Degressive: Infeed with constant chip cross-section

Section 3


Notes:

Drilling

Unit

α Lifting angle (tool orientation angle) (only for lifting the tool), spindle position for orientated spindle stop in the cycle.

Degrees

α0 Rotation angle for the straight line, referred to the X-axis

Degrees

α1 (Pitch circle)

Advancing angle (only for circular pattern pitch circle)

Degrees

Lifting mode No lifting The cutting edge is not retracted, but re-turns to the safety clearance with rapid traverse.

Lifting The cutting edge is moved clear of the edge of the hole and is then lifted to the retraction level.

Degrees

αS Starting angle offset (only for tapping without a compensating chuck)

Degrees

αX Shearing angle X (only for the location pat-terns grid or frame)

Degrees

αY Shearing angle Y (only for the location pat-terns grid or frame)

Degrees

Centre drilling

Centre drilling with reduced feedrate

Yes

No The reduced feedrate is executed as follows: Drilling feedrate F1 < 0,15mm/rev: Centre drilling feedrate = 30% of F1 Path feedrate F1=> 0,15mm/rev: Centre drilling feedrate = 0,1 mm/rev

Selection

(tapping)

Selection of table value:

M1 - M68 (ISO metric)

W3/4"; etc. (Whitworth BSW)

G3/4"; etc. (Whitworth BSP)

1" - 8 UNC; etc. (UNC)

Section 4


Notes.

Drilling

Unit

Selection Coordinate system

Right-angled (Cartesian)

Polar

Machining (Drilling)

Chip breaking

Chip clearing

Machining (without comp. chuck) (Tapping)

The following machining methods are avail-able:

One cut only: The tapping takes place in one pass without interruption.

Chip breaking: The drill is retracted by an amount V2 for chip breaking.

Chip clearing: The drill is retracted from the work piece for chip clearing.

Machining (with comp. chuck) (Tapping)

The following machining methods are avail-able:

With encoder: Tapping with spindle encoder

Without encoder: Tapping without spindle encoder selec-tion with specification of the "pitch" pa-rameter

Machining

location Single location:

Drilling at the programmed location

Location pattern: Location with MCALL

Drilling depth Referred to

Shaft: Drilling until the drill-shaft has reached the programmed value X1. The angle in the tool list is taken into account.

Point: Drilling until the drill point has reached the programmed value X1.

Section 4


Notes:

Drilling

Unit

C0 (Locations)

Polar coordinates of the 1st location, with the selection "polar" longitudinal (abs) angle (abs)

mm Degrees

C1...C7 (Locations)

Polar coordinates of further locations, with the selection "polar" longitudinal (abs) angle (abs)

mm Degrees

Ø Drilling continues until the diameter has been reached (only with centring)

Ø (internal thread milling)

Nominal diameter

mm

D Cutting edge number

D maximum depth infeed (only with chip clearing or chip breaking)

mm

D (Boring)

Lift-off amount (inc) (only for lifting, SN)

mm

DF Percentage for all further infeeds or

amount for every further infeed

% mm

DIR Direction of rotation

counter-clockwise (CCW)

clockwise (CW)

DT Dwell at final drilling depth in seconds

Dwell at final drilling depth in revs

s rev

DTB Dwell at drilling depth in seconds

Dwell at drilling depth in revs

s rev

DTS Dwell at the start point for chip clearing in seconds (only for chip clearing)

Dwell at the starting point for chip clearing in revs (only for chip clearing)

s rev

Section 4


Notes.

Drilling

Unit

Through drilling

Remaining drilling depth at path feedrate

Yes

No

DX Lift-off amount in X-direction (inc) (only for lifting, standard)

DY Lift-off amount in Y-direction (inc) (only for lifting, standard)

DZ Lift-off amount in Z-direction (inc) (only for lifting, standard)

Chip clearing (Drill + thread milling)

Chip clearing before thread milling

Yes

No Retract to work piece surface for chip clearance before thread milling.

F Feedrate

mm/min mm/rev

F1 Path feedrate

mm/min mm/rev

FD1 Percentage feedrate for the first infeed

%

FR (Drill + thread milling)

Drilling feedrate for remaining depth

mm/min mm/rev

FR Feedrate for retraction

mm/min

FS Finishing feedrate (only for down cut / up cut )

mm/min mm/tooth

Milling direction (Drill + thread milling)

Down-cut (climb milling)

Up-cut (conventional milling)

Down cut / up cut (climb/conventional milling)

Thread Thread sense

Right-hand-thread

Left-hand-thread

Section 4


Notes:

Drilling

Unit

L0 Distance of the first location from the reference point (only for location pattern straight line)

mm

L0 (Locations)

Polar coordinates of the first location with selec-tion "polar" longitudinal (abs) angle (abs)

mm Degrees

L Distance between the locations (only for location pattern straight line)

mm

L1 Distance between the columns (only for location pattern grid or frame)

mm

L1...L7 (Locations)

Polar coordinates of further locations, with selection "polar" longitudinal (abs) angle (abs)

mm Degrees

L2 Distance between the lines (only for location pattern grid or frame)

mm

LAB Repeat of jump mark for location

Compensa-ting chuck mode

with compensating chuck

without compensating chuck

N Number of locations (only for location pattern straight line)

N1 Number of columns (only for location pattern grid or frame)

N2 Number of lines (only for location pattern grid or frame)

P Thread pitch…

in modulus: modulus = pitch/π

in mm/rev

in inch/rev

in threads per inch

modulus mm/rev in/rev Threads/"

Positioning (Pitch circle)

Positioning motions between the locations

Straight

Circle

PL Machining plane G17 (XY)

Section 4


Notes.

Drilling

Unit

R Radius

mm

RP Retraction plane (abs)

mm

Retraction (only for machining with "Chip breaking") retraction amount

manually

automatically

SC Safety distance (inc)

SDE Direction of rotation after end of cycle

S / V Spindle speed or constant cutting speed

rev/min m/min

SPOS Spindle stop position Degrees

SR Spindle speed for retraction

rev/min

Pitch (only for ma-chining with-out encoder)

User entry of the input

active feed, pitch is derived from the feed rate

T Tool name

Table Selection of the thread table:

without

ISO metric

Whitworth BSW

Whitworth BSP

UNC

V1 Minimum infeed depth

mm

V2 (Tapping)

Retraction amount (only for retraction "manually") Amount, by which the tap is retracted for chip breaking. V2 = automatically: The tool retracts by one revolution.

mm

V2 (drilling)

Retraction amount after each machining opera-tion (only for machining "chip breaking")

mm

V3 Pre-stopping distance (only for pre-stopping distance "manually")

mm

Section 4


Notes:

Drilling

Unit

Pre-stopping distance

(only for machining "chip clearing")

manually

automatically

VR Constant cutting speed for retraction

m/min

XD Centre offset

X0 X-coordinate of the reference point X (abs)

mm

X1...X7 (Locations)

X-coordinate of further reference points (abs or inc)

mm

Y0 Y-coordinate of the Reference point Y (abs)

mm

Y1...Y7 (Locations)

Y-coordinate of further reference points (abs or inc)

mm

Z0 Reference point Z

mm

Z1 (Drilling)

Final drilling depth X (abs) or final drilling depth referred to Z0 (inc)

mm

Z1 (Thread)

End point of the thread (abs) or thread length (inc)

mm

Z1 (Drilling)

Final drilling depth X (abs) or final drilling depth referred to Z0 (inc)

mm

Z1 (Thread)


mm

Z2 Retraction amount before thread milling

mm

ZR Remaining depth for through drilling ("Yes" only for through-holes)

mm

Section 4


Notes.

Drilling Section 4


Notes:

Milling

Unit

α0 Rotation angle

Degrees

α0 (circular slot)

Start angle

Degrees

α1 (circular slot)

Opening angle of the slot

Degrees

α1 (Engraving)

Text direction (only for linear alignment)

Degrees

α1 (contour)

Starting direction relative to X-axis

Degrees

α1 (circular slot)

Opening angle of the slot

Degrees

α2 (circular slot)

Advancing angle (only for pitch circle)

Degrees

α2 (contour)

angle to previous element

Degrees

αS (Thread-Milling)

Starting angle

Degrees

Retract mode (Path milling)

Retract mode in plane

Quarter circle: Part of a spiral (only for path milling to the left and the right of contour)

Semi circle: Part of a spiral (only for path milling to the left and the right of the contour)

Straight: Oblique in space

Retract strategy (Path milling)

Axis-by-axis

spatial

Section 5


Notes.

Milling

Unit

Lift mode (Centring)

Lifting mode before a renewed infeed If for the machining several plunging points are required, the retraction height can be programmed:

to RP (retraction plane)

Z0 + safety distance

mm

Lift mode (Path milling)

If several depth infeeds are required, the re-traction height to which the tool is retracted to between the individual infeeds, can be specified here. (at the transition at the end of the contour to the beginning). Lifting mode before a renewed infeed

No retraction

to RP (retraction plane)


by safety distance

mm

Lift mode (Pre-drilling centring) (Pocket milling)

Lifting mode before renewed infeed If for the machining several plunging points are required, the retraction height can be programmed as following:

to RP


X0 + safety distance

mm

Section 5


Notes:

Milling

Unit

Approach (Path milling)

Approach mode in plane

Quarter circle: Part of a spiral (only for path milling left and right of the contour)

Semi circle: Part of a spiral (only for path milling left and right of the contour)

Straight: Oblique in space

Vertical: Perpendicular to the path (only for path milling on the centre line path)

Approach strategy (Path milling)

Axis-by-axis (only for approach "quarter circle or semi circle")

Spatial (only for approach "quarter circle, semi circle or straight")

mm

Removing (Rectangular pocket, only for roughing)

Complete machining: The rectangular pocket is milled out of the solid material.

Re-machining: An already existing small rectangular pocket or a bore is enlarged in one or more axes. In this case the parameters AZ, W1, and L1 must be programmed.

Alignment (Engraving)

Linear alignment

Curved alignment, arch at the top

Curved alignment, arch at the bottom

Section 5


Notes.

Milling

Unit

Selection (Thread-milling)

Selection of table values:

M3, M10, etc. (ISO metric)

W3/4"; etc. (Whitworth BSW)

G3/4"; etc. (Whitworth BSP)

1" - 8 UNC; etc. (UNC)

AZ Depth of roughing

(only for re-machining)

mm

β1 End-angle to X-axis Degrees

β2 Opening angle of the circle

Degrees

Machining (Planar-/thread-milling)

Roughing

Finishing

Machining (Rectangular/round spigot) (path milling)

Roughing

Finishing

Chamfering

Machining (Rectangular/circ. pocket) (Longitudinal/circ. slot) (multi edge spigot) (Rectangular/circ. spigot)

Roughing

Finishing

Finishing edge

Chamfering

Section 5


Notes:

Milling

Unit

Machining plane

Selection of the machining plane

G17 (X/Y)

G18 (Z/X)

G19 (Y/Z)

Machining type

(Circular pocket)

Centric: Clearing a circular pocket plane-by-plane

Helical: Clearing a circular pocket helically

Machining face

(Planar milling)

Front Y:

Machining on a front face with Y-axis

Mantle Y:

Machining on a cylindrical surface with

Y-axis

Machining face

(Rectangular/circ. spigot) Thread milling)

Front C:

Machining on a front face with C-axis

Front Y:


Mantle Y:


Y-axis

Machining face

(Rectangular pocket) (Longitudinal/circular slot) (Open slot) (Circ. spigot) (Engraving) (Path milling)

Front C:

Machining on a front face with C-axis

Front Y:


Mantle C


C-axis

Mantle Y


Y-axis

Machining direction

(Thread mill-ing)

Z0 → Z1 Machining from top to bottom

Z1 → Z0 Machining from bottom to top

Section 5


Notes.

Milling

Unit

Machining direction (Path milling)

Machining in the programmed contour direction

Forward: The machining takes place in the pro-grammed contour direction

Backward: The machining takes place against the programmed contour direction

Machining location (Rectangular pocket) (Longitudinal slot)

Single location: Milling a rectangular pocket at the pro-grammed location (X0, Y0, Z0) .

Location pattern: Location MCALL

Machining location (circular pocket)

Single location: Milling a circular pocket at the programmed location (X0, Y0, Z0).

Location pattern: Several circular pockets are milled on a location pattern (e.g. full circle, pitch circle, grid etc.).

Machining location (Rectangular/circular spigot)

Single location: Milling a rectangular/circular spigot at a programmed location (X0, Y0, Z0).

Location pattern: Location with MCALL.

Section 5


Notes:

Milling

Unit

Machining location (multi-edge spigot)

Single location: A multi-edge spigot is milled at the programmed location (X0, Y0, Z0).

Location pattern: Several multi-edge spigots are milled on the programmed location pattern (e.g. pitch circle, grid, straight line).

Machining location (Open slot)

Single location: Milling a slot at the programmed location (X0, Y0, Z0).

Location pattern: Milling of several slots on a programmed location pattern (e.g. full circle or grid).

Reference point (Open slot)

Location of the reference point:

Left edge

Centre

Right edge

Reference point (Engraving)


Bottom left

Bottom centre

Bottom right

Top left

Top centre

Top right

Centre left

Centre

Centre right

Reference point (Slot)


Left edge

Inside left

Centre

Inside right

Right edge

Section 5


Notes.

Milling

Unit

Reference point (Rectangular pocket)

The following various locations of the reference point can be selected:

Centre

Bottom left

Bottom right

Top left

Top right

CP Positioning angle for machining range (only for front Y)

Degrees

C0 Positioning angle for machining face (only for mantle Y)

Degrees

Ø (Circular pocket)

Diameter of the pocket

mm

Ø (Circular spigot)

Diameter of the spigot

mm

Ø (Thread-milling)

Nominal diameter, Example: Nominal diameter of M12 = 12 mm

mm

Ø1(Circular-spigot, multi-edge spigot)

Diameter of the blank spigot

mm

Ø1 (Circular pocket)

Diameter of pre-machining (only for re-machining)

mm

D Cutting edge number of the tool (1 - 9)

Direction of rotation (Thread-milling)

Direction of the thread rotation:

Right hand thread A right-hand thread is milled

Left hand thread A left-hand thread is milled

Rotation (Milling)

Rotation clockwise

Rotation counter-clockwise

Section 5


Notes:

Milling

Unit

DX1 (Engraving)

Character spacing or total width (only for linear alignment)

for front face machining

mm

DX Maximum depth infeed mm

DXY Maximum plane infeed

Alternatively the plane infeed can also be stated as a percentage ratio of plane infeed (mm) to the milling cutter diameter (mm)

mm

%

DY1 (Engraving)

Character spacing or total width (only for linear alignment) for mantle machining

mm

DYZ Maximum plane infeed

Alternatively the plane infeed can also be de-fined as a percentage ratio of the plane infeed (mm) to the milling cutter diameter (mm)

mm

%

DZ Maximum depth infeed (only for roughing)

mm

Plunging

(Rectangular pocket) (Longitudinal slot)

(Pocket milling)

Vertical: Vertical plunging to the pocket centre

Helical: Plunging along a spiral path

Oscillating: Plunging with an oscillating motion along the central axis of the rectangular pocket.

Plunging

(Circular pocket)

Vertical: Vertical plunging at the centre of pocket.

Helical: Plunging along a spiral path

EP (Rectangular/circular pocket)

Maximum pitch of the helix (only for helical plunging)

mm/rev

Section 5


Notes.

Milling

Unit

ER (Rectangular/circular

pocket)

Radius of the helix

(only for helical plunging)

mm

EW (Rectangular pocket) (Longitudinal slot)

Maximum plunge angle (only for oscillatory plunging)

Degrees

F Feed mm/min

mm/rev

FR (Path milling)

Retraction feed for intermediate positioning

Milling direction (Open slot)

Milling direction (other than plunge milling)

Climb milling

Conventional milling

FS (Rectangular/circular pocket) (Rectangular/circular spigot) (Path milling)

Chamfer width for chamfering (only for chamfering)

mm

FX (Rectangular/circular pocket) (Longitudinal slot)

Infeed feed depth (only for vertical and pre-drilled plunging) for mantle C/Y

mm/min

mm/tooth

FZ (Rectangular/circular pocket) (Longitudinal slot)

Infeed feed depth (only for vertical and pre-drilled plunging) for front C/Y machining

mm/min

mm/tooth

Engraving text (Engraving)

Maximum 100 characters

H1 (Thread-milling)

Thread depth mm

Section 5


Notes:

Milling

Unit

I Circle centre point in X-direction (abs or inc) mm

J Circle centre point in Y-direction (abs or inc) mm

Circular

pattern (Circular slot)

Full circle: The circular slots are positioned on a full circle. The distance of one circular slot to the next circular slot is always the same and is determined by the control unit.

Pitch circle: The circular slots are positioned on a pitch circle. The distance of one circular slot to the next circular slot can be determined by means of angle α2.

L1 (Rectangular pocket)

Pre-machined pocket length (only for further machining)

mm

L1 (Rectangular spigot)

Blank material length of spigot (only for further machining)

mm

L1 (Path milling)

Approach length (only for approach "Straight")

mm

L2 (Path milling)

Exit length (only for exiting "Straight")

mm

L2

(Circle)

(abs) Distance between pole and circle centre point

(inc) Distance between the last point and circle centre point

mm

mm

L Length of pocket, spigot, slot, straight mm

Position of the thread (Thread-milling)

Position of the thread:

Internal thread: An internal thread is milled

External thread: An external thread is milled

Section 5


Notes.

Milling

Unit

N (multi-edge spigot)

Number of edges

N (Circular slot)

Number of slots

NT (Thread milling)

Number of teeth per cutter

P (Thread milling)

Thread pitch…

in modulus: modulus = pitch/π

in mm/rev

in inch/rev

in threads per inch

The thread pitch depends on the tool

used

modulus

mm/rev

in/rev

Threads/"

PL Machining plane

G17 (XY)

G18 (ZX)

G19 (YZ)

Positioning (Circular slot)

Positioning between the slots:

Straight: The next location is approached along a straight line at rapid traverse.

Circle: The next location is approached along a circular path at the programmed feedrate

R1 (multi-edge spigot)

Rounding radius mm

R2 (Path milling)

Exit radius (only when exiting contour with "quarter circle or semi circle")

mm

Section 5


Notes:

Milling

Unit

R (Rectangular pocket/spigot)

Corner radius mm

R (circular slot)

Radius of the circular slot mm

R (Milling)

Radius of the circle mm

RP (Centring)

Retraction plane mm

Radius cor-rection (Path milling)

Left (machining to the left of the contour)

Right (machining to the right of the contour)

OFF

(machining tool centre path)

Direction Same machining direction

to the right

to the top

Changing machining direction

meandering left/right

meandering up/down

S Spindle speed rev/min

Stop-Position Input of the spindle position in degrees

Starting point

(Pocket milling)

Manually preset starting point

Automatic starting point calculation

SW (multi-edge spigot)

Spanner size A/F

T Input of the tool (Name or number)

Section 5


Notes.

Milling

Unit

Table (Thread-milling)

Selection the thread table:

without

ISO Metric

Whitworth BSW

Whitworth BSP

UNC

Techno-logy (Open slot)

Whirling: Circular motion of the cutter through the slot and back again

Plunge milling: Sequential boring motions along the tool axis.

TR (Pocket Rest-material)

Reference tool for rest material machining

U (Thread-Milling)

Finishing allowance in Y and X mm

UX (Longitudinal slot)

Finishing allowance depth

mm

UXY Finishing allowance plane mm

UYZ Finishing allowance plane mm

UZ Finishing allowance depth mm

V Feed constant cutting speed

m/min

Section 5


Notes:

Milling

Unit

W (Rectangular pocket)

Width of the pocket mm

W (Rectangular spigot)

Width of the spigot mm

W (Longitudinal/circular slot)

Width of the slot mm

W (Engraving)

Character height mm

W1 (Rectangular pocket)

Width of the pre-machining (only for further machining)

mm

W1 (Rectangular spigot)

Width of the raw material spigot (Important for the determination of the approach location)

mm

X0 (Rectangular /circular pocket) (Rectangular spigot)

Reference point X (only for single location)

mm

X0 (Planar milling)

Reference point 1 X

mm

X1 (Planar milling)

Reference point 2 X (abs) or reference point 2X referred to X0 )inc)

mm

X1 (Rectangular/circular spigot)

Spigot depth (abs) or depth referred to Z0 or X0 (inc)

mm

X1 (Longitudinal slot)

Slot depth (abs) or depth referred to Z0 or X0 (inc)

mm

XFS Plunging depth of tool tip (abs or inc) (only for chamfering) Machining mantle C/Y

mm

XM (Engraving)

Centre point X (abs) or centre point polar length (only for curved alignment)

mm or Degrees

XS (Pocket milling)

Starting point X (only if starting point is preset manually)

Section 5


Notes.

Milling

Unit

Y0 (Rectangular/circular pocket) (Rectangular spigot)

Reference point Y (only for a single location)

mm or Degrees

Y0 (Planar milling)

Reference point 1 in Y

mm

Y1 (Planar milling)

Reference point 2 in Y referred to Y0

mm

YM (Engraving)

Centre point Y (abs) or C (abs) (only for curved alignment) (only for machining mantle C/Y)

mm or Degrees

YS (Pocket Milling)

Starting point Y (only if starting point is preset manually)

Z0 (Rectangular/circular pocket) (Rectangular spigot)

Reference point Z (only for single location)

mm

Z0 (Planar milling)

Height of blank material

mm

Z1 (Planar milling)

Height of the finished item referred to Z0

mm

Z1 Final depth (abs) or final depth referred to Z0 or X0 (inc)

mm

Z1 (Engraving)

Engraving depth (abs) or depth referred to Z0 or X0 (inc)

mm

Z1 (Thread-milling)


mm

ZFS Plunging depth tool point (abs or inc) (only for chamfering) (only for machining front C/Y)

mm

ZM (Engraving)

Centre point Z (abs) (only for curved alignment) (only for machining mantle C/Y)

mm

Section 5



Drawings of programming examples

1 Brief description


This module provides the means to carry out further exercises regarding the programming with Shop-Mill and to consolidate the programming knowledge so far attained.


This module contains all the drawings that were used in the individual modules so far and additional work piece drawings as exercises for the consolidation of the acquired knowledge.

B700

Content:

Shop drawings

- Mould

- Mould plate

- Guide plate_1

- Mounting plate

- Perforated plate

- Housing cover

- Longitudinal guide

- Example_1

- Mould_2

- Exhibition example

- Mould plate_2

- Excercise_12

- Flange

- Pressure plate

- Guide plate_2

- Kidney-shaped plate

- Con-rod

- Wing

- Connecting piece


B700

B700

Notes :


Drawings of programming examples: Description

This module contains all the drawings that were used in the individual modules so far and additional work piece drawings as exercises for the consolida-tion of the acquired knowl-edge.

Drawings of programming

examples: START

Mould

Mould Plate

Guide Plate_1

Mounting Plate

Perforated Plate

Housing Cover

Longitudinal guide

Example_1

Drawings of programming

examples: END

Mould_2

Mould plate_2

Flange

Pressure plate

Exhibition example

Exercise-12

Guide plate_2

Connecting piece

Wing

Con-rod

Kidney-shaped plate


Notes:

Shop drawings Section 2

A

A

R20

0

75

95

5

14

5

150

10

020

5

5

4°

60

40

30°

R6

75

2515

M10

30

12

0

50

- 12

- 12

2.1 Mould

Y

X


Notes:


R5

35

60

70

100

90

100

A

A

A-A

R30

40

20

22

22

150

5

15

25

R36

R23

80°

5

R151

0

2.2 Mould plate

Y

X


Notes:


A

A

A-A

15

10

30

120

240

140

240

30

R20

R10

70

2.3 Guide plate_1

Y

X

Scaling factor: 1,5


Notes:


2.4 Mounting plate

Ø50

75

100

10

25

10

0

Y

X


Notes:


2.5 Perforated plate

100

90

30

10

25

Ø25

20

20

25

R5

10

0

Alle nicht bemaßten Radien 5 mm

Y

X


Notes:


2.6 Housing cover

AA

Section A-A

150

10

0

R20

10

15

403

0

35

25

Ø8

M10

Y

X


Notes:


2.7 Longitudinal guide

Ø40

61

100

80

100

130

150

A

A

20

10

M10

Ø10

Ø11

Y

X


Notes:


2.8 Example_1

9

12

53

108

27

27

84

24

36

516

0

105

R14

Y

X


Notes:


2.9 Mould_2

A

A

60

40

30°

Ø30

R20

0

25

50

75

95

305 75

120

145

150

100

20

5

10

15

R6

Y

X


Notes:


2.10 Exhibition example

R45

8

15 30

R25

70

90

100

15

R5

70

A30

30

R5

60°

10

M6

10

15

5

Ø30

Y

X


Notes:


2.11 Mould plate_2

45

45

45

R5

20

Ø10Ø10

10

15

35

(42

.5)

60

70

85

100

90

92

.5

10

0

Ø30R22,5

R30

R36

R15

A

A

A-A

Y

X


Notes:


2.12 Excercise_12

A

A

10

0

80

120

150

R15

R10

70

60

100

90

R18

15°

108,5

20

10

4

8

Ø50

Section A-A

Y

X


Notes:


2.13 Flange

150

132

10

0

50

82

8

R25

R42

R52

110°

8

40°

R10

R518

18

5

20

10

Y

X


Notes:

2.14 Pressure plate

20

40

60

83

40

10 5

115

140

90

5

15

15

10

15

15 15

15

R5

R10

R5

R5

R6

Y

X



Notes:

140

R20

R15

40

20

90

40

160

160

A A

Section A-A

10

35

40

60

M12

2.15 Guide plate_2

Y

X



Notes:

2.16 Kidney-shaped plate

200

20

015

30

60

50

R20

R80

R75

R10

15

5

Y

X



Notes:

A

A

Section A-A

75

20

R5

R20

12

20

R18

11

5±0

,1

18

8

6

22

28

2.17 Con-rod

Y

X



Notes:

2.18 Wing

25°

R25

R50

R45

10

R10

Ø110

15

5

10

Y

X



Notes:

2.19 Connecting piece

116,8

AA

R3

12

4

5

Ø10H7

Ø16

Ø26

Ø40

Ø26

Ø38

1

4

42,5

Ø14H7

15

Section A-A

Y

X



Notes:

B700B700 828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

en_ complete sinumerik operate milling_v26

Documents

cncprogram programming

area program b572

general layout

technological commands

cncprograma cncprogram

area program manager

d sl sinumerik

b551 b551 b551 page